[docs] remove {{docs_base_url}}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/index.md
index 7ce09d3..2ed4ed3 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/index.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/index.md
@@ -2,5 +2,5 @@
Learn ERPNext by watching the user manual or training videos.
-1. [User Manual]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual)
-1. [Help Videos]({{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn)
+1. [User Manual](/docs/user/manual)
+1. [Help Videos](/docs/user/videos/learn)
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/contact.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/contact.md
index b937c65..49b5ffb 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/contact.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/contact.md
@@ -7,11 +7,11 @@
> CRM > Dokumente > Kontakt > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kontakt" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/contact.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kontakt" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/contact.png">
Alternativ können Sie einen Kontakt oder eine Adresse auch direkt aus dem Kundendatensatz erstellen. Klicken Sie hierzu auf "Neuer Kontakt" oder "Neue Adresse".
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kontakt" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/contact-from-cust.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kontakt" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/contact-from-cust.png">
> Tipp: Wenn Sie in einer beliebigen Transaktion einen Kunden auswählen, wird ein Kontakt und eine Adresse vorselektiert. Das sind dann der Standardkontakt und die Standardadresse.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/customer.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/customer.md
index c730c68..c7d6654 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/customer.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/customer.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
> CRM > Dokumente > Kunde > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kunde" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/create-customer.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kunde" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/create-customer.gif">
oder einen Upload über ein Datenimportwerkzeug durchführen.
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
Kontakte und Adressen werden in ERPNext getrennt gespeichert, damit Sie mehrere verschiedene Kontakte oder Adressen mit Kunden und Lieferanten verknüpfen können.
-Lesen Sie hierzu auch [Kontakt]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/CRM/contact.html).
+Lesen Sie hierzu auch [Kontakt](/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/contact.html).
### Einbindung in Konten
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/lead.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/lead.md
index 8bb9ce4..47a4492 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/lead.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/lead.md
@@ -16,6 +16,6 @@
> CRM > Dokumente > Lead > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lead" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/lead.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lead" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/lead.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/newsletter.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/newsletter.md
index 8a18e64..bc7e989 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/newsletter.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/newsletter.md
@@ -7,8 +7,8 @@
Wählen Sie die Liste der Empfänger aus, an die Sie die E-Mail senden wollen. Tragen Sie Ihren Inhalt in das Nachrichtenfeld ein und versenden Sie den Newsletter. Wenn Sie die E-Mail vorher testen wollen, um zu sehen, wie sie für den Empfänger aussieht, können Sie die Testfunktion nutzen. Speichern Sie das Dokument vor dem Test. Eine Test-E-Mail wird dann an Ihr E-Mail-Konto gesendet. Sie können die E-Mail an alle vorgesehenen Empfänger senden, wenn Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Senden" klicken.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Newsletter - Neu" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/newsletter-new.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Newsletter - Neu" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/newsletter-new.png">
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Newsletter - Test" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/newsletter-test.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Newsletter - Test" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/newsletter-test.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/opportunity.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/opportunity.md
index c9122f3..181348f 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/opportunity.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/opportunity.md
@@ -11,11 +11,11 @@
### Abbildung 1: Opportunity erstellen
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Opportunity" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/opportunity.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Opportunity" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/opportunity.png">
### Abbildung 2: Opportunity aus einem offenen Lead heraus erstellen
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Opportunity" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/lead-to-opportunity.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Opportunity" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/lead-to-opportunity.png">
Eine Opportunity kann auch aus einem bereits vorhandenen Kunden heraus entstehen. Sie können mehrere verschiedene Opportunities zum gleichen Lead erstellen. In einer Opportunity können Sie abgesehen von der Kommunikation auch die Artikel mit vermerken, nach denen der Lead oder Kontakt sucht.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/campaign.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/campaign.md
index c9b1ac8..700bb32 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/campaign.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/campaign.md
@@ -3,19 +3,19 @@
Eine Kampagne ist eine groß angelegte Umsetzung einer Vertriebsstrategie um ein Produkt oder eine Dienstleistung zu bewerben. Dies erfolgt in einem Marktsegment in einer bestimmten geographischen Region um bestimmte Ziele zu erreichen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kampagne" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/campaign.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kampagne" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/campaign.png">
-Sie können in einer Kampagne [Leads]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/CRM/lead.html), [Opportunities]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/CRM/opportunity.html) und [Angebote]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/selling/quotation.html) nachverfolgen.
+Sie können in einer Kampagne [Leads](/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/lead.html), [Opportunities](/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/opportunity.html) und [Angebote](/docs/user/manual/de/selling/quotation.html) nachverfolgen.
### Leads zu einer Kampagne nachverfolgen
* Um einen Lead zu einer Kampagne nach zu verfolgen, wählen Sie "Leads anzeigen" aus.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kampange - Leads ansehen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/campaign-view-leads.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kampange - Leads ansehen" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/campaign-view-leads.png">
* Sie sollten jetzt eine gefilterte Übersicht aller Leads erhalten, die zu dieser Kampagne gehören.
* Sie können auch einen neuen Lead erstellen indem Sie auf "Neu" klicken.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kampagne - Neuer Lead" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/campaign-new-lead.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kampagne - Neuer Lead" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/campaign-new-lead.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/customer-group.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/customer-group.md
index 4cdeb22..c7ec3e2 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/customer-group.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/customer-group.md
@@ -3,10 +3,10 @@
Kundengruppen versetzen Sie in die Lage Ihre Kunden zu organisieren. Sie können auch Rabatte auf der Basis von Kundengruppen berechnen. Außerdem können Sie Trendanalysen für jede Gruppe erstellen. Typischerweise werden Kunden nach Marktsegmenten gruppiert (das basiert normalerweise auf Ihrer Domäne).
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Baumstruktur der Kundengruppen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/customer-group-tree.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Baumstruktur der Kundengruppen" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/customer-group-tree.png">
> Tipp: Wenn Sie der Meinung sind, dass hier zu viel Aufwand getrieben wird, dann können Sie es bei einer Standard-Kundengruppe belassen. Aber der gesamte Aufwand wird sich dann auszahlen, wenn Sie die ersten Berichte erhalten. Ein Beispiel eines Berichts ist unten abgebildet.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Vertriebsanalyse" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/sales-analytics-customer.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Vertriebsanalyse" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/sales-analytics-customer.gif">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/sales-person.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/sales-person.md
index 77d6ea0..f615da4 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/sales-person.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/sales-person.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
Vertriebsmitarbeiter verhalten sich wie Regionen. Sie können ein Organigramm der Vertriebsmitarbeiter erstellen, in dem individuell das Vertriebsziel des Vertriebsmitarbeiters vermerkt werden kann. Genauso wie in der Region muss das Ziel einer Artikelgruppe zugeordnet werden.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Baumstruktur der Vertriebsmitarbeiter" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/sales-person-tree.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Baumstruktur der Vertriebsmitarbeiter" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/sales-person-tree.png">
### Vertriebspersonen in Transaktionen
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/accounting-entries.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/accounting-entries.md
index fc5a259..8367dbf 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/accounting-entries.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/accounting-entries.md
@@ -5,19 +5,19 @@
* Max Mustermann (Inhaber des Teeladens) investiert 25.000 Euro um die Geschäftstätigkeit zu beginnen.
-
+
**Analyse:** Max Mustermann investiert 25.000 Euro in das Unternehmen in der Hoffnung Gewinne zu erhalten. In anderen Worten schuldet die Firma 25.000 Euro an Max Mustermann, die in der Zukunft zurück gezahlt werden müssen. Deshalb ist das Konto Max Mustermann ein Verbindlichkeitenkonto und wird im Haben gebucht. Aufgrund der Investition steigen die Barmittel der Firma, "Kasse" ist ein Vermögenswert des Unternehmens und wird im Soll gebucht.
* Die Firma benötigt sofort Geschäftsausstattung (Kocher, Teekannen, Tassen, etc.) und Rohmaterial (Tee, Zucker, Milch, etc.). Max Mustermann beschliesst im nächstgelegenen Gemischtwarenladen "Superbasar", mit dem er freundschaftlich verbunden ist, einzukaufen, und erhält dort Kredit. Die Geschäftsausstattung hat einen Wert von 2.800 Euro und das Rohmaterial von 2.200 Euro. Er zahlt 2.000 Euro von den insgesamt 5.000 Euro.
-
+
**Analyse:** Die Geschäftsausstattung ist Anlagevermögen der Firma (weil sie eine lange Lebensdauer hat) und das Rohmaterial ist Umlaufvermögen (weil es für das Tagesgeschäft verwendet wird). Aus diesem Grund wurden die Konten "Geschäftsausstattung" und "Warenbestand" im Soll gebucht und im Bestand erhöht. Max Mustermann zahlt 2.000 Euro, deshalb reduziert sich das Konto "Kasse" um diesen Betrag, weil der Geschäftsvorfall im Haben gebucht wird. Weil Max Mustermann Kredit erhält, und vereinbart wurde, dass 3.000 Euro später an "Superbasar" gezahlt werden, werden 3.000 Euro im Soll auf das Verbindlichkeitenkonto "Superbasar" gebucht.
* Max Mustermann (, der sich um die Buchungen kümmert,) beschliesst zum Ende jeden Tages die Verkäufe zu buchen, so dass er täglich die Verkäufe analysieren kann. Am Ende des allerersten Tages hat der Teeladen 325 Tassen Tee verkauft, was einen Umsatz von 1.575 Euro ergibt. Der Inhaber verbucht hocherfreut die Umsätze seines ersten Tages.
-
+
**Analyse:** Der Ertrag wird auf dem Konto "Teeverkäufe" im Haben verbucht und der selbe Betrag wird auf dem Konto "Kasse" im Soll verbucht. Nehmen wir an, dass es 800 Euro kostet 325 Tassen Tea zuzubereiten. Deshalb reduziert sich das Konto "Waren" im Haben um 800 Euro und der Aufwand wird auf dem Konto "Warenaufwand" in selber Höhe im Soll gebucht.
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
Im Laufe des Monats kauft die Firma weiteres Rohmaterial für die Geschäftstätigkeit ein. Nach einem Monat bucht Max Mustermann den Gewinn um die Bilanz und die Gewinn- und Verlustrechnung auszugleichen. Den Gewinn erhält Max Mustermann und nicht die Firma, da es sich für die Firma um eine Verbindlichkeit handelt (sie muss ihn an Max Mustermann zahlen). Wenn die Bilanz nicht ausgeglichen ist, d. h. Aktive und Passive nicht gleich sind, dann wurde der Gewinn noch nicht verbucht. Um den Gewinn zu buchen, muss der folgende Buchungssatz erstellt werden:
-
+
Erklärung: Die Nettoumsätze und Aufwände der Firme belaufen sich auf 40.000 bzw. 20.000 Euro. Die Firma hat also einen Gewinn von 20.000 Euro erwirtschaftet. Bei der Verbuchung des Gewinns wird dieser auf dem Konto GuV im Soll gebucht und die Gegenbuchung auf dem Konto "Eigenkapital" im Haben. Der Saldo des Kassenkontos der Firma beträgt 44.000 Euro und es ist Rohmaterial im Wert von 1.000 Euro übrig.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/accounting-reports.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/accounting-reports.md
index b9f0fca..deab83b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/accounting-reports.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/accounting-reports.md
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
Das Hauptbuch basiert auf der Tabelle der Hauptbucheinträge und kann nach einem Konto und einem Zeitraum gefiltert werden. Das hilft Ihnen dabei einen Überblick über alle Buchungen zu erhalten, die zu einem Konto in einem bestimmten Zeitraum getätigt wurden.
<img alt="Hauptbuch" class="screenshot"
- src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/general-ledger.png">
+ src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/general-ledger.png">
### Probebilanz
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@
* Summe Haben
* Schlußstand
-<img alt="Probebilanz" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/trial-balance.png">
+<img alt="Probebilanz" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/trial-balance.png">
Die Summe aller Schlußstände in einer Probebilanz muss 0 sein.
@@ -27,12 +27,12 @@
Diese Berichte helfen Ihnen dabei, die offenen Posten bei Rechnungen von Kunden und Lieferanten nachzuverfolgen. In diesem Bericht sehen Sie die offenen Beträge nach Zeiträumen geordnet, d. h. 0-30 Tage, 30-60 Tage und so weiter.
-<img alt="Forderungskonten" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/accounts-receivable.png">
+<img alt="Forderungskonten" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/accounts-receivable.png">
### Auflistung der Verkäufe und Einkäufe
In diesem Bericht wird jedes Steuerkonto in Spalten dargestellt. Für jede Rechnung und jeden Rechnungsposten erhalten Sie den Betrag und die individuelle Steuer, die gezahlt wurde, basierend auf der Tabelle der Steuern und Abgaben.
-<img alt="Übersicht Verkäufe" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/sales-register.png">
+<img alt="Übersicht Verkäufe" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/sales-register.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
index 288b35e..54633b2 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
#### Abbildung 1: Journalbuchung bei Vorkasse
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Anzahlung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/advance-payment-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Anzahlung" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/advance-payment-1.png">
### Doppelte Buchführung
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@
#### Abbildung 2: Transaktion und Ausgleichsbuchung
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Anzahlung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/advance-payment-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Anzahlung" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/advance-payment-2.png">
Speichern und übertragen Sie den Buchungssatz. Wenn das Dokument nicht gespeichert wird, dann wird es in anderen Buchungsdokumenten nicht übernommen.
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
#### Abbildung 3: Anzahlung erhalten
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Anzahlung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/advance-payment-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Anzahlung" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/advance-payment-3.png">
Speichern und übertragen Sie die Ausgangsrechnung
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/budgeting.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/budgeting.md
index 88ef179..7495e3c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/budgeting.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/budgeting.md
@@ -11,29 +11,29 @@
#### Schritt 1: Klicken Sie auf "Öffnen
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Budget" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/budgeting-cost-center.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Budget" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/budgeting-cost-center.png">
#### Schritt 2: Monatliche Verteilung eingeben
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Budget" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/budget-account.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Budget" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/budget-account.png">
Wenn Sie die Verteilungs-ID leer lassen, kalkuliert ERPNext auf einer jährlichen Basis und bricht auf die Monate herunter.
#### Schritt 3: Fügen Sie eine neue Zeile hinzu und wählen Sie das Budget-Konto
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Budget" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/budget-account.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Budget" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/budget-account.png">
### Anlegen einer neuen Verteilungs-ID
ERPNext erlaubt es Ihnen einige Aktionen für Budgets einzustellen. Das legt fest, ob bei Überschreiten des Budgets gestoppt, gewarnte oder ignoriert werden soll.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Monthly Distribution" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/monthly-budget-distribution.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Monthly Distribution" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/monthly-budget-distribution.png">
Das kann über die Firmenstammdaten eingestellt werden.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Budget Variance Report" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/budget-variance-report.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Budget Variance Report" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/budget-variance-report.png">
Auch dann, wenn Sie für überschrittene Budgets "ignorieren" auswählen, bekommen Sie eine Fülle von Informationen über den Bericht zur Abweichung zwischen Budget und Istwert. Dieser Bericht zeigt Ihnen auf monatlicher Basis die tatsächlichen Ausgaben verglichen mit den budgetierten Ausgaben.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md
index 551367e..b9e93e0 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
Sie können in ERPNext leicht die finanzielle Lage Ihres Unternehmens einsehen. Ein Beispiel für eine Finanzanalyse sehen Sie unten abgebildet.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Finanzanalyse Bilanz" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/financial-analytics-bl.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Finanzanalyse Bilanz" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/financial-analytics-bl.png">
Um Ihren Kontenplan in ERPNext zu bearbeiten gehen Sie zu:
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
Lassen Sie uns die Hauptgruppen des Kontenplans besser verstehen lernen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kontenplan" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/chart-of-accounts-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kontenplan" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/chart-of-accounts-1.png">
### Bilanzkonten
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
In ERPNext ist es einfach eine graphische Auswertung von Gewinn und Verlust zu erstellen. Im Folgenden ist ein Beispiel einer GuV-Analyse abgebildet:
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Finanzanalyse GuV" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/financial-analytics-pl.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Finanzanalyse GuV" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/financial-analytics-pl.png">
(Am ersten Tag eines Jahres haben Sie noch keinen Gewinn oder Verlust gemacht, aber Sie haben bereits Vermögen, deshalb haben Bestandskonten zum Anfang oder Ende eines Zeitraums einen Wert.)
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@
> Anmerkung: Ein Kontenbuch wird manchmal auch als Kontokopf bezeichnet.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kontenplan" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/chart-of-accounts-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kontenplan" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/chart-of-accounts-2.png">
### Andere Kontentypen
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@
Um ein neues Konto zu erstellen, gehen Sie Ihren Kontenplan durch und klicken Sie auf die Kontengruppe unter der Sie das neue Konto erstellen wollen. Auf der rechten Seite finden Sie die Option ein neues Konto zu "öffnen" oder ein Unterkonto zu erstellen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kontenplan" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/chart-of-accounts-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kontenplan" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/chart-of-accounts-3.png">
Die Option zum Erstellen erscheint nur dann, wenn Sie auf ein Konto vom Typ Gruppe (Ordner) klicken.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/credit-limit.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/credit-limit.md
index dc13819..b769817 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/credit-limit.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/credit-limit.md
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
### Abbildung 1: Kreditlinie
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kreditlimit" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/credit-limit-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kreditlimit" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/credit-limit-1.png">
Gehen Sie zum Abschnitt "Kreditlimit" und geben Sie den Betrag in das Feld "Kreditlimit" ein.
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
### Abbildung 2: Kredit-Controller
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kreditlimit" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/credit-limit-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kreditlimit" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/credit-limit-2.png">
Speichern Sie die Änderungen
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/item-wise-tax.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/item-wise-tax.md
index 2ebe80f..768693c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/item-wise-tax.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/item-wise-tax.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
Die Artikelstammdaten beinhalten eine Tabelle, in der Sie Steuern, die angewendet werden sollen, auflisten können.
-
+
Der im Artikelstamm angegebene Steuersatz hat gegenüber dem Steuersatz, der in Transaktionen angegeben wird, Vorrang.
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@
Beispiel: Wenn Sie Artikel mit 5% Umsatzsteuer haben, bei anderen eine Dienstleistungssteuer anfällt und bei wieder anderen eine Luxussteuer, dann sollten Ihre Steuerstammdaten auch alle drei Steuern enthalten.
-
+
#### Schritt 3: Steuersatz in den Stammdaten für Steuern und Abgaben auf 0 einstellen
@@ -27,6 +27,6 @@
Basierend auf den obigen Einstellungen werden Steuern also wie in den Artikelstammdaten angegeben angewendet. Probieren Sie beispielsweise Folgendes aus:
-
+
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/journal-entry.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/journal-entry.md
index 0885130..3ccc049 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/journal-entry.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/journal-entry.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
> Rechnungswesen > Dokumente > Journalbuchung > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Buchungssatz" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/journal-entry.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Buchungssatz" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/journal-entry.png">
In einem Buchungssatz müssen Sie folgendes tun:
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/making-payments.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/making-payments.md
index 0c2e041..00c8d10 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/making-payments.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/making-payments.md
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
1. Geben Sie Schecknummer und Scheckdatum ein.
1. Speichern und Übertragen Sie.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Zahlungen durchführen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/make-payment.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Zahlungen durchführen" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/make-payment.png">
Zahlungen können auch unabhängig von Rechnungen erstellt werden, indem Sie einen neuen Journalbeleg erstellen und die Zahlungsart auswählen.
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
### Beispiel eines Buchungssatzes für eine Zahlung
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Zahlungen durchführen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/new-bank-entry.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Zahlungen durchführen" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/new-bank-entry.png">
---
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md
index ad9eaaf..0b0adaa 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md
@@ -7,15 +7,15 @@
Um mit Buchungen in unterschiedlichen Währungen zu beginnen, müssen Sie die Buchungswährung im Datensatz des Kontos einstellen. Sie können bei der Anlage eine Währung aus dem Kontenplan auswählen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Währung über den Kontenplan einstellen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/chart-of-accounts.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Währung über den Kontenplan einstellen" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/chart-of-accounts.png">
Sie können die Währung auch zuordnen oder bearbeiten, indem Sie den jeweiligen Datensatz für bereits angelegte Konten öffnen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kontenwährung anpassen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/account.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kontenwährung anpassen" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/account.png">
Für Kunden/Lieferanten können Sie die Buchungswährung auch im Gruppendatensatz einstellen. Wenn sich die Buchungswährung der Gruppe von der Firmenwährung unterscheidet, müssen Sie die Standardkonten für Forderungen und Verbindlichkeiten auf diese Währung einstellen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Währung des Kundenkontos" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/customer.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Währung des Kundenkontos" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/customer.png">
Wenn Sie die Buchungswährung für einen Artikel oder eine Gruppe eingestellt haben, können Sie Buchungen zu ihnen erstellen. Wenn sich die Buchungswährung der Gruppe von der Firmenwährung unterscheidet, dann beschränkt das System beim Erstellen von Transaktionen für diese Gruppe Buchungen auf diese Währung. Wenn die Buchungswährung die selbe wie die Firmenwährung ist, können Sie Transaktionen für diese Guppe in jeder beliebigen Währung erstellen. Aber die Hauptbuch-Buchungen werden immer in der Buchungswährung der Gruppe vorliegen. In jedem Fall ist die Wärung des Verbindlichkeitenkontos immer gleich der Buchungswährung der Gruppe.
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
Der ausstehende Betrag und Anzahlungsbeträge werden immer in der Währung des Kundenkontos kalkuliert und angezeigt.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Offene Ausgangsrechnung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/sales-invoice.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Offene Ausgangsrechnung" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/sales-invoice.png">
#### Eingangsrechnung
@@ -43,13 +43,13 @@
In einer Journalbuchung können Sie Transaktionen in unterschiedlichen Währungen erstellen. Es gibt ein Auswahlfeld "Unterschiedliche Währungen" um Buchungen in mehreren Währungen zu aktivieren. Wenn die Option "Unterschiedliche Währungen" ausgewählt wurde, können Sie Konten mit unterschiedlichen Währungen auswählen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Wechselkurs im Buchungssatz" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/journal-entry-multi-currency.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Wechselkurs im Buchungssatz" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/journal-entry-multi-currency.png">
In der Kontenübersicht zeigt das System den Abschnitt Währung an und holt sich die Kontenwährung und den Wechselkurs automatisch, wenn Sie ein Konto mit ausländischer Währung auswählen. Sie können den Wechselkurs später manuell ändern/anpassen.
In einem einzelnen Buchungssatz können Sie nur Konten mit einer alternativen Währung auswählen, abweichend von Konten in der Firmenwährung. Die Beträge für Soll und Haben sollten in der Kontenwährung eingegeben werden, das System berechnet und zeigt dann den Betrag für Soll und Haben automatisch in der Firmenwährung.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Buchungssatz mit verschiedenen Währungen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/journal-entry-row.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Buchungssatz mit verschiedenen Währungen" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/journal-entry-row.png">
#### Beispiel 1: Zahlungsbuchung eines Kunden in alternativer Währung
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@
Der Wechselkurs in der Zahlungsbuchung sollte immer der selbe wie auf der Rechnung (60) sein, auch dann, wenn der Wechselkurs am Tag der Zahlung 62 beträgt. Dem Bankkonto wird der Betrag mit einem Wechselkurs von 62 gut geschrieben. Deshalb wird ein Wechelkursgewinn bzw. -verlust basierend auf dem Unterschied im Wechselkurs gebucht.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Zahlungsbuchung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/payment-entry.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Zahlungsbuchung" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/payment-entry.png">
#### Beispiel 2: Überweisung zwischen Banken (US-Dollar -> Indische Rupien)
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@
Angenommen, der Wechselkurs am Zahlungstag ist 62, dann schaut die Buchung zur Banküberweisung wie folgt aus:
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Übertrag zwischen den Banken" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/bank-transfer.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Übertrag zwischen den Banken" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/bank-transfer.png">
### Berichte
@@ -108,12 +108,12 @@
Im Hauptbuch zeigt das System den Betrag einer Gutschrift/Lastschrift in beiden Währungen an, wenn nach Konto gefiltert wurde, und wenn die Kontenwährung unterschiedlich zur Firmenwährung ist.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Bericht zum Hauptbuch" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/general-ledger.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Bericht zum Hauptbuch" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/general-ledger.png">
#### Forderungs- und Verbindlichkeitenkonten
Im Bericht zu den Konten Forderungen und Verbindlichkeiten zeigt das System alle Beträge in der Währung der Gruppe/in der Kontenwährung an.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Bericht zu den Forderungen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/accounts-receivable.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Bericht zu den Forderungen" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/accounts-receivable.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/opening-accounts.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/opening-accounts.md
index f264fc8..3edcadc 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/opening-accounts.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/opening-accounts.md
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
Sie können Konten basierend auf Belegarten auswählen. In so einem Szenario sollte Ihre Bilanz ausgeglichen sein.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Eröffnungskonto" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/opening-account-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Eröffnungskonto" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/opening-account-1.png">
Beachten Sie bitte auch, dass das System abstürzt, wenn es mehr als 300 Bücher gibt. Um so eine Situation zu vermeiden, können Sie Konten über temporäre Konten eröffnen.
@@ -38,13 +38,13 @@
Vervollständigen Sie die Buchungssätze auf der Soll- und Haben-Seite.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/opening-6.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/opening-6.png">
Um einen Eröffnungsstand einzupflegen, erstellen Sie einen Buchungssatz für ein Konto oder eine Gruppe von Konten.
Beispiel: Wenn Sie die Kontenstände von drei Bankkonten einpflegen möchten, dann erstellen Sie Buchungssätze der folgenden Art und Weise:
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/opening-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/opening-3.png">
Um einen Ausgleich herzustellen, wird ein temporäres Konto für Vermögen und Verbindlichkeiten verwendet. Wenn Sie einen Anfangsbestand in einem Verbindlichkeitenkonto einpflegen, können Sie zum Ausgleich ein temporäres Vermögenskonto verwenden.
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@
Wenn Sie die Buchungen erstellt haben, schaut der Bericht zur Probebilanz in etwa wie folgt aus:
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Probebilanz" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/opening-4.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Probebilanz" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/opening-4.png">
### Offene Rechnungen
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/opening-entry.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/opening-entry.md
index 8195faf..66c1439 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/opening-entry.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/opening-entry.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
Wenn Sie eine neue Firma erstellen, dann können Sie das ERPNext-Modul Rechnungswesen starten, indem Sie in den Kontenplan gehen.
-Wenn Sie aber von einem reinen Buchhaltungsprogramm wie Tally oder einer FoxPro-basieren Software migrieren, dann lesen Sie unter [Eröffnungsbilanz]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/accounts/opening-accounts.html) nach.
+Wenn Sie aber von einem reinen Buchhaltungsprogramm wie Tally oder einer FoxPro-basieren Software migrieren, dann lesen Sie unter [Eröffnungsbilanz](/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/opening-accounts.html) nach.
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/point-of-sales-invoice.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/point-of-sales-invoice.md
index d64e272..d331259 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/point-of-sales-invoice.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/point-of-sales-invoice.md
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
In ERPNext können über den POS alle Verkaufs- und Einkaufstransaktionen, wie Ausgangsrechnung, Angebot, Kundenauftrag, Lieferantenauftrag, usw. bearbeitet werden. Über folgende zwei Schritte richten Sie den POS ein:
1. Aktivieren Sie die POS-Ansicht über Einstellungen > Anpassen > Funktionseinstellungen
-2. Erstellen Sie einen Datensatz für die [POS-Einstellungen]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/setting-up/pos-setting.html)
+2. Erstellen Sie einen Datensatz für die [POS-Einstellungen](/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/pos-setting.html)
#### Auf die POS-Ansicht umschalten
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
**Barcode/Seriennummer:** Ein Barcode/eine Seriennummer ist eine optionale maschinenlesbare Möglichkeit Daten zu einem Objekt einzulesen, mit dem er/sie verbunden ist. Geben Sie wie auf dem Bild unten angegeben den Barcode/die Seriennummer in das Feld ein und warten Sie einen kurzen Moment, dann wird der Artikel automatisch zum Einkaufswagen hinzugefügt.
-
+
> Tipp: Um die Menge eines Artikels zu ändern, geben Sie die gewünschte Menge im Feld "Menge" ein. Das wird hauptsächliche dann verwendet, wenn ein Artikel in größeren Mengen gekauft wird.
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
> Die Schaltfläche "Löschen" erscheint nur, wenn Artikel ausgewählt wurden.
-
+
### Zahlung durchführen
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@
2. Wählen Sie die Zahlungsart aus.
3. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Zahlen" um das Dokument abzuspeichern.
-
+
Übertragen Sie das Dokument um den Datensatz abzuschliessen. Nachdem das Dokument übertragen wurde, können Sie es entweder ausdrucken oder per E-Mail versenden.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/purchase-invoice.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/purchase-invoice.md
index b3952ef..6aec9b5 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/purchase-invoice.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/purchase-invoice.md
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
oder klicken Sie in einem Lieferantenauftrag oder einem Kaufbeleg auf "Eingangsrechnung erstellen".
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Eingangsrechnung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/purchase-invoice.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Eingangsrechnung" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/purchase-invoice.png">
Das Konzept des Veröffentlichungsdatums ist das gleiche wie bei der Ausgangsrechnung. Rechnungsnummer und Rechnungsdatum helfen Ihnen dabei nachzuvollziehen, unter welchen Daten die Rechnung bei Ihrem Lieferanten ausgewiesen ist.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/sales-invoice.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/sales-invoice.md
index 03b36d8..16339be 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/sales-invoice.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/sales-invoice.md
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
oder indem Sie in der rechten Ecke des Lieferscheins auf "Rechnung erstellen" klicken.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Ausgangsrechnung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/sales-invoice.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Ausgangsrechnung" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/sales-invoice.png">
### Auswirkung auf die Buchhaltung
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/account-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/account-settings.md
index d0d9bef..44aafa4 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/account-settings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/account-settings.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
# Konteneinstellungen
<span class="text-muted contributed-by">Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH</span>
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Konteneinstellungen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/account-settings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Konteneinstellungen" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/account-settings.png">
* Konten gesperrt bis: Sperren Sie Konten-Transaktionen bis zu einem bestimmten Datum. Niemand bis auf die angegebene Rolle kann dann Buchungen zu diesem Konto erstellen oder verändern.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/cost-center.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/cost-center.md
index be42c80..a7ed877 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/cost-center.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/cost-center.md
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
>Rechnungswesen > Einstellungen > Kostenstellenplan
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kostenstellenplan" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/budgeting-cost-center.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kostenstellenplan" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/budgeting-cost-center.png">
Kostenstellen helfen Ihnen bei der Erstellung von Budgets für Geschäftstätigkeiten.
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
> Rechnungswesen > Einstellungen > Budgetverteilung > Neu
-
+
### Budgetaktionen
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.md
index ce4c750..817c557 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.md
@@ -5,6 +5,6 @@
Ein Geschäftsjahr startet normalerweise zu Beginn eines Quartals, wie zum Beispiel am 1. April, 1. Juli oder 1. Oktober. Jedoch geht bei den meisten Firmen das Geschäftsjahr mit dem Kalenderjahr einher und startet am 1. Januar. In den meisten Fällen ist es der einfachere und leichtere Weg. Für einige Organisationen ist es vorteilhaft das Geschäftsjahr zu einem anderen Zeitpunkt zu starten. So können beispielsweise Geschäfte, die saisonal arbeiten zum 1. Juli oder 1. Oktober starten. Ein Geschäft, welches im Herbst den größten Gewinn erwirtschaftet und die größten Ausgaben im Frühling hat, könnte sich auch für den 1. Okober entscheiden. Auf diese Weise weis es wie hoch der Gewinn für das Jahr sein wird und kann seine Ausgaben so anpassen, dass das Gewinnziel erreicht wird.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Geschäftsjahr" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/fiscal-year.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Geschäftsjahr" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/fiscal-year.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/tax-rule.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/tax-rule.md
index 73d4907..52fd1d7 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/tax-rule.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/tax-rule.md
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
# Steuerregeln
<span class="text-muted contributed-by">Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH</span>
-Sie können festlegen, welche [Steuervorlage]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html) auf eine Verkaufs-/Einkaufstransaktion angewendet wird, wenn Sie die Funktion Steuerregel verwenden.
+Sie können festlegen, welche [Steuervorlage](/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html) auf eine Verkaufs-/Einkaufstransaktion angewendet wird, wenn Sie die Funktion Steuerregel verwenden.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Steuerregel" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/tax-rule.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Steuerregel" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/tax-rule.png">
Sie können Steuerregeln für Umsatz- und für Vorsteuern erstellen. Wenn Sie eine Transaktion durchführen, wählt das System Steuervorlagen basierend auf den definierten Steuerregeln aus und wendet sie an. Das System filtert Steuerregeln nach der Anzahl der maximal zutreffenden Bedingungen.
@@ -11,9 +11,9 @@
Angenommen wird haben zwei Steuerregeln wie unten abgebildet erstellt.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Steuerregel" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/tax-rule-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Steuerregel" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/tax-rule-1.png">
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Steuerregel" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/tax-rule-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Steuerregel" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/tax-rule-2.png">
In unserem Beispiel gilt Regel 1 für Indien und Regel 2 für Großbritannien.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.md
index da1901c..47a0dfe 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.md
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
#### Abbilung 1: Kontoauszug
-
+
Wenn Sie den Bericht erhalten, überprüfen Sie bitte, ob das Feld "Abwicklungsdatum" wie bei der Bank angegeben mit dem Kontoauszug übereinstimmt. Wenn die Beträge übereinstimmen, dann werden die Abwicklungsdaten abgeglichen. Wenn die Beträge nicht übereinstimmen, dann überprüfen Sie bitte die Abwicklungsdaten und die Journalbuchungen/Buchungssätze.
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
#### Abbildung 2: Werkzeug zum Kontenabgleich
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kontenabgleich" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/bank-reconciliation.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kontenabgleich" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/bank-reconciliation.png">
**Schritt 5:** Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Abwicklungsdatum aktualisieren"
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.md
index 59b73e8..22e15d4 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
> Rechnungswesen > Werkzeuge > Zahlungsabgleich
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Zahlungsabgleich" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/payment-reconcile-tool.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Zahlungsabgleich" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/payment-reconcile-tool.png">
**Schritt 1:** Wählen Sie das Konto aus, zu dem die Zahlungen abgeglichen werden sollen.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/payment-tool.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/payment-tool.md
index 97795aa..b76945c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/payment-tool.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/payment-tool.md
@@ -23,14 +23,14 @@
* **Hinweis**: Für den Fall, dass der Benutzer an einen Kunden zahlt oder von einem Lieferanten eine Zahlung erhält, fügen Sie manuell Anmerkungen hinzu, die sich auf zutreffende Rechnungen oder Aufträge beziehen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Zahlungswerkzeug" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/payment-tool-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Zahlungswerkzeug" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/payment-tool-1.png">
7\. Sobald die Daten angezogen wurden, klicken Sie auf die detaillierte Buchung und geben Sie den Zahlungsbetrag zur Rechnung/Bestellung/zum Beleg ein.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Zahlungswerkzeug" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/payment-tool-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Zahlungswerkzeug" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/payment-tool-2.png">
8\. Klicken Sie auf "Buchungssatz erstellen" um einen neuen Buchungssatz mit den entsprechenden Einzelheiten zu erstellen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Zahlungswerkzeug" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/payment-tool-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Zahlungswerkzeug" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/payment-tool-3.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md
index 539e7f9..0f94073 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
Das **abzuschließende Geschäftsjahr** ist das Jahr, für das Sie Ihre Finanzbuchhaltung abschliessen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Periodenabschlussbeleg" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/period-closing-voucher.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Periodenabschlussbeleg" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/period-closing-voucher.png">
Dieser Beleg überträgt den Gewinn oder Verlust (über die GuV ermittelt) in die Schlußbilanz. Sie sollten ein Konto vom Typ Verbindlichkeiten, wie Gewinnrücklagen oder Überschuss, oder vom Typ Kapital als Schlußkonto auswählen.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/buying/purchase-order.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/buying/purchase-order.md
index 7c72d1e..a161d64 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/buying/purchase-order.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/buying/purchase-order.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
### Flußdiagramm der Lieferantenbestellung
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lieferantenauftrag" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/purchase-order-f.jpg">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lieferantenauftrag" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/purchase-order-f.jpg">
In ERPNext können Sie einen Lieferantenauftrag auch direkt erstellen über:
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
### Einen Lieferantenauftrag erstellen
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lieferantenauftrag" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/purchase-order.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lieferantenauftrag" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/purchase-order.png">
Einen Lieferantenauftrag einzugeben ist sehr ähnlich zu einer Lieferantenanfrage. Zusätzlich müssen Sie Folgendes eingeben:
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
### Abbildung 3: Umrechung von Einkaufsmaßeinheit in Lagermaßeinheit
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lieferantenauftrag - Maßeinheit" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/purchase-order-uom.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lieferantenauftrag - Maßeinheit" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/purchase-order-uom.png">
**Schritt 4:** Geben Sie den Umrechnungsfaktor von einer in die andere Maßeinheit an. Beispiel: 100, wenn eine Kiste 100 Stück umfasst.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/buying-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/buying-settings.md
index e6f0d97..e5ee4a4 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/buying-settings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/buying-settings.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
Hier können Sie Werte einstellen, die in den Transaktionen des Moduls Einkauf zugrunde gelegt werden.
-
+
Lassen Sie uns die verschiedenen Optionen durckgehen.
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
> Einstellungen > Einstellungen > Nummernkreis
-[Klicken Sie hier, wenn Sie mehr über Nummernkreise wissen möchten]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/naming-series.html)
+[Klicken Sie hier, wenn Sie mehr über Nummernkreise wissen möchten](/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/naming-series.html)
### 2. Standard-Lieferantentyp
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/supplier-type.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/supplier-type.md
index a379ec8..172aef7 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/supplier-type.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/supplier-type.md
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
> Einkauf > Einstellungen > Lieferantentyp > Neuer Lieferantentyp
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lieferantentyp" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/supplier-type.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lieferantentyp" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/supplier-type.png">
Sie können Ihre Lieferanten aus einem breiten Angebot verfügbarer Typen in ERPNext klassifizieren. Wählen Sie aus einem Satz vorgegebener Optionen wie Großhändler, Elekktro, Hardware, Regional, Pharma, Rohstoffe, Dienstleistungen, etc. aus.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/buying/supplier-quotation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/buying/supplier-quotation.md
index 93db6a7..30487fc 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/buying/supplier-quotation.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/buying/supplier-quotation.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
### Flußdiagramm zum Lieferantenangebot
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lieferantenangebot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/supplier-quotation-f.jpg">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lieferantenangebot" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/supplier-quotation-f.jpg">
Sie können ein Lieferantenangebot auch direkt erstellen über:
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
### Ein Lieferantenangebot erstellen
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lieferantenangebot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/supplier-quotation.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lieferantenangebot" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/supplier-quotation.png">
Wenn Sie mehrere verschiedene Lieferanten, die Ihnen den selben Artikel liefern, haben, dann senden Sie normalerweise eine Nachricht (Lieferantenanfrage) an verschiedene Lieferanten. In vielen Fällen, besonders dann, wenn Sie den Einkauf zentralisiert haben, werden Sie alle diese Angebote aufzeichnen wollen, so dass
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/buying/supplier.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/buying/supplier.md
index eadb4ce..37eb376 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/buying/supplier.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/buying/supplier.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
> Einkauf > Dokumente > Lieferant > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lieferant" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/supplier-master.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lieferant" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/supplier-master.png">
### Kontakte und Adressen
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/customer-orders-invoices-and-shipping.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/customer-orders-invoices-and-shipping.md
index c74029b..ef40f45 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/customer-orders-invoices-and-shipping.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/customer-orders-invoices-and-shipping.md
@@ -4,18 +4,18 @@
Das Webportal von ERPNext gibt Ihren Kunden einen schnellen Zugriff auf Ihre Aufträge, Rechnungen und Sendungen.
Kunden können den Status Ihrer Bestellungen, Rechnungen und des Versandes nachprüfen, indem sie sich auf der Webseite einloggen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Portal Order 1" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/portal-menu.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Portal Order 1" src="/docs/assets/img/website/portal-menu.png">
Sobald eine Bestellung aufgegeben wurde, entweder über den Einkaufswagen oder aus ERPNext heraus, kann Ihr Kunde die Bestellung ansehen und den Abrechnungs- und Versandstatus nachverfolgen. Wenn die Rechnung und die Zahlung zu einer Bestellung übertragen wurden, kann der Kunde auch hier den aktuellen Stand auf einen Blick nachvollziehen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Portal Order 1" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/website-login.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Portal Order 1" src="/docs/assets/img/website/website-login.png">
### Rechnung mit Status "gezahlt"
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Portal Order 1" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/invoice-unpaid.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Portal Order 1" src="/docs/assets/img/website/invoice-unpaid.png">
### Rechnung mit Status "abgerechnet"
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Portal Order 1" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/invoice-paid.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Portal Order 1" src="/docs/assets/img/website/invoice-paid.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/issues.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/issues.md
index 8f0c7d3..dee8eb1 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/issues.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/issues.md
@@ -5,17 +5,17 @@
### Ticketliste leeren
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Ausgabeliste" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/portal-ticket-list-empty.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Ausgabeliste" src="/docs/assets/img/website/portal-ticket-list-empty.png">
### Neuer Fall
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Neues Problem " src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/portal-new-ticket.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Neues Problem " src="/docs/assets/img/website/portal-new-ticket.png">
### Fall öffnen
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Ausgabe aufgehoben" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/portal-ticket-1.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Ausgabe aufgehoben" src="/docs/assets/img/website/portal-ticket-1.gif">
### Fall beantworten
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Frage beantworten" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/portal-ticket-reply.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Frage beantworten" src="/docs/assets/img/website/portal-ticket-reply.gif">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/portal-login.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/portal-login.md
index 455dfac..5bff275 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/portal-login.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/portal-login.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
Um sich in ein Kundenkonto einzuloggen, muss der Kunde seine Email-ID und das Passwort angeben, welche ihm von ERPNext während des Registrierungsprozesses zugesendet wurden.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Website User Signup" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/website-login.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Website User Signup" src="/docs/assets/img/website/website-login.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/sign-up.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/sign-up.md
index 0a91145..35a660d 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/sign-up.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/sign-up.md
@@ -6,11 +6,11 @@
### Schritt 1: Klicken Sie auf das Registrieren-Symbol
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Website User Signup" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/website-login.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Website User Signup" src="/docs/assets/img/website/website-login.png">
### Schritt 3: Geben Sie Ihren Kundennamen und Ihre ID ein
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Website User Signup" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/website-signup-details.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Website User Signup" src="/docs/assets/img/website/website-signup-details.png">
Wenn der Registrierungsprozess abgeschlossen ist, wird dem Kunden eine E-Mail mit dem Passwort zugeschickt.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-doctype.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-doctype.md
index 01bfaa7..315e062 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-doctype.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-doctype.md
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
4. Ist einzeln: Wenn diese Option aktiviert ist, wird dieser DocType zu einem einzeln verwendeten Formular, wie die Vertriebseinstellungen, die nicht von Benutzern reproduziert werden können.
5. Benutzerdefiniert?: Dieses Feld ist standardmäßig aktiviert, wenn ein benutzerdefinierter DocType hinzugefügt wird.
-
+
### Felder
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
5. Aktionen (Schaltflächen)
6. Anhänge oder Bilder
-
+
Wenn Sie Felder hinzufügen, müssen Sie den **Typ** angeben. Für eine Bereichs- oder Spaltentrennung ist die **Bezeichnung** optional. Der **Name** (Feldname) ist der Name der Spalte in der Datenbank.
@@ -42,19 +42,19 @@
In diesem Abschnitt können Sie Kriterien definieren nach denen Dokumente dieses DocTypes benannt werden. Es gibt viele verschiedene Kriterien nach denen ein Dokument benannt werden kann, wie z. B. dem Wert in diesem spezifischen Feld, oder die Benamungsserie, oder der Wert der vom Benutzer an der Eingabeaufforderung eingegeben wird, die angezeit wird, wenn ein Dokument abgespeichert wird. Im folgenden Beispiel benennen wir auf Grundlage des Wertes im Feld **book_name**.
-
+
### Berechtigung
In dieser Tabelle können Sie Rollen und Berechtigungs-Rollen für diese für die betreffenden DocTypes auswählen.
-
+
### DocTypes abspeichern
Wenn Sie einen DocType abspeichern, erscheint ein Popup-Fenster über welches Sie den Namen des DocTypes eingeben können.
-
+
### Der DocType im System
@@ -62,12 +62,12 @@
> Personalwesen > Dokumente > Buch
-
+
### Buchvorlage
Wenn Sie die Felder ausfüllen, schaut das ganze dann so aus.
-
+
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-field.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-field.md
index 7d0f0fa..e890f5d 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-field.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-field.md
@@ -12,11 +12,11 @@
> Einstellungen > Anpassen > Benutzerdefiniertes Feld > Neu
-Sie können ein neues benutzerdefiniertes Feld auch über das [Werkzeug zum Anpassen von Feldern]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/customize-form) einfügen.
+Sie können ein neues benutzerdefiniertes Feld auch über das [Werkzeug zum Anpassen von Feldern](/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/customize-form) einfügen.
In einem benutzerdefinierten Formular finden Sie für jedes Feld die Plus(+)-Option. Wenn Sie auf dieses Symbol klicken, wird eine neue Zeile oberhalb dieses Feldes eingefügt. Sie können die Einstellungen für Ihr Feld in der neu eingefügten leeren Zeile eingeben.
-<img alt="Formular anpassen - benutzerdefiniertes Feld" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/custom-field-2.gif">
+<img alt="Formular anpassen - benutzerdefiniertes Feld" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/custom-field-2.gif">
Im Folgenden sind die Schritte aufgeführt, wie man ein benutzerdefiniertes Feld in ein bestehendes Formular einfügt.
@@ -28,31 +28,31 @@
Wählen Sie die Transaktion oder die Vorlage, in die sie ein benutzerdefiniertes Feld einfügen wollen. Nehmen wir an, dass Sie ein benutzerdefiniertes Verknüpfungsfeld in ein Angebotsformular einfügen wollen; das Dokument soll "Angebot" heißen.
-<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/custom-field-1.gif">
+<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/custom-field-1.gif">
### Feldbezeichnung einstellen
Die Bezeichnung des benutzerdefinierten Feldes wird basierend auf seinem Namen eingestellt. Wenn Sie ein benutzerdefiniertes Feld mit einem bestimmten Namen erstellen wollen, aber mit einer sich davon unterscheidenden Bezeichnung, dann sollten Sie erst die Bezeichnung angeben, da Sie den Feldnamen noch einstellen wollen. Nach dem Speichern des benutzerdefinierten Feldes können Sie die Feldbezeichnung wieder ändern.
-<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/custom-field-2.gif">
+<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/custom-field-2.gif">
### Einstellen, nach welchem Element eingefügt werden soll ("Einfügen nach")
Diese Auswahl enthält alle bereits existierenden Felder des ausgewählten Formulars/des DocTypes. Ihr benutzerdefiniertes Feld wird nach dem Feld eingefügt, das Sie unter "Einfügen nach" auswählen.
-<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/custom-field-3.png">
+<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/custom-field-3.png">
### Feldtyp auswählen
Klicken Sie hier um weitere Informationen über Feldtypen, die Sie bei einem benutzerdefinierten Feld auswählen können, zu erhalten.
-<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/custom-field-4.png">
+<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/custom-field-4.png">
### Optionen einstellen
-Wenn Sie ein Verknüpfungsfeld erstellen,dann wird der Name des DocType, mit dem dieses Feld verknüpft werden soll, in das Feld "Optionen" eingefügt. Klicken Sie [hier]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/creating-custom-link-field) um weitere Informationen darüber zu erhalten, wie man benutzerdefinierte Verknüpfungsfelder erstellt.
+Wenn Sie ein Verknüpfungsfeld erstellen,dann wird der Name des DocType, mit dem dieses Feld verknüpft werden soll, in das Feld "Optionen" eingefügt. Klicken Sie [hier](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/creating-custom-link-field) um weitere Informationen darüber zu erhalten, wie man benutzerdefinierte Verknüpfungsfelder erstellt.
-<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/custom-field-5.png">
+<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/custom-field-5.png">
Wenn der Feldtyp als Auswahlfeld (Drop Down-Feld) angegeben ist, dann sollten alle möglichen Ergebnisse für dieses Feld im Optionen-Feld aufgelistet werden. Die möglichen Ergebnisse sollten alle in einer eigenen Zeile stehen.
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@
5. Schreibgeschützt: Wenn diese Option aktiviert ist, kann das benutzerdefinierte Feld nicht geändert werden.
6. Beim Übertragen zulassen: Wenn diese Option ausgewählt wird, ist es erlaubt den Wert des Feldes zu ändern, wenn er in einer Transaktion übertragen wird.
-<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/custom-field-6.png">
+<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/custom-field-6.png">
### Benutzerdefiniertes Feld löschen
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-script-fetch-values-from-master.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-script-fetch-values-from-master.md
index c4e41ec..347a8a8 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-script-fetch-values-from-master.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-script-fetch-values-from-master.md
@@ -15,6 +15,6 @@
* * *
-Sehen Sie hierzu auch: [Wie man ein benutzerdefiniertes Skript erstellt]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/).
+Sehen Sie hierzu auch: [Wie man ein benutzerdefiniertes Skript erstellt](/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/).
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.md
index 8e2e842..7c62ae5 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.md
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
> Einstellungen > Anpassen > Benutzerdefiniertes Skript
-<img alt="Custom Script" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/custom-script-1.png">
+<img alt="Custom Script" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/custom-script-1.png">
### Themen
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/customize-form.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/customize-form.md
index dbb9bc5..4060f43 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/customize-form.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/customize-form.md
@@ -13,13 +13,13 @@
Der Systemmanager findet die Option "Benutzerdefiniertes Formular" auch in der Liste Kundenauftrag (bzw. jedes andere Formular für diesen Sachverhalt).
-
+
### Schritt 2: Wählen Sie den DocType/das Dokument
Wählen Sie jetzt den DocType/das Dokument aus, welcher/s das anzupassende Feld enthält.
-
+
### Schritt 3: Bearbeiten Sie die Eigenschaften
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
Wenn Sie auf die Zeile "Projektname" klicken, werden Felder mit verschiedenen Eigenschaften für dieses Feld angezeigt. Um die Eigenschaft "Ist zwingend erforderlich" für ein Feld anzupassen gibt es ein Feld "Zwingend erfoderlich". Wenn Sie dieses Feld markieren, wird das Feld "Projektname" im Angebotsformular als zwingend erforderlich eingestellt.
-
+
Genauso können Sie folgende Eigenschaften eines Feldes anpassen.
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
### Schritt 4: Aktualisieren
-
+
Bevor Sie das Formular "Kundenauftrag" testen, sollten Sie den Cache leeren und den Inhalt des Browserfensters aktualiseren, um die Änderungen wirksam werden zu lassen.
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Feldtyp</td>
- <td>Klicken Sie <a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types">hier</a> um mehr über Feldtypen zu erfahren.</td>
+ <td>Klicken Sie <a href="/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types">hier</a> um mehr über Feldtypen zu erfahren.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Optionen</td>
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/document-title.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/document-title.md
index 3b13208..5e5766b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/document-title.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/document-title.md
@@ -24,14 +24,14 @@
> {customer_name} for {project}
<img class="screenshot" alt = "Bezeichnung anpassen"
- src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/customize-title.gif">
+ src="/docs/assets/img/customize/customize-title.gif">
### Fest eingestellte und bearbeitbare Bezeichnungen
Wenn Ihre Bezeichnung als Standard-Bezeichnung generiert wurde, kann sie vom Benutzer durch klicken auf den Kopf des Dokuments bearbeitet werden.
<img class="screenshot" alt = "Bearbeitbare Bezeichnung"
- src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/editable-title.gif">
+ src="/docs/assets/img/customize/editable-title.gif">
Wenn Sie eine fest eingestellte Bezeichnung haben wollen, können Sie dies als Regel unter **Optionen** einstellen. Auf diese Weise wird die Bezeichnung jedesmal automatisch aktualisiert, wenn das Dokument aktualisiert wird.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.md
index 831540b..3e3ebe0 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
> Einstellungen > Werkzeuge > Funktionen verbergen/einblenden
-
+
Aktivieren/Deaktivieren Sie die Funktionen, die Sie verwenden möchten bzw. nicht verwenden wollen und laden Sie Ihre Seite neu, damit die Änderungen übernommen werden.
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@
> Einstellungen > Werkzeuge > Moduleinstellungen
-
+
> Anmerkung: Module werden automatisch für Benutzer verborgen, die keine Berechtigungen für Dokumente dieses Moduls haben. Beispiel: Wenn ein Benutzer keine Berechtigungen für Lieferantenauftrag, Materialanfrage und Lieferant hat, dann wird das Modul "Einkauf" automatisch verborgen.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/print-format.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/print-format.md
index 9448201..47d9b19 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/print-format.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/print-format.md
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
> Einstellungen > Druck > Druckformate
-
+
Wählen Sie den Typ des Druckformats, welches Sie bearbeiten wollen, und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Kopieren" in der rechten Spalte. Es öffnet sich ein neues Druckformat mit der Einstellung NEIN für "für "Ist Standard" und Sie kännen das Druckformat bearbeiten.
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
> Einstellungen > Druck und Branding > Druckeinstellungen
-
+
### Beispiel
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/appraisal.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/appraisal.md
index ccec5b2..34a9217 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/appraisal.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/appraisal.md
@@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
#### Schritt 1: Wählen Sie eine Bewertungsvorlage aus
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Beurteilung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/appraisal.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Beurteilung" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/appraisal.png">
Wenn Sie eine Vorlage ausgewählt haben, erscheint der restliche Teil des Formulars.
#### Schritt 2: Geben Sie die Daten des Mitarbeiters ein
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Beurteilung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/appraisal-employee.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Beurteilung" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/appraisal-employee.png">
Wenn die Bewertungsvorlage fertig ist, können Sie für jeden Zeitraum Bewertungen aufzeichnen, über die Sie die Leistung nachverfolgen können. Sie können für jeden Paramter bis zu 5 Punkte vergeben und das System berechnet die Gesamtbeurteilung des Mitarbeiters.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/attendance.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/attendance.md
index 9dd45ab..9ec5f95 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/attendance.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/attendance.md
@@ -5,10 +5,10 @@
> Personalwesen > Dokumente > Anwesenheit > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Anwesenheit" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/attendence.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Anwesenheit" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/attendence.png">
Sie können einen monatlichen Report über Ihre Anwesenheiten erhalten, indem Sie zum "Monatlichen Anwesenheitsbericht" gehen.
-Sie können auch ganz einfach Anwesenheiten über das [Werkzeug zum Hochladen von Anwesenheiten]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.html) hochladen.
+Sie können auch ganz einfach Anwesenheiten über das [Werkzeug zum Hochladen von Anwesenheiten](/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.html) hochladen.
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/employee.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/employee.md
index 7d39f6a..e599569 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/employee.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/employee.md
@@ -7,6 +7,6 @@
> Personalwesen > Dokumente > Mitarbeiter > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Mitarbeiter" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/employee.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Mitarbeiter" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/employee.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/expense-claim.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/expense-claim.md
index 3fda049..12e69bf 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/expense-claim.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/expense-claim.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
> Personalwesen > Dokumente > Aufwandsabrechnung > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufwandsabrechnung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/expense_claim.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufwandsabrechnung" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/expense_claim.png">
Geben Sie die Mitarbeiter-ID, das Datum und die Auflistung der Ausgaben, die Sie zurückerstattet haben möchten, ein und "übertragen" Sie den Datensatz.
@@ -27,6 +27,6 @@
* Um eine Aufwandsabrechnung mit einer Aufgabe oder einem Projekt zu verknüpfen, geben Sie die Aufgabe oder das Projekt an, während Sie eine Aufwandsabrechnung erstellen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufwandsabrechnung - Verknüpfung zum Projekt" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_expense_claim_link.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufwandsabrechnung - Verknüpfung zum Projekt" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_expense_claim_link.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md
index bf0e195..8cef87d 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md
@@ -5,30 +5,30 @@
Der Bericht zur Mitarbeiter-Urlaubsauswertung zeigt Mitarbeiter und deren Urlaubsverteilung nach den unterschiedlichen Urlaubstypen an. Der Bericht richtet sich nach der Anzahl des genehmigten Urlaubs.
-<img alt="Mitarbeier-Urlaubskonto" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/employee-leave-balance-report.png">
+<img alt="Mitarbeier-Urlaubskonto" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/employee-leave-balance-report.png">
### Mitarbeiter-Geburtstag
Dieser Bericht zeigt die Geburtstage der Mitarbeiter an.
-<img alt="Mitarbeiter-Geburtstag" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/employee-birthday-report.png">
+<img alt="Mitarbeiter-Geburtstag" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/employee-birthday-report.png">
### Mitarbeiterinformationen
Dieser Bericht wichtige Informationen über Mitarbeiter in den Mitarbeiterdatensätzen.
-<img alt="Mitarbeiterinformation" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/employee-information-report.png">
+<img alt="Mitarbeiterinformation" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/employee-information-report.png">
### Übersicht monatliche Gehälter
Dieser Bericht zeigt die Nettozahlungen der Mitarbeiter und deren einzelne Bestandteile im Überblick.
-<img alt="Übersicht monatliche Gehälter" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/monthly-salary-register-report.png">
+<img alt="Übersicht monatliche Gehälter" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/monthly-salary-register-report.png">
### Monatliche Anwesenheitsliste
Dieser Bericht zeit die monatlichen Anwesenheiten ausgewählter Mitarbeiter im Überblick.
-<img alt="Monatliche Anwesenheitsliste" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/monthly-attendance-sheet-report.png">
+<img alt="Monatliche Anwesenheitsliste" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/monthly-attendance-sheet-report.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/job-applicant.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/job-applicant.md
index 51b0359..62de801 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/job-applicant.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/job-applicant.md
@@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
# Bewerber
<span class="text-muted contributed-by">Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH</span>
-Sie können eine Liste von Bewerbern auf [offene Stellen]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/human-resources/job-opening.html) verwalten.
+Sie können eine Liste von Bewerbern auf [offene Stellen](/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/job-opening.html) verwalten.
Um einen neuen Bewerber anzulegen, gehen Sie zu:
> Personalwesen > Dokumente > Bewerber > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Bewerber" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/job-applicant.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Bewerber" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/job-applicant.png">
### Verknüpfung mit einem E-Mail-Konto
@@ -20,6 +20,6 @@
* Geben Sie die E-Mail-ID und das Passwort ein und aktivieren Sie "Eingehend aktivieren".
* Unter "Anhängen an" geben Sie "Bewerber" an.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="E-Mail-Konto" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/email-account.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="E-Mail-Konto" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/email-account.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/job-opening.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/job-opening.md
index b14516e..0231df6 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/job-opening.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/job-opening.md
@@ -7,6 +7,6 @@
> Personalwesen > Dokumente > Offene Stellen > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Offene Stellen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/job-opening.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Offene Stellen" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/job-opening.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/leave-application.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/leave-application.md
index fc16d83..faf5b6e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/leave-application.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/leave-application.md
@@ -5,17 +5,17 @@
> Personalwesen > Dokumente > Urlaubsantrag > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Urlaubsantrag" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/leave-application.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Urlaubsantrag" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/leave-application.png">
### Urlaubsbewilliger einstellen
* Ein Urlaubsgenehmiger ist ein Benutzer der Urlaubsanträge eines Mitarbeiters bewilligen kann.
* Sie müssen eine Liste von Urlaubsbewilligern für einen Mitarbeiter in den Mitarbeiterstammdaten angeben.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Urlaubsgenehmiger" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/employee-leave-approver.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Urlaubsgenehmiger" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/employee-leave-approver.png">
-> Tipp: Wenn Sie möchten, dass alle Benutzer ihre Urlaubsanträge selbst erstellen, können Sie in den Einstellungen zur Urlaubsgenehmigung Ihre Mitarbeiter-IDs als so einstellen, dass sie für die Regel zutreffend sind. Für weiterführende Informationen kesen Sie hierzu die Diskussion zum Thema [Einstellungen zu Genehmigungen]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.html).
+> Tipp: Wenn Sie möchten, dass alle Benutzer ihre Urlaubsanträge selbst erstellen, können Sie in den Einstellungen zur Urlaubsgenehmigung Ihre Mitarbeiter-IDs als so einstellen, dass sie für die Regel zutreffend sind. Für weiterführende Informationen kesen Sie hierzu die Diskussion zum Thema [Einstellungen zu Genehmigungen](/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.html).
-Um einem Mitarbeiter Urlaub zuzuteilen, kreuzen Sie [Urlaubszuteilung]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-allocation.html) an.
+Um einem Mitarbeiter Urlaub zuzuteilen, kreuzen Sie [Urlaubszuteilung](/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-allocation.html) an.
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/offer-letter.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/offer-letter.md
index 5566071..e545774 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/offer-letter.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/offer-letter.md
@@ -7,12 +7,12 @@
> Personalwesen > Dokumente > Angebotsschreiben > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Angebotsschreiben" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/offer-letter.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Angebotsschreiben" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/offer-letter.png">
-> Anmerkung: Angebotsschreiben kann nur zu einem [Bewerber]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/human-resources/job-applicant.html) erstellt werden.
+> Anmerkung: Angebotsschreiben kann nur zu einem [Bewerber](/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/job-applicant.html) erstellt werden.
Es gibt ein vordefiniertes Druckformat zum Angebotsschreiben.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Angebotsschreiben" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/offer-letter-print.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Angebotsschreiben" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/offer-letter-print.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.md
index a8eb33a..f47dda2 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.md
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
#### Abbildung 1: Gehaltsstruktur
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Gehaltsstruktur" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/salary-structure.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Gehaltsstruktur" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/salary-structure.png">
### In der Gehaltsstruktur
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@
#### Abbildung 2: Gehaltsabrechnung
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lohnzettel" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/salary-slip.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lohnzettel" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/salary-slip.png">
Sie können auch Gehaltsabrechnungen für mehrere verschiedene Mitarbeiter über "Gehaltsabrechnung bearbeiten" anlegen.
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@
#### Abbildung 3: Gehaltsabrechnung durchführen
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Gehaltsabrechnung durchführen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/process-payroll.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Gehaltsabrechnung durchführen" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/process-payroll.png">
Beim Bearbeiten einer Gehaltsabrechnung
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/branch.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/branch.md
index f6913a7..1328d73 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/branch.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/branch.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
Filialen Ihres Unternehmens
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Filiale" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/branch.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Filiale" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/branch.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/deduction-type.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/deduction-type.md
index ddd3e9d..e50b51f 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/deduction-type.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/deduction-type.md
@@ -7,6 +7,6 @@
> Personalwesen > Einstellungen > Abzugsart > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Abzugsart" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/deduction-type.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Abzugsart" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/deduction-type.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/department.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/department.md
index c54928b..532174f 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/department.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/department.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
Abteilungen Ihres Unternehmens
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Abteilung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/department.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Abteilung" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/department.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/designation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/designation.md
index dee6658..0d01588 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/designation.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/designation.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
Stellenbezeichnungen in Ihrem Unternehmen
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Stellenbezeichnung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/designation.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Stellenbezeichnung" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/designation.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/earning-type.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/earning-type.md
index d79e6bb..51eb375 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/earning-type.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/earning-type.md
@@ -7,6 +7,6 @@
> Personalwesen > Einstellungen > Einkommensart > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Einkommensart" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/earning-type.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Einkommensart" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/earning-type.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md
index 9c334cf..c9d6ce2 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
Verschiedene Beschäftigungsverträge, die Sie mit Ihren Mitarbeitern abgeschlossen haben.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Art der Beschäftigung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/employment-type.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Art der Beschäftigung" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/employment-type.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/holyday-list.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/holyday-list.md
index cec5110..161a867 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/holyday-list.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/holyday-list.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
Sie können Urlaub für ein bestimmtes Jahr über die Urlaubsübersicht planen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Urlaubsübersicht" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/holiday-list.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Urlaubsübersicht" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/holiday-list.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md
index c454598..8e2e5e2 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
Globale Einstellungen zu Dokumenten des Personalwesens
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Einstellungen zum Personalwesen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/hr-settings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Einstellungen zum Personalwesen" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/hr-settings.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-allocation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-allocation.md
index 2e80ddf..d49121b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-allocation.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-allocation.md
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
Hilft Ihnen Urlaub bestimmten Mitarbeitern zuzuteilen
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Urlaubszuordnung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/leave-allocation.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Urlaubszuordnung" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/leave-allocation.png">
-Um mehreren verschhiedenen Mitarbeitern Urlaub zuzuteilen, nutzen Sie das [Urlaubszuordnungs-Werkzeug]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/leave-allocation-tool.html).
+Um mehreren verschhiedenen Mitarbeitern Urlaub zuzuteilen, nutzen Sie das [Urlaubszuordnungs-Werkzeug](/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/leave-allocation-tool.html).
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-type.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-type.md
index ece1c58..97b5af8 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-type.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-type.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
Geben Sie den Urlaubstyp an, der Mitarbeitern zugeordnet werden kann.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Urlaubstyp" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/leave-type.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Urlaubstyp" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/leave-type.png">
* "Maximale zulässige Urlaubstage" gibt die Maximalanzahl von Tagen dieses Urlaubstyps an, die zusammen genommen werden können.
* "Ist unbezahlter Urlaub" gibt an, dass es sich um unbezahlten Urlaub handelt.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/leave-allocation-tool.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/leave-allocation-tool.md
index de109f4..a4a7862 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/leave-allocation-tool.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/leave-allocation-tool.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
Das Urlaubszuordnungs-Werkzeug hilft Ihnen dabei eine bestimmte Menge an Urlaub einem Mitarbeiter zuzuteilen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Urlaubsantrag" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/leave-application.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Urlaubsantrag" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/leave-application.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.md
index 3f94e83..ba351b5 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.md
@@ -7,6 +7,6 @@
> Personalwesen > Werkzeuge > Anwesenheit hochladen
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Anwesenheit hochladen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/attendence-upload.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Anwesenheit hochladen" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/attendence-upload.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/key-workflows.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/key-workflows.md
index ac5392c..1840479 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/key-workflows.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/key-workflows.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
Dieses Diagramm stellt dar, wie ERPNext die Informationen und Vorgänge in Ihrem Unternehmen über Schlüsselfunktionen nachverfolgt. Dieses Diagramm gibt nicht alle Funktionalitäten von ERPNext wieder.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Hohe Auflösung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/overview.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Hohe Auflösung" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/overview.png">
_Anmerkung: Nicht alle Schritte sind zwingend erforderlich. ERPNext erlaubt es Ihnen nach eigenem Gutdünken Schritte auszulassen, wenn Sie den Prozess vereinfachen wollen._
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/the-champion.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/the-champion.md
index 912c252..b04de65 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/the-champion.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/the-champion.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
# Der Champion
<span class="text-muted contributed-by">Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH</span>
-<img alt="Champion" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/implementation-image.png">
+<img alt="Champion" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/implementation-image.png">
Wir haben uns in den letzten Jahren dutzende von ERP-Umsetzungen angesehen, und wir haben erkannt, dass eine erfolgreiche Umsetzung viel mit schwer greifbaren Dingen und persönlichen Einstellungen zu tun hat.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md
index 55501e6..52ab420 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md
@@ -7,11 +7,11 @@
>Fertigung > Dokumente > Stückliste > Neue Stückliste
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Task" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/bom.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Task" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/bom.png">
Um Arbeitsgänge hinzuzufügen, wählen Sie "Mit Arbeitsgängen". Die Übersicht der Arbeitsgänge erscheint.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Task" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/bom-operations.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Task" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/bom-operations.png">
* Wählen Sie den Artikel für den Sie eine Stückliste erstellen wollen.
* Fügen Sie die Arbeitsgänge, die Sie durchlaufen müssen, um diesen Artikel zu fertigen, in der Tabelle der Arbeitsgänge hinzu. Für jeden Arbeitsgang werden Sie nach einem Arbeitsplatz gefragt. Wenn nötig, müssen Sie neue Arbeitsplätze anlegen.
@@ -23,16 +23,16 @@
* Der Bereich Kostenkalkulation der Stückliste gibt einen ungefähren Wert der Produktionskosten eines Artikels wieder
* Fügen Sie die Liste der Artikel, die Sie für jeden Arbeitsgang benötigen, mit der entsprechenden Menge hinzu. Bei dem Artikel kann es sich um einen Zukaufartikel oder um eine Unterfertigung mit eigener Stückliste handeln. Wenn der Artikel in der Zeile ein gefertigter Artikel ist und mehrere verschiedene Stücklisten hat, wählen Sie die passende Stückliste aus. Sie können auch festlegen, ob ein Teil des Artikels zu Ausschuss wird.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kostenkalkulation" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/bom-costing.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kostenkalkulation" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/bom-costing.png">
* Diese Kosten können über die Schaltfläche "Kosten aktualisieren" aktualisiert werden.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kosten aktualisieren" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/bom-update-cost.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kosten aktualisieren" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/bom-update-cost.png">
### Benötigtes Material (aufgelöst)
Diese Tabelle listet alles Material auf, welches benötigt wird um den Artikel zu fertigen. Sie zieht weiterhin Unterbaugruppen mit Menge an.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufgelöste Ansicht" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/bom-exploded.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufgelöste Ansicht" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/bom-exploded.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/operation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/operation.md
index 07ca860..cc16375 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/operation.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/operation.md
@@ -9,6 +9,6 @@
> Fertigung > Dokumente > Arbeitsgang > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Arbeitsgang" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/operation.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Arbeitsgang" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/operation.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/production-order.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/production-order.md
index e6ddd7b..d93391a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/production-order.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/production-order.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
> Fertigung > Dokumente > Fertigungsauftrag > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Fertigungsauftrag" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/production-order.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Fertigungsauftrag" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/production-order.png">
### Einen Fertigungsauftrag erstellen
@@ -23,11 +23,11 @@
* Als Voreinstellung zieht das System Arbeitsplätze und die Dauer von Arbeitsgängen aus der gewählten Stückliste.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Fertigungsauftrag - Arbeitsgänge" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-operations.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Fertigungsauftrag - Arbeitsgänge" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-operations.png">
* Wenn Sie den Arbeitsplatz für einen bestimmten Arbeitsgang im Fertigungsauftrag neu zuordnen möchten, können Sie das tun, bevor Sie den Fertigungsauftrag übertragen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Fertigungsauftrag - Arbeitsgänge neu zuordnen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-reassigning-operations.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Fertigungsauftrag - Arbeitsgänge neu zuordnen" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-reassigning-operations.png">
* Wählen Sie den betreffenden Arbeitsgang aus und ändern Sie seinen Arbeitsplatz.
* Sie können auch die Dauer des Arbeitsgangs ändern.
@@ -42,28 +42,28 @@
* Das erstellt eine Lagerbuchung mit allen Artikeln, die benötigt werden, um diesen Fertigungsauftrag abzuschliessen. Die Artikel werden an das Fertigungslager übertragen (dieser Prozess fügt basierend auf Ihren Einstellungen Unterbaugruppen mit Stückliste als EINEN Artikel hinzu oder löst die Unterpunkte auf).
* Klicken Sie auf "Material der Fertigung übergeben".
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Materialübertrag" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-material-transfer.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Materialübertrag" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-material-transfer.png">
* Geben Sie die Menge des Materials an, das übertragen werden soll.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Materialübertrag - Menge" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-material-transfer-qty.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Materialübertrag - Menge" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-material-transfer-qty.png">
* Übertragen Sie die Lagerbuchung.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuchung zum Kundenauftrag" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-SE-for-material-transfer.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuchung zum Kundenauftrag" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-SE-for-material-transfer.png">
* Das an die Fertigung übertragene Material wird basierend auf der Lagerbuchung im Fertigungsauftrag aktualisiert.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuchung zum Fertigungsauftrag" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-material-transfer-updated.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuchung zum Fertigungsauftrag" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-material-transfer-updated.png">
### Zeitprotokoll erstellen
-* Der Fortschritt des Fertigungsauftrages kann über ein [Zeitprotokoll]<img class="screenshot" alt="Make TL against PO" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-operations-make-tl.png"> mitprotokolliert werden.
+* Der Fortschritt des Fertigungsauftrages kann über ein [Zeitprotokoll]<img class="screenshot" alt="Make TL against PO" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-operations-make-tl.png"> mitprotokolliert werden.
* Zeitprotokolle werden zu den Arbeitsgängen des Fertigungsauftrages erstellt.
* Vorlagen für Zeitprotokolle werden für die eingeplanten Arbeitsgänge zum Zeitpunkt des Übertragens des Fertigungsauftrages erstellt.
* Um weitere Zeitprotokolle zu einem Arbeitsgang zu erstellen, wählen Sie "Zeitprotokoll erstellen" im betreffenden Arbeitsgang aus.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Zeitprotokoll zum Fertigungsauftrag erstellen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-operations-make-tl.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Zeitprotokoll zum Fertigungsauftrag erstellen" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-operations-make-tl.png">
### Fertige Erzeugnisse aktualisieren
@@ -71,11 +71,11 @@
* Das erstellt eine Lagerbuchung, welche alle Unterartikel vom Fertigungslager abzieht und dem Lager "Fertige Erzeugnisse" gutschreibt.
* Klicken Sie auf "Fertige Erzeugnisse aktualisieren".
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Fertigerzeugnisse aktualiseren" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-FG-update.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Fertigerzeugnisse aktualiseren" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-FG-update.png">
* Geben Sie die Menge des übertragenen Materials an.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Menge der Fertigerzeugnisse aktualisieren" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-FG-update-qty.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Menge der Fertigerzeugnisse aktualisieren" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-FG-update-qty.png">
>Tipp: Sie können einen Fertigungsauftrag auch teilweise fertig stellen, indem Sie über eine Lagerbuchung das Lager Fertige Erzeugnisse aktualisieren.
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@
4. Fertigerzeugnisse aktualisieren: Dieser Schritt erstellt eine Lagerbuchung, welche alle Unterartikel vom Fertigungslager abzieht und dem Lager Fertige Erzeugnisse hinzufügt.
5. Um die zum Fertigungsauftrag erstellten Zeitprotokolle anzusehen, klicken Sie auf "Zeitprotokolle anzeigen".
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Fertigungsauftrag anhalten" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-stop.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Fertigungsauftrag anhalten" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-stop.png">
* Sie können auch einen angehaltenen Fertigungsauftrag wieder weiter laufen lassen.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md
index 8f77716..fdf60b6 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
> Fertigung > Einstellungen > Fertigungseinstellungen
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Fertigungseinstellungen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/manufacturing-settings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Fertigungseinstellungen" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/manufacturing-settings.png">
Überstunden zulassen: Hier können Sie angeben, ob an Arbeitsplätzen Überstunden erlaubt sind (wichtig zur Planung von Arbeitsgängen außerhalb der Betriebsstunden).
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/subcontracting.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/subcontracting.md
index 2796610..3c0e36f 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/subcontracting.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/subcontracting.md
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
2. Erstellen Sie ein Lager für den Lieferanten, damit Sie die übergebenen Artikel nachverfolgen können (möglicherweise geben Sie ja Artikel im Wert einer Monatslieferung außer Haus).
3. Stellen Sie für den bearbeiteten Artikel und der Artikelvorlage den Punkt "Ist Fremdvergabe" auf JA ein.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Fremdvergabe" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/subcontract.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Fremdvergabe" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/subcontract.png">
**Schritt 1:** Erstellen Sie für den bearbeiteten Artikel eine Stückliste, die den unbearbeiteten Artikel als Unterartikel enthält. Beispiel: Wenn Sie einen Stift herstellen, wird der bearbeitete Stift mit der Stückliste benannt, wbei der Tintentank, der Knopf und andere Artikel, die in die Fertigung eingehen als Unterartikel verwaltet werden.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/bom-replace-tool.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/bom-replace-tool.md
index 922c32a..dbe772b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/bom-replace-tool.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/bom-replace-tool.md
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@
Um die Stückliste, bei der die Zentraleinheit als Rohmaterial enthalten ist, in der Stückliste des fertigen Produktes zu aktualisieren, können Sie das Stücklisten-Austauschwerkzeug verwenden.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Stücklistenaustauschwerkzeug" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/bom-replace-tool.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Stücklistenaustauschwerkzeug" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/bom-replace-tool.png">
In diesem Werkzeug wählen Sie die aktuelle und die neue Stückliste aus. Wenn Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Austauschen" klicken, wird in der Stückliste des fertigen Produktes (Computer) die aktuelle Stückliste der Zentraleinheit durch die neue Stückliste ersetzt.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/production-planning-tool.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/production-planning-tool.md
index 63e51f8..b7ef2d0 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/production-planning-tool.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/production-planning-tool.md
@@ -12,30 +12,30 @@
> Fertigung > Werkzeuge > Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/ppt.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/ppt.png">
### Schritt 1: Auswahl und Kundenauftrag
* Wählen Sie einen Kundenauftrag für die Materialanforderung über die Filterfunktion (Zeit, Artikel und Kunde) aus.
* Klicken Sie auf "Kundenaufträge aufrufen" um eine Übersicht zu erhalten.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/ppt-get-sales-orders.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/ppt-get-sales-orders.png">
### Schritt 2: Artikel aus Kundenaufträgen abrufen
Sie können Artikel hinzufügen, entfernen oder die Menge dieser Artikel verändern.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/ppt-get-item.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/ppt-get-item.png">
### Schritt 3: Fertigungsaufträge erstellen
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/ppt-create-production-order.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/ppt-create-production-order.png">
### Schritt 4: Materialanfragen erstellen
Erstellen Sie für Artikel mit prognostiziertem Engpass Materialanfragen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/ppt-create-material-request.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/ppt-create-material-request.png">
Das Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung wird auf zwei Ebenend verwendet:
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/workstation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/workstation.md
index 2405382..6584ebc 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/workstation.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/workstation.md
@@ -9,10 +9,10 @@
> Fertigung > Dokumente > Arbeitsplatz > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Arbeitsplatz" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/workstation.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Arbeitsplatz" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/workstation.png">
Geben Sie unter "Arbeitszeit" die Betriebszeiten des Arbeitsplatzes an. Sie können die Betriebszeiten auch mit Hilfe von Schichten angeben. Wenn Sie einen Fertigungauftrag einplanen, prüft das System die Verfügbarkeit des Arbeitsplatzes basierend auf den angegebenen Betrieszeiten.
-> Anmerkung: Sie können Überstunden für einen Arbeitsplatz über die [Fertigungseinstellungen]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.html) aktivieren.
+> Anmerkung: Sie können Überstunden für einen Arbeitsplatz über die [Fertigungseinstellungen](/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.html) aktivieren.
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/activity-cost.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/activity-cost.md
index 705846b..25e6452 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/activity-cost.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/activity-cost.md
@@ -3,4 +3,4 @@
Die Aktivitätskosten erfassen den Stundensatz und die Kosten eines Mitarbeiters zu einer Aktivitätsart. Dieser Betrag wird beim Erstellen von Zeitprotokollen vom System angezogen. Er wird für die Aufwandsabrechnung des Projektes verwendet.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Aktivitätskosten" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/activity_cost.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Aktivitätskosten" src="/docs/assets/img/project/activity_cost.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/activity-type.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/activity-type.md
index ff61a76..1e8c534 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/activity-type.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/activity-type.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
Unter dem Punkt "Aktivitätsart" wird eine Liste verschiedener Typen von Aktivitäten erstellt zu denen Zeitprotokolle erstellt werden können.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Aktivitätsart" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/activity_type.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Aktivitätsart" src="/docs/assets/img/project/activity_type.png">
Standardmäßig sind die folgenden Aktivitätsarten angelegt:
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/project.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/project.md
index 518443b..e9ce1b8 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/project.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/project.md
@@ -3,75 +3,75 @@
Das Projektmanagement in ERPNext ist aufgabengesteuert. Sie können ein Projekt erstellen und ihm mehrere unterschiedliche Aufgaben zuweisen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project.png">
### Aufgaben verwalten
Ein Projekt kann in mehrere verschiedene Aufgaben aufgeteilt werden.
-Eine Aufgabe kann über das Projektdokument selbst erstellt werden oder über die Schaltfläche [Aufgabe]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/projects/tasks.html).
+Eine Aufgabe kann über das Projektdokument selbst erstellt werden oder über die Schaltfläche [Aufgabe](/docs/user/manual/de/projects/tasks.html).
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_task.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_task.png">
* Um eine Aufgabe, die zu einem Projekt erstellt wurde, anzusehen, klicken Sie auf "Aufgabe",
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Aufgabe ansehen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_view_task.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Aufgabe ansehen" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_view_task.png">
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - List der Aufgaben" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_task_list.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - List der Aufgaben" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_task_list.png">
* Sie können Aufgaben auch über das Projektdokument selbst ansehen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Aufgabenmatrix" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_task_grid.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Aufgabenmatrix" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_task_grid.png">
### Zeitmanagement
-ERPNext verwendet [Zeitprotokolle]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/projects/time-log.html) um den Fortschritt eines Projektes nachzuverfolgen. Sie können Zeitprotokolle zu jeder Aufgabe erstellen. Das aktuelle Start- und Enddatum wird dann zusammen mit der Kostenberechnung basierend auf dem Zeitprotokoll aktualisiert.
+ERPNext verwendet [Zeitprotokolle](/docs/user/manual/de/projects/time-log.html) um den Fortschritt eines Projektes nachzuverfolgen. Sie können Zeitprotokolle zu jeder Aufgabe erstellen. Das aktuelle Start- und Enddatum wird dann zusammen mit der Kostenberechnung basierend auf dem Zeitprotokoll aktualisiert.
* Um ein Zeitprotokoll zu einem Projekt anzusehen, klicken Sie auf "Zeitprotokolle"
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Zeitprotokoll ansehen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_view_time_log.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Zeitprotokoll ansehen" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_view_time_log.png">
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Übersicht der Zeitprotokolle" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_time_log_list.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Übersicht der Zeitprotokolle" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_time_log_list.png">
* Sie können ein Zeitprotokoll auch direkt erstellen und mit dem Projekt verknüpfen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Zeitprotokoll verknüpfen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_time_log_link.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Zeitprotokoll verknüpfen" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_time_log_link.png">
### Aufwände verwalten
-Sie können [Aufwandsabrechnungen]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/human-resources/expense-claim.html) mit Projektaufgaben verbuchen. Das System aktualisiert die Gesamtsumme der Aufwände im Abschnitt Kostenabrechnung.
+Sie können [Aufwandsabrechnungen](/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/expense-claim.html) mit Projektaufgaben verbuchen. Das System aktualisiert die Gesamtsumme der Aufwände im Abschnitt Kostenabrechnung.
* Um die Aufwandsabrechnungen zu einem Projekt anzusehen, klicken Sie auf "Aufwandsabrechnung".
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Aufwandsabrechnung ansehen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_view_expense_claim.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Aufwandsabrechnung ansehen" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_view_expense_claim.png">
* Sie könne Aufwandsabrechnungen auch direkt erstellen und mit einem Projekt verknüpfen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Aufwandsabrechnung verknüpfen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_expense_claim_link.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Aufwandsabrechnung verknüpfen" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_expense_claim_link.png">
* Der Gesamtbetrag der mit einem Projekt verbuchten Aufwandsabrechnungen wird unter "Gesammtsumme der Aufwandsabrechnungen" im Abschnitt "Kostenabrechnung" angezeigt.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Gesamtsumme Aufwandsabrechnung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_total_expense_claim.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Gesamtsumme Aufwandsabrechnung" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_total_expense_claim.png">
### Kostenstelle
-Sie können zu einem Projekt eine [Kostenstelle]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/cost-center.html) erstellen oder Sie können eine existierende Kostenstelle verwenden um alle Aufwände die zu einem Projekt entstehen mitzuverfolgen.
+Sie können zu einem Projekt eine [Kostenstelle](/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/cost-center.html) erstellen oder Sie können eine existierende Kostenstelle verwenden um alle Aufwände die zu einem Projekt entstehen mitzuverfolgen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Kostenstelle" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_cost_center.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Kostenstelle" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_cost_center.png">
### Projektkostenabrechnung
Der Abschnitt Projektkostenabrechnung hilft Ihnen dabei, die Zeit und die AUfwände die in einem Projekt anfallen, nachzuverfolgen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Kostenabrechnung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_costing.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Kostenabrechnung" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_costing.png">
* Der Abschnitt Kostenabrechnung wird basierend auf den Zeitprotokollen aktualisiert.
* Die Bruttospanne ist die Differenz zwischen dem Betrag der gesamten Kosten und dem Gesamtbetrag der Rechnung.
### Abrechnung
-Sie können einen [Kundenauftrag]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/selling/sales-order.html) zu einem Projekt erstellen bzw. ihn mit dem Projekt verknüpfen. Wenn er einmal verlinkt ist, können Sie das Vertriebsmodul dazu nutzen, dass Projekt mit Ihrem Kunden abzurechnen.
+Sie können einen [Kundenauftrag](/docs/user/manual/de/selling/sales-order.html) zu einem Projekt erstellen bzw. ihn mit dem Projekt verknüpfen. Wenn er einmal verlinkt ist, können Sie das Vertriebsmodul dazu nutzen, dass Projekt mit Ihrem Kunden abzurechnen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Kundenauftrag" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_sales_order.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Kundenauftrag" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_sales_order.png">
### Gantt-Diagramm
@@ -79,8 +79,8 @@
* Um ein Gantt-Diagramm zu einem Projekt anzusehen, gehen Sie zu diesem Projekt und klicken Sie auf "Gantt-Diagramm".
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Gantt-Diagramm ansehen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_view_gantt_chart.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Gantt-Diagramm ansehen" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_view_gantt_chart.png">
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Gantt-Diagramm" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_gantt_chart.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Projekt - Gantt-Diagramm" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_gantt_chart.png">
[next]
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/tasks.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/tasks.md
index 163fb68..75fd594 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/tasks.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/tasks.md
@@ -3,13 +3,13 @@
Ein Projekt wird in Aufgaben unterteilt. In ERPNext können Sie auch Abhängigkeiten zwischen Aufgaben erstellen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufgabe" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/task.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufgabe" src="/docs/assets/img/project/task.png">
### Status der Aufgabe
Ein Aufgabe kann folgende Stati haben: "Offen", "In Arbeit", "Wartet auf Überprüfung", "Geschlossen" und "Abgebrochen".
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufgabe - Status" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/task_status.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufgabe - Status" src="/docs/assets/img/project/task_status.png">
* Standardmäßig sollte jede neu erstellte Aufgabe den Status "Offen" haben.
* Wenn ein Zeitprotokoll für eine Aufgabe erstellt wird, sollte ihr Status "In Arbeit" sein.
@@ -18,40 +18,40 @@
Sie können eine Liste von abhängigen Aufgaben im Bereich "Hängt ab von" erstellen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Anhängigkeiten" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/task_depends_on.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Anhängigkeiten" src="/docs/assets/img/project/task_depends_on.png">
* Sie können eine übergeordnete Aufgabe nicht abschliessen bis alle abhängigen Aufgaben abgeschlossen sind.
* Wenn sich die abhängige Aufgabe verzögert und sich mit dem voraussichtlichen Startdatum der übergeordneten Aufgabe überlappt, überarbeitet das System die übergeordnete Aufgabe.
### Zeitmanagement
-ERPNext verwendet [Zeitprotokolle]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/projects/time-log.html) um den Fortschritt einer Aufgabe mitzuprotokollieren. Sie können mehrere unterschiedliche Zeitprotokolle zu jeder Aufgabe erstellen. Das aktuelle Start- und Enddatum kann dann zusammen mit der auf dem Zeitprotokoll basierenden Kostenberechnung aktualisiert werden.
+ERPNext verwendet [Zeitprotokolle](/docs/user/manual/de/projects/time-log.html) um den Fortschritt einer Aufgabe mitzuprotokollieren. Sie können mehrere unterschiedliche Zeitprotokolle zu jeder Aufgabe erstellen. Das aktuelle Start- und Enddatum kann dann zusammen mit der auf dem Zeitprotokoll basierenden Kostenberechnung aktualisiert werden.
* Um ein zu einer Aufgabe erstelltes Zeitprotokoll anzuschauen, klicken Sie auf "Zeitprotokolle".
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufgabe - Zeitprotokoll ansehen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/task_view_time_log.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufgabe - Zeitprotokoll ansehen" src="/docs/assets/img/project/task_view_time_log.png">
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufgabe - Liste der Zeitprotokolle" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/task_time_log_list.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufgabe - Liste der Zeitprotokolle" src="/docs/assets/img/project/task_time_log_list.png">
* Sie können ein Zeitprotokoll auch direkt erstellen und mit einer Aufgabe verknüpfen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufgabe - Zeitprotokoll verknüpfen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/task_time_log_link.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufgabe - Zeitprotokoll verknüpfen" src="/docs/assets/img/project/task_time_log_link.png">
### Ausgabenmanagement
-Sie können [Aufwandsabrechnungen]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/human-resources/expense-claim.html) mit einer Aufgabe verbuchen. Das System aktualisiert den Gesamtbetrag der Aufwandsabrechnungen im Abschnitt Kostenberechnung.
+Sie können [Aufwandsabrechnungen](/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/expense-claim.html) mit einer Aufgabe verbuchen. Das System aktualisiert den Gesamtbetrag der Aufwandsabrechnungen im Abschnitt Kostenberechnung.
* Um eine Aufwandsabrechnung, die zu einer Aufgabe erstellt wurde, anzuschauen, klicken Sie auf "Aufwandsabrechnung".
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufgabe - Aufwandsabrechnung ansehen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/task_view_expense_claim.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufgabe - Aufwandsabrechnung ansehen" src="/docs/assets/img/project/task_view_expense_claim.png">
* Sie können eine Aufwandsabrechnung auch direkt erstellen und sie mit einer Aufgabe verknüpfen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufgabe - Aufwandsabrechnung verknüpfen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/task_expense_claim_link.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufgabe - Aufwandsabrechnung verknüpfen" src="/docs/assets/img/project/task_expense_claim_link.png">
* Der Gesamtbetrag der Aufwandsabrechnungen zu einer Aufgabe wird unter "Gesamtbetrag der Aufwandsabrechnungen" im Abschnitt Kostenabrechnung angezeigt.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufgabe - Gesamtsumme Aufwandsabrechnung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/task_total_expense_claim.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Aufgabe - Gesamtsumme Aufwandsabrechnung" src="/docs/assets/img/project/task_total_expense_claim.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/time-log-batch.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/time-log-batch.md
index 6aa85cb..4383e1c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/time-log-batch.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/time-log-batch.md
@@ -9,17 +9,17 @@
Öffnen Sie einfach Ihre Übersicht der Zeitprotokolle und kreuzen Sie die Artikel an, die Sie dem Zeitprotokollstapel hinzufügen möchten. Klicken Sie dann auf die Schaltfläche "Zeitprotokollstapel erstellen" und diese Zeitprotokolle werden ausgewählt.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Zeitprotokoll - Kalender aufziehen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/time_sheet.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Zeitprotokoll - Kalender aufziehen" src="/docs/assets/img/project/time_sheet.gif">
### Ausgangsrechnungen erstellen
* Sobald Sie einen Zeitprotokollstapel übertragen haben, sollte die Schaltfläche "Rechnung erstellen" erscheinen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Zeitprotokoll - Kalender aufziehen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/time_sheet_make_invoice.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Zeitprotokoll - Kalender aufziehen" src="/docs/assets/img/project/time_sheet_make_invoice.png">
* Klicken Sie auf diese Schaltfläche und erstellen Sie eine Ausgangsrechnung zu einem Zeitprotokollstapel.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Zeitprotokoll - Kalender aufziehen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/time_sheet_sales_invoice.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Zeitprotokoll - Kalender aufziehen" src="/docs/assets/img/project/time_sheet_sales_invoice.png">
* Wenn Sie die Ausgangsrechnung "übertragen", wird die Nummer der Ausgangsrechnung in den Zeitprotokollen und im Zeitprotokollstapel aktualisiert und ihr Status wird auf "abgerechnet" geändert.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/time-log.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/time-log.md
index d90e27a..072837e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/time-log.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/projects/time-log.md
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
* Projekte
* Interne Referenzen
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Zeitprotokoll" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/time_log.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Zeitprotokoll" src="/docs/assets/img/project/time_log.png">
### Zeitprotokolle erstellen
@@ -21,15 +21,15 @@
Um Zeitprotokolle über den Kalender zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu "Zeitprotokoll" und wählen Sie "Kalender" aus.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Zeitprotokoll - Kalender ansehen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/time_log_view_calendar.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Zeitprotokoll - Kalender ansehen" src="/docs/assets/img/project/time_log_view_calendar.png">
* Um ein Zeitprotokoll für mehrere Tage zu erstellen, klicken Sie und ziehen Sie den Mauszeiger über die Tage.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Zeitprotokoll - Kalender aufziehen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/time_log_calendar_day.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Zeitprotokoll - Kalender aufziehen" src="/docs/assets/img/project/time_log_calendar_day.gif">
* Sie können Zeitprotokolle auch aus der Wochen- oder Tagesansicht des Kalender heraus erstellen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Zeitprotokoll - Kalender aufziehen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/time_log_calendar_week.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Zeitprotokoll - Kalender aufziehen" src="/docs/assets/img/project/time_log_calendar_week.gif">
* Zeitprotokolle für Fertigungsprozesse müssen aus dem Fertigungsauftrag heraus erstellt werden.
* Um mehrere Zeitprotokolle zu Arbeitsgängen zu erstellen wählen Sie den entsprechenden Arbeitsgang und klicken Sie auf "Zeitprotokoll erstellen".
@@ -37,12 +37,12 @@
### Abrechnung über Zeitprotokolle
* Wenn Sie ein Zeitprotokoll abrechnen wollen, müssem Sie die Option "Abrechenbar" anklicken.
-* Im Abschnitt Kostenberechnung erstellt das System den Rechungsbetrag über die [Aktivitätskosten]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/projects/activity-cost.html) basierend auf dem angegebenen Mitarbeiter und der angegebenen Aktivitätsart.
+* Im Abschnitt Kostenberechnung erstellt das System den Rechungsbetrag über die [Aktivitätskosten](/docs/user/manual/de/projects/activity-cost.html) basierend auf dem angegebenen Mitarbeiter und der angegebenen Aktivitätsart.
* Das System kalkuliert dann den Rechnungsbetrag basierend auf den im Zeitprotokoll angegebenen Stunden.
* Wenn "Abrechenbar" nicht markiert wurde, zeigt das System beim "Rechnungsbetrag" 0 an.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Zeitprotokoll - Abrechnung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/time_log_costing.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Zeitprotokoll - Abrechnung" src="/docs/assets/img/project/time_log_costing.png">
-* Nach dem Übertragen des Zeitprotokolls müssen Sie einen [Zeitprotokollstapel]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/projects/time-log-batch.html) erstellen um mit der Abrechnung fortfahren zu können.
+* Nach dem Übertragen des Zeitprotokolls müssen Sie einen [Zeitprotokollstapel](/docs/user/manual/de/projects/time-log-batch.html) erstellen um mit der Abrechnung fortfahren zu können.
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/quotation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/quotation.md
index 3434e26..94ff78b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/quotation.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/quotation.md
@@ -11,11 +11,11 @@
Sie können auch ein Angebot aus einer Opportunity heraus erstellen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Angebot aus Opportunity erstellen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/make-quote-from-opp.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Angebot aus Opportunity erstellen" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/make-quote-from-opp.png">
Oder Sie erstellen ein neues Angebot und übernehmen Details aus der Opportunity.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Angebot aus Opportunity erstellen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/make-quotation.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Angebot aus Opportunity erstellen" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/make-quotation.gif">
Ein Angebot enthält Informationen über:
@@ -34,12 +34,12 @@
Die Preise, die sie abgeben, hängen von zwei Dingen ab:
-* Die Preisliste: Wenn Sie mehrere verschiedene Preislisten haben, können Sie eine Preisliste auswählen oder sie mit dem Kunden markieren (so dass sie automatisch vorselektiert wird). Ihre Artikelpreise werden automatisch über die Preisliste aktualisert. Für weitere Informationen bitte bei [Preisliste]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/setting-up/price-lists.html) weiterlesen.
+* Die Preisliste: Wenn Sie mehrere verschiedene Preislisten haben, können Sie eine Preisliste auswählen oder sie mit dem Kunden markieren (so dass sie automatisch vorselektiert wird). Ihre Artikelpreise werden automatisch über die Preisliste aktualisert. Für weitere Informationen bitte bei [Preisliste](/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/price-lists.html) weiterlesen.
* Die Währung: Wenn Sie einem Kunden in einer anderen Währung anbieten, müssen Sie die Umrechnungsfaktoren aktualisieren um ERPNext in die Lage zu versetzen die Information in Ihrer Standardwährung zu speichern. Das hilft Ihnen dabei den Wert Ihres Angebots in der Standardwährung zu analysieren.
### Steuern
-Um Steuern zu Ihrem Angebot hinzu zu fügen, können Sie entweder eine Steuervorlage oder eine Verkaufssteuern- und Gebühren-Vorlage auswählen oder die Steuern selbst hinzufügen. Um Steuern im Einzelnen zu verstehen, lesen Sie bitte [Steuern]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html).
+Um Steuern zu Ihrem Angebot hinzu zu fügen, können Sie entweder eine Steuervorlage oder eine Verkaufssteuern- und Gebühren-Vorlage auswählen oder die Steuern selbst hinzufügen. Um Steuern im Einzelnen zu verstehen, lesen Sie bitte [Steuern](/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html).
Sie können Steuern auf die gleiche Art hinzufügen wie die Vorlage Verkaufssteuern und Gebühren.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/sales-order.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/sales-order.md
index 187aeab..d980518 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/sales-order.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/sales-order.md
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
### Flußdiagramm des Kundenauftrags
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kundenauftrag aus Angebot erstellen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/sales-order-f.jpg">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kundenauftrag aus Angebot erstellen" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/sales-order-f.jpg">
Um einen neuen Kundenauftrag zu erstellen gehen Sie zu: > Vertrieb > Kundenauftrag > Neuer Kundenauftrag
@@ -17,11 +17,11 @@
Sie können einen Kundenauftrag auch aus einem übertragenen Angebot heraus erstellen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kundenauftrag aus Angebot erstellen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/make-SO-from-quote.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kundenauftrag aus Angebot erstellen" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/make-SO-from-quote.png">
Oder Sie erstellen einen neuen Kundenauftrag und entnehmen die Details aus dem Angebot.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kundenauftrag aus Angebot erstellen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/make-so.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kundenauftrag aus Angebot erstellen" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/make-so.gif">
Die meisten Informationen im Kundenauftrag sind dieselben wie im Angebot. Einige Dinge möchte der Kundenauftrag aber aktualisiert haben.
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@
ERPNext erstellt automatisch eine neue Bestellung und versendet eine E-Mail-Mitteilung an die E-Mail-Konten, die Sie im Feld "Benachrichtigungs-E-Mail-Adresse" eingestellt haben.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Wiederkehrende Kundenaufträge" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/recurring-sales-order.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Wiederkehrende Kundenaufträge" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/recurring-sales-order.png">
### Die nächsten Schritte
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/product-bundle.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/product-bundle.md
index 30475eb..d97b31d 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/product-bundle.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/product-bundle.md
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
> Vertrieb > Einstellungen > Produkt-Bundle > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Produkt-Bundle" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/product-bundle.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Produkt-Bundle" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/product-bundle.png">
### Hauptartikel auswählen
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
Wenn Vertriebstransaktionen erstellt werden, wie z. B. Ausgangsrechnung, Kundenauftrag und Lieferschein, dann wird der übergeordnete Artikel aus der Hauptartikelliste ausgewählt.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Produkt-Bundle" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/product-bundle.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Produkt-Bundle" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/product-bundle.gif">
Beim Auswählen des übergeordneten Artikels aus der Hauptartikelliste werden die Unterartikel aus der Tabelle "Packliste" der Transaktion angezogen. Wenn der Unterartikel ein serialisierter Artikel ist, können Sie seine Seriennummer direkt in der Packlistentabelle angeben. Wenn die Transaktion versendet wird, reduziert das System den Lagerbestand der Unterartikel auf dem Lager der in der Packlistentabelle angegeben ist.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/sales-partner.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/sales-partner.md
index 66a95a0..c4d096e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/sales-partner.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/sales-partner.md
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
Vertriebspartner werden mit einem vom Benutzer vergebenen Namen abgespeichert.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Vertriebspartner" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/sales-partner.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Vertriebspartner" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/sales-partner.png">
Sie können die Adressen und Kontaktdaten von Vertriebsmitarbeitern erfassen und sie basierend auf Menge und Betrag jeder Artikelgruppe zuweisen.
@@ -21,13 +21,13 @@
Um die Namen Ihrer Partner auf Ihrer Webseite anzuzeigen, aktivieren Sie "Auf der Webseite anzeigen". Wenn Sie diese Option anklicken, erscheint ein Feld, über das Sie das Logo Ihres Partners und eine kurze Beschreibung eingeben können.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Vertriebspartner" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/sales-partner-website.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Vertriebspartner" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/sales-partner-website.png">
Um eine Übersicht Ihrer Partner zu erhalten, gehen Sie zu:
https://example.erpnext.com/Partners
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Auflistung der Vertriebspartner" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/sales-partner-listing.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Auflistung der Vertriebspartner" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/sales-partner-listing.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/selling-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/selling-settings.md
index 0e71d41..08492a6 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/selling-settings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/selling-settings.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
In den Vertriebseinstellungen können Sie Eigenheiten angeben, die bei Ihren Vertriebstransaktionen mit berücksichtigt werden. Im Folgenden sprechen wir jeden einzelnen Punkt an.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Vertriebseinstellungen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/selling-settings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Vertriebseinstellungen" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/selling-settings.png">
### 1\. Benennung der Kunden nach
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/shipping-rule.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/shipping-rule.md
index fc59f02..8bf609d 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/shipping-rule.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/shipping-rule.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
Wenn Sie eine Versandregel verwenden, können Sie die Kosten der Lieferung des Produktes an einen Kunden festlegen. Sie können für den gleichen Artikel für verschiedene Regionen verschiedene Versandregeln definieren.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Versandregel" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/shipping-rule.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Versandregel" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/shipping-rule.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/authorization-rule.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/authorization-rule.md
index 7b202f1..bcc5674 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/authorization-rule.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/authorization-rule.md
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
Geben Sie "Autorisierter Wert" ein. Im Beispiel stellen wir das auf 10.000 Euro ein.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Autorisierungsregel" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/auth-rule.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Autorisierungsregel" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/auth-rule.png">
Wenn ein Benutzer aus dem Vertrieb versucht eine Kundenbestellung mit einem Wert über 10.000 Euro zu übertragen, dann bekommt er eine Fehlermeldung.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/bar-code.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/bar-code.md
index ec9ac4c..e85c698 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/bar-code.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/bar-code.md
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
### Abbildung 1: Markieren Sie das Feld "Artikelbarcode"
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Barcode" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/barcode-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Barcode" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/barcode-1.png">
Wenn Sie einen Barcode einlesen wollen, gehen Sie zu:
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
### Abbildung 2: Aktivieren Sie das Feld "Ist POS"
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Barcode" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/barcode-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Barcode" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/barcode-2.png">
Gehen Sie zu "Artikel" und klicken Sie auf "Neue Zeile einfügen".
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/bulk-rename.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/bulk-rename.md
index c793463..851424a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/bulk-rename.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/bulk-rename.md
@@ -13,4 +13,4 @@
Um mehrere Datensätze umzubenennen, laden Sie eine CSV-Datei mit den alten Namen in der ersten Spalte und den neuen Namen in der zweiten Spalte hoch indem Sie auf "Hochladen" klicken.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Bulk Rename" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/data/rename.png">
\ No newline at end of file
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Bulk Rename" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/data/rename.png">
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.md
index 90dc38c..1ea4e48 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.md
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
Um das Werkzeug zum Datenimport zu öffnen, gehen Sie entweder zu den Einstellungen oder zur Transaktion, für die Sie importieren wollen. Wenn der Datenimport erlaubt ist, sehen Sie eine Importschaltfläche:
-<img alt="Importvorgang starten" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/data-import/data-import-1.png">
+<img alt="Importvorgang starten" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/data-import/data-import-1.png">
Das Werkzeug hat zwei Abschnitte, einen um eine Vorlage herunter zu laden, und einen zweiten um Daten hoch zu laden.
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
Daten werden in ERPNext in Tabellen gespeichert, sehr ähnlich einer Tabellenkalkulation mit Spalten und Zeilen voller Daten. Jede Instanz in ERPNext kann mehrere verschiedene mit Ihr verbundene Untertabellen haben. Die Untertabellen sind mit Ihren übergeordneten Tabellen verknüpft und werden dort eingesetzt, wo es für eine Eigenschaft mehrere verschiedene Werte gibt. So kann z. B. ein Artikel mehrere verschiedene Preise haben, eine Rechnung hat mehrere verschiedene Artikel usw.
-<img alt="Vorlage herunterladen" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/data-import/data-import-2.png">
+<img alt="Vorlage herunterladen" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/data-import/data-import-2.png">
* Klicken Sie auf die Tabelle, die Sie herunter laden wollen, oder auf "Alle Tabellen".
* Für Massenbearbeitung klicken Sie auf "Mit Daten herunterladen".
@@ -24,17 +24,17 @@
Öffnen Sie die Vorlage nach dem Herunterladen in einer Tabellenkalkulationsanwendung und fügen Sie die Daten unterhalb der Spaltenköpfe ein.
-
+
Exportieren Sie dann Ihre Vorlage oder speichern Sie sie im CSV-Format (**Comma Separated Values**).
-
+
### 3. Hochladen der CSV-Datei
Fügen Sie abschliessend die CSV-Datei im Abschnitt Import hinzu. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Hochladen und Importieren".
-<img alt="Upload" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/data-import/data-import-3.png">
+<img alt="Upload" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/data-import/data-import-3.png">
#### Anmerkungen
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-account.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-account.md
index e2923f6..1a315d2 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-account.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-account.md
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
Es gibt zwei Arten von E-Mail-Konten, ausgehend und eingehend. E-Mail-Konten für ausgehende E-Mails verwenden einen SMTP-Service, eingehende E-Mails verwenden einen POP-Service. Die meisten E-Mail-Anbieter wie GMail, Outlook oder Yahoo bieten diese Seriveleistungen an.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kriterien definieren" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-account-list.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kriterien definieren" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-account-list.png">
### Konten zu ausgehenden E-Mails
@@ -19,13 +19,13 @@
Um ein Konto für ausgehende E-Mails einzurichten, markieren Sie die Option **Ausgehend aktivieren** und geben Sie die Einstellungen zum SMTP-Server an. Wenn Sie einen bekannten E-Mail-Service nutzen, wird das vom System für Sie voreingestellt.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Ausgehende E-Mails" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-account-sending.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Ausgehende E-Mails" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-account-sending.png">
### Konten zu eingehenden E-Mails
Um ein Konto für eingehende E-Mails einzurichten, markieren Sie die Option **Eingehend aktivieren** und geben Sie die Einstellungen zum POP3-Server an. Wenn Sie einen bekannten E-Mail-Service nutzen, wird das vom System für Sie voreingestellt.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Eingehende E-Mails" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-account-incoming.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Eingehende E-Mails" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-account-incoming.png">
### Wie ERPNext Antworten handhabt
@@ -35,6 +35,6 @@
Wenn Sie möchten, dass ERPNext Sie benachrichtigt, wenn eine E-Mail für eine bestimmte Zeit unbeantwortet bleibt, dann können Sie die Option **Benachrichtigen, wenn unbeantwortet** markieren. Hier können Sie die Anzahl der Minuten einstellen, die das System warten soll, bevor eine Benachrichtigung gesendet wird, und den Empfänger.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Eingehende Email" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-account-unreplied.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Eingehende Email" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-account-unreplied.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-alerts.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-alerts.md
index 58f6fe3..c965c9b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-alerts.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-alerts.md
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
---
#### Beispiel
-1. [Kriterien definieren](<img class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-alert-1.png">)
-2. [Empfänger und Nachrichtentext eingeben](<img class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-alert-2.png">)
+1. [Kriterien definieren](<img class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-alert-1.png">)
+2. [Empfänger und Nachrichtentext eingeben](<img class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-alert-2.png">)
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-digest.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-digest.md
index 18117a3..9199ee2 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-digest.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-digest.md
@@ -13,6 +13,6 @@
Stellen Sie ein, wie oft Sie eine Benachrichtigung erhalten wollen, markieren Sie alle Artikel, über die Sie in Ihrer wöchentlichen Aktualisierung benachrichtig werden wollen und wählen Sie die Benutzer-IDs aus, an die die Zusammenfassung gesendet werden soll.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="E-Mail-Bericht" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-digest.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="E-Mail-Bericht" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-digest.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/sending-email.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/sending-email.md
index d2087ca..e1f23b9 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/sending-email.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/sending-email.md
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
In ERPNext können sie jedes beliebige Dokument per E-Mail versenden (als PDF-Anhang) indem Sie in einem beliebigen geöffneten Dokument auf `Menü > E-Mail` gehen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Emails versenden" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/send-email.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Emails versenden" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/send-email.gif">
-**Anmerkung:** Es müssen Konten zum [E-Mail-Versand]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-account.html) eingerichtet sein.
+**Anmerkung:** Es müssen Konten zum [E-Mail-Versand](/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-account.html) eingerichtet sein.
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/pos-setting.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/pos-setting.md
index 1849911..b75f96c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/pos-setting.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/pos-setting.md
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
Setzen Sie die Standardeinstellungen wie definiert.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="POS-Einstellungen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/pos-setting/pos-setting.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="POS-Einstellungen" src="/docs/assets/img/pos-setting/pos-setting.png">
> Wichtig: Wenn Sie einen bestimmten Benutzer angeben, werden die POS-Einstellungen nur auf diesen Benutzer angewendet. Wenn diese Optin leer bleibt, werden die Einstellungen auf alle Benutzer angewendet. Um mehr über POS zu erfahren, gehen Sie zu POS.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/price-lists.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/price-lists.md
index b58e191..6fc5f08 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/price-lists.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/price-lists.md
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
> Vertrieb/Einkauf/Lagerbestand > Einstellungen > Preisliste > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Preisliste" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/price-list/price-list.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Preisliste" src="/docs/assets/img/price-list/price-list.png">
* Diese Preislisten werden verwendet, wenn der Datensatz zum Artikelpreis erstellt wird, um den Verkaufs- oder Einkaufspreis eines Artikels nachvollziehen zu können. Klicken Sie hier, wenn Sie mehr über Artikelpreise erfahren wollen.
* Um eine bestimmte Preisliste zu deaktivieren, deaktivieren Sie das Feld "Aktiviert" im der Preisliste. Die deaktivierte Preisliste ist dann in der Auswahl nicht mehr in Verkaufs- oder Einkaufstransaktionen verfügbar.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/address-template.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/address-template.md
index b3f37f7..0622e0c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/address-template.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/address-template.md
@@ -28,6 +28,6 @@
### Beispiel
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Adressvorlage" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/address-format.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Adressvorlage" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/address-format.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/letter-head.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/letter-head.md
index cc05b85..e08da28 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/letter-head.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/letter-head.md
@@ -15,10 +15,10 @@
#### Beispiel
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Briefkopf" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/letter-head.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Briefkopf" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/letter-head.png">
So sieht der Briefkopf eines Ausdruckes aus:
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Briefkopf" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/letter-head-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Briefkopf" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/letter-head-1.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.md
index e4236ae..14ba200 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.md
@@ -11,19 +11,19 @@
### Schritt 1: Erstellen Sie ein neues Format
-<img class="screenshot" alt="E-Mail senden" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/print-format-builder-1.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="E-Mail senden" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/print-format-builder-1.gif">
### Schritt 2: Ein neues Feld hinzufügen
Um ein Feld hinzuzufügen, nehmen Sie es auf der linken Seitenleiste mit der Maus auf und fügen Sie es Ihrem Layout hinzu. Sie können das Layout bearbeiten, indem Sie auf das Symbol für Einstellungen klicken.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="E-Mail senden" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/print-format-builder-2.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="E-Mail senden" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/print-format-builder-2.gif">
### Schritt 3: Ein Feld entfernen
Um ein Feld zu entfernen, legen Sie es einfach zurück in die Seitenleiste.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="E-Mail senden" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/print-format-builder-3.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="E-Mail senden" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/print-format-builder-3.gif">
### Schritt 4
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@
Klicken Sie dann auf **HTML bearbeiten** um den Inhalt zu bearbeiten.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="E-Mail senden" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/print-format-builder-4.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="E-Mail senden" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/print-format-builder-4.gif">
Um Ihr Format abzuspeichern klicken Sie einfach auf die Schaltfläche **Speichern**.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-headings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-headings.md
index cf6b48a..b695a3c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-headings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-headings.md
@@ -9,10 +9,10 @@
#### Abbildung 1: Druckköpfe abspeichern
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Druckköpfe" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/print-heading.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Druckköpfe" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/print-heading.png">
Hier ist ein Beispiel abgebildet, wie man einen Druckkopf auswechselt:
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Druckköpfe" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/print-heading-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Druckköpfe" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/print-heading-1.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-settings.md
index 7dc8067..995edd6 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-settings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-settings.md
@@ -7,6 +7,6 @@
> Einstellungen > Druck > Druckeinstellungen
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Druckeinstellungen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/print-settings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Druckeinstellungen" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/print-settings.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.md
index 718fcc2..071d757 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.md
@@ -9,13 +9,13 @@
> Vertrieb > Einstellungen > Vorlage für Allgemeine Geschäftsbedingungen > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Geschäftsbedingungen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/terms-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Geschäftsbedingungen" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/terms-1.png">
### 2\. Bearbeitung in HTML
Der Inhalt der Allgemeinen Geschäftsbedingungen kann nach Ihren Vorstellungen formatiert werden und es können bei Bedarf auch Bilder eingefügt werden. Für diejenigen, die sich in HTML auskennen, findet Sich auch eine Möglichkeit den Inhalt der Allgemeinen Geschäftsbedingungen in HTML zu formatieren.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Geschäfsbedingungen - HTML bearbeiten" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/terms-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Geschäfsbedingungen - HTML bearbeiten" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/terms-2.png">
Dies erlaubt es Ihnen auch die Vorlage für die Allgemeinen Geschäftsbedingungen als Fußzeile zu verwenden, was sonst in ERPNext nicht als dedizierte Funktionalität zur Verfügung steht. Da die Inhalte der Allgemeinen Geschäftsbedingungen im Druckformat immer zuletzt erscheinen, sollten die Einzelheiten zur Fußzeile am Ende des Inhaltes eingefügt werden.
@@ -23,6 +23,6 @@
In Transaktionen finden Sie den Abschnitt Allgemeine Geschäftsbedingungen, wo Sie nach einer Vorlage für die Allgemeinen Geschäftsbedingungen suchen und diese auswählen können.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Geschäfsbedingungen - Im Dokument auswählen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/terms-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Geschäfsbedingungen - Im Dokument auswählen" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/terms-3.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.md
index 612cf9a..4f45dfc 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.md
@@ -13,11 +13,11 @@
Die Tabelle zu den Artikelsteuern ist ein Abschnitt in den Artikelstammdaten.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Artikelsteuer" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/taxes/item-tax.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Artikelsteuer" src="/docs/assets/img/taxes/item-tax.png">
* **Inklusive oder Exklusive Steuer:** ERPNext erlaubt es Ihnen Artikelpreise inklusive Steuer einzugeben.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Steuer inklusive" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/taxes/inclusive-tax.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Steuer inklusive" src="/docs/assets/img/taxes/inclusive-tax.png">
* **Ausnahme von der Regel:** Die Einstellungen zur Artikelsteuer werden nur dann benötigt, wenn sich der Steuersatz eines bestimmten Artikels von demjenigen, den Sie im Standard-Steuerkonto definiert haben, unterscheidet.
* **Die Artikelsteuer kann überschrieben werden:** Sie können den Artikelsteuersatz überschreiben oder ändern, wenn Sie in der Artikelsteuertabelle zu den Artikelstammdaten gehen.
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@
> Einstellungen > Rechnungswesen > Vorlage für Verkaufssteuern und -abgaben
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Vorlage für Verkaufssteuern" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/taxes/sales-tax-master.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Vorlage für Verkaufssteuern" src="/docs/assets/img/taxes/sales-tax-master.png">
Wenn Sie eine neue Vorlage erstellen, müssen Sie für jeden Steuertyp eine neue Zeile einfügen.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/global-defaults.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/global-defaults.md
index 44ec38e..ef9bc22 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/global-defaults.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/global-defaults.md
@@ -7,6 +7,6 @@
Immer dann, wenn ein neues Dokument erstellt wird, werden diese Werte als Standardeinstellungen verwendet.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Globale Voreinstellungen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/settings/global-defaults.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Globale Voreinstellungen" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/settings/global-defaults.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/module-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/module-settings.md
index 996f3dc..8aaf923 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/module-settings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/module-settings.md
@@ -11,6 +11,6 @@
Markieren oder demarkieren Sie die Elemente die angezeigt / ausgeblendet werden sollen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Moduleinstellungen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/settings/show-hide-modules.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Moduleinstellungen" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/settings/show-hide-modules.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/naming-series.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/naming-series.md
index 1a6f336..0c66c5e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/naming-series.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/naming-series.md
@@ -33,6 +33,6 @@
Sehen Sie hier, wie der Nummernkreis eingestellt wird.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Nummernkreise" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/settings/naming-series.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Nummernkreise" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/settings/naming-series.gif">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/system-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/system-settings.md
index 856d016..d804901 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/system-settings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/system-settings.md
@@ -7,6 +7,6 @@
> Einstellungen > Einstellungen > Systemeinstellungen
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Systemeinstellungen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/settings/system-settings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Systemeinstellungen" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/settings/system-settings.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-1-language.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-1-language.md
index 0fc2a1f..eb37836 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-1-language.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-1-language.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
Wählen Sie Ihre Sprache. ERPNext gibt es in mehr als 20 Sprachen.
-<img alt="Sprache" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-1.png">
+<img alt="Sprache" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-1.png">
---
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-10-item.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-10-item.md
index 3b6d1ac..6116247 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-10-item.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-10-item.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
In diesem letzten Schritt geben Sie bitte die Bezeichnungen der Artikel ein, die Sie kaufen oder verkaufen.
<img alt="Artikel hinzufügen" class="screenshot"
-src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-10.png">
+src="/docs/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-10.png">
Bitte stellen Sie auch die Artikelart (Produkt oder Dienstleistung) und die Standardmaßeinheit ein. Machen Sie sich keine Sorgen, Sie können das alles später noch bearbeiten.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-2-currency-and-timezone.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-2-currency-and-timezone.md
index be327ae..5387b0a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-2-currency-and-timezone.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-2-currency-and-timezone.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
Stellen Sie den Namen Ihres Landes, die Währung und die Zeitzone ein.
-<img alt="Währung" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-2.png">
+<img alt="Währung" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-2.png">
---
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-3-user-details.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-3-user-details.md
index 2d1789d..97b246d 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-3-user-details.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-3-user-details.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
Geben Sie Details zum Benutzerprofil, wie Name, Benutzer-ID und das bevorzugte Passwort ein.
<img alt="Benutzer" class="screenshot"
-src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-3.png">
+src="/docs/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-3.png">
---
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-4-company-details.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-4-company-details.md
index 4c131b5..aca7823 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-4-company-details.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-4-company-details.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
Geben Sie Details zum Unternehmen wie Name, Kürzel und Geschäftsjahr ein.
<img alt="Unternehmensdetails" class="screenshot"
-src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-4.png">
+src="/docs/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-4.png">
---
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-5-letterhead-and-logo.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-5-letterhead-and-logo.md
index f32815d..d8a5c0d 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-5-letterhead-and-logo.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-5-letterhead-and-logo.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
Fügen Sie einen Firmenbriefkopf und ein Firmenlogo hinzu.
<img alt="Firmenlogo und Briefkopf" class="screenshot"
-src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-5.png">
+src="/docs/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-5.png">
---
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
Wenn Ihr Briefkopf noch nicht fertig ist, können Sie diesen Schritt auch überspringen.
-Um später einen Briefkopf über das Modul "Einstellungen" auszuwählen, lesen Sie im Bereich [Briefkopf]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/letter-head.html) weiter.
+Um später einen Briefkopf über das Modul "Einstellungen" auszuwählen, lesen Sie im Bereich [Briefkopf](/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/letter-head.html) weiter.
### Anhang als Internetverknüpfung
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-6-add-users.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-6-add-users.md
index 692bb20..07832e1 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-6-add-users.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-6-add-users.md
@@ -4,6 +4,6 @@
Fügen Sie weitere Benutzer hinzu und teilen Sie ihnen gemäß Ihren Verantwortungsbereichen am Arbeitsplatz Rollen zu.
<img alt="Benutzer" class="screenshot"
-src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-6.png">
+src="/docs/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-6.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-7-tax-details.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-7-tax-details.md
index 76f1538..edf6476 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-7-tax-details.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-7-tax-details.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
Geben Sie bis zu drei Steuerarten an, die Sie regelmäßig in Bezug auf Ihr Gehalt zahlen. Dieser Assistent erstellt eine Steuervorlage, die die Steuren für jede Steuerart berechnet.
<img alt="Steuerdetails" class="screenshot"
-src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-7.png">
+src="/docs/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-7.png">
Geben Sie einfach den Namen der Steuerart und den Steuersatz ein.
@@ -18,6 +18,6 @@
Das Anliegen der Mehrwertsteuer ist es, für den Staat ähnlich der Körperschaftssteuer und der Einkommensteuer Steuererträge zu generieren. Beispiel: Wenn Sie in einem Kaufhaus einkaufen schlägt Ihnen das Geschäft 19% als Mehrwertsteuer auf die Rechnung auf.
-Um im Einstellungsassistenten die Mehrwertsteuer einzustellen, geben Sie einfach den Prozentsatz der vom Staat erhoben wird, ein. Um die Mehrwertsteuer zu einem späteren Zeitpunkt einzustellen, lesen Sie bitte den Abschnitt [Einstellen von Steuern]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html).
+Um im Einstellungsassistenten die Mehrwertsteuer einzustellen, geben Sie einfach den Prozentsatz der vom Staat erhoben wird, ein. Um die Mehrwertsteuer zu einem späteren Zeitpunkt einzustellen, lesen Sie bitte den Abschnitt [Einstellen von Steuern](/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html).
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-8-customer-names.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-8-customer-names.md
index 69fed2b..4525c34 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-8-customer-names.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-8-customer-names.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
Geben Sie die Namen Ihrer Kunden und die Kontaktpersonen ein.
<img alt="Customers" class="screenshot"
-src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-8.png">
+src="/docs/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-8.png">
---
@@ -18,6 +18,6 @@
Kontaktname: Shiv Agarwal
-Um mehr über Kunden zu erfahren, lesen Sie im Abschnitt [Details zu Kunden]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/CRM/customer.html) nach.
+Um mehr über Kunden zu erfahren, lesen Sie im Abschnitt [Details zu Kunden](/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/customer.html) nach.
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-9-suppliers.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-9-suppliers.md
index 7d398b5..2769879 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-9-suppliers.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-9-suppliers.md
@@ -4,10 +4,10 @@
Geben Sie ein paar Namen Ihrer Lieferanten ein.
<img alt="Lieferanten" class="screenshot"
-src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-9.png">
+src="/docs/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-9.png">
---
-Um den Begriff "Lieferant" besser zu verstehen, lesen Sie unter [Lieferantenstammdaten]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/buying/supplier.html) nach.
+Um den Begriff "Lieferant" besser zu verstehen, lesen Sie unter [Lieferantenstammdaten](/docs/user/manual/de/buying/supplier.html) nach.
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/sms-setting.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/sms-setting.md
index 1bcc058..0a1e73b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/sms-setting.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/sms-setting.md
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
http://instant.smses.com/web2sms.php?username=<USERNAME>&password;=<PASSWORD>&to;=<MOBILENUMBER>&sender;=<SENDERID>&message;=<MESSAGE>
-<img class="screenshot" alt="SMS-Einstellungen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/sms-settings2.jpg">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="SMS-Einstellungen" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/sms-settings2.jpg">
> Anmerkung: Die Zeichenfolge bis zum "?" ist die URL des SMS-Gateways.
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@
Beachten Sie, dass einige Parameter in der URL statisch sind. Sie bekommen von Ihrem SMS-Anbieter statische Werte wie Benutzername, Passwort usw. Diese statischen Werte sollten in die Tabelle der statischen Parameter eingetragen werden.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="SMS-Einstellungen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/sms-settings1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="SMS-Einstellungen" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/sms-settings1.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.md
index 01f2281..a1c8dbb 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.md
@@ -23,18 +23,18 @@
Sie sollten sich an eine spezielle Vorlage eines Tabellenblattes halten um den Bestand und den Wert eines Artikels zu importieren. Öffnen Sie ein neues Formular zum Bestandsabgleich um die Optionen für den Download zu sehen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Bestandsabgleich" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/stock-recon-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Bestandsabgleich" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/stock-recon-1.png">
#### Schritt 2: Geben Sie Daten in die CSV-Datei ein.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Bestandsabgleich" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/stock-reco-data.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Bestandsabgleich" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/stock-reco-data.png">
Das CSV-Format beachtet Groß- und Kleinschreibung. Verändern Sie nicht die Kopfbezeichnungen, die in der Vorlage vordefiniert wurden. In den Spalten "Artikelnummer" und "Lager" geben Sie bitte die richtige Artikelnummer und das Lager ein, so wie es in ERPNext bezeichnet wird. Für die Menge geben Sie den Lagerbestand, den Sie für diesen Artikel erfassen wollen, in einem bestimmten Lager ein. Wenn Sie die Menge oder den wertmäßigen Betrag eines Artikels nicht ändern wollen, dann lassen Sie den Eintrag leer.
Anmerkung: Geben Sie keine "0" ein, wenn sie die Menge oder den wertmäßigen Betrag nicht ändern wollen. Sonst kalkuliert das System eine Menge von "0". Lassen Sie also das Feld leer!
#### Schritt 3: Laden Sie die Datei hoch und geben Sie in das Formular "Bestandsableich" Werte ein.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Bestandsabgleich" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/stock-recon-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Bestandsabgleich" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/stock-recon-2.png">
##### Buchungsdatum
@@ -52,11 +52,11 @@
#### Schritt 4: Überprüfen Sie die Daten zum Bestandsabgleich
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Bestandsabgleich Überprüfung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/stock-reco-upload.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Bestandsabgleich Überprüfung" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/stock-reco-upload.gif">
### Bericht zum Lagerbuch
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Bestandsabgleich" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/stock-reco-ledger.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Bestandsabgleich" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/stock-reco-ledger.png">
##### So arbeitet der Bestandsabgleich
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/territory.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/territory.md
index 22743d0..24ce34c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/territory.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/territory.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
Wenn sich Ihre Geschäftstätigkeit in verschiedenen Regionen abspielt (das können z. B. Länder, Bundesländer oder Städte sein), ist es normalerweise eine großartige Idee, diese Struktur auch im System abzubilden. Wenn Sie Ihre Kunden erst einmal nach Regionen eingeteilt haben, können für jede Artikelgruppe Ziele aufstellen und bekommen Berichte, die Ihnen Ihre aktuelle Leistung in einem Gebiet zeigen und auch das, was Sie geplant haben. Sie können zudem auch eine unterschiedliche Preispolitik für ein und dasselbe Produkt in unterschiedlichen Regionen einstellen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Baumstruktur Regionen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/territory-tree.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Baumstruktur Regionen" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/territory-tree.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md
index 8c4c914..ac4093b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
### 1. Übersicht der Benutzer
-<img class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/users/user-1.png" alt="Benutzerliste">
+<img class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/users/user-1.png" alt="Benutzerliste">
Um einen neuen Benutzer hinzuzufügen, klicken Sie auf "Neu".
@@ -28,18 +28,18 @@
Nach dem Speichern sehen Sie eine Liste der Rollen und daneben jeweils eine Schaltfläche zum Anklicken. Markieren Sie alle Rollen, von denen Sie möchten, dass sie der Benutzer bekommt, und speichern Sie das Dokument ab. Um zu sehen, welche Berechtigungen die einzelnen Rollen haben, klicken Sie auf den Rollennamen.
-<img class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/users/user-2.png" alt="Benutzerrollen">
+<img class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/users/user-2.png" alt="Benutzerrollen">
### 4. Zugriff auf Module einstellen
Benutzer haben Zugriff auf alle Module, für die sie aufgrund Ihrer Rollen Berechtigungen haben. Wenn Sie bestimmte Module für den Zugriff sperren möchten, entfernen Sie die Markierung in der Liste.
-<img class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/users/user-3.png" alt="Geblockte Module für Benutzer">
+<img class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/users/user-3.png" alt="Geblockte Module für Benutzer">
### 5. Sicherheitseinstellungen
Wenn Sie dem Benutzer nur zu bestimmten Bürozeiten oder an Wochenenden Zugriff auf das System gewähren möchten, stellen Sie das unter den Sicherheitseinstellungen ein.
-<img class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/users/user-4.png" alt="Sicherheitseinstellungen für Benutzer">
+<img class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/users/user-4.png" alt="Sicherheitseinstellungen für Benutzer">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md
index 6d8108a..1d121c8 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
> Einstellungen > Berechtigungen > Rollenberechtigungen-Manager
-<img alt="Berechtigungen für Lesen, Schreiben, Erstellen, Übertragen und Abändern mit Hilfe des Rollenberechtigungen-Managers einstellen" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-leave-application.png">
+<img alt="Berechtigungen für Lesen, Schreiben, Erstellen, Übertragen und Abändern mit Hilfe des Rollenberechtigungen-Managers einstellen" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-leave-application.png">
Berechtigungen werden angewandt auf einer Kombination von:
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@
Um Benutzerberechtigungen zu setzen, gehen Sie zu:
-> Einstellungen > Berechtigungen > [Benutzerrechte-Manager]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.html)
+> Einstellungen > Berechtigungen > [Benutzerrechte-Manager](/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.html)
@@ -43,30 +43,30 @@
Der Urlaubsantrag ist ein gutes **Beispiel**, welches alle Bereiche des Berechtigungssystems abdeckt.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Der Urlaubsantrag sollte von einem Mitarbeiter erstellt werden, und von einem Urlaubsgenehmiger oder Mitarbeiter des Personalwesens genehmigt werden." src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-leave-application-form.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Der Urlaubsantrag sollte von einem Mitarbeiter erstellt werden, und von einem Urlaubsgenehmiger oder Mitarbeiter des Personalwesens genehmigt werden." src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-leave-application-form.png">
1\. **Er sollte von einem "Mitarbeiter" erstellt werden.** Aus diesem Grund sollte die Rolle "Mitarbeiter" Berechtigungen zum Lesen, Schreiben und Erstellen haben.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Einem Mitarbeiter Lese-, Schreib- und Erstellrechte für einen Urlaubsantrag geben." src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-employee-role.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Einem Mitarbeiter Lese-, Schreib- und Erstellrechte für einen Urlaubsantrag geben." src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-employee-role.png">
2\. **Ein Mitarbeiter sollte nur auf seine/Ihre eigenen Urlaubsanträge zugreifen können.** Daher sollte der Punkt "Benutzerberechtigungen anwenden" für die Rolle "Mitarbeiter" aktiviert sein und es sollte ein Datensatz "Benutzerberechtigung" für jede Kombination von Benutzer und Mitarbeiter erstellt werden. (Dieser Aufwand reduziert sich für den Dokumententyp, indem über das Programm Datensätze für Benutzerberechtigungen erstellt werden.)
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Den Zugriff für einen Benutzer mit der Rolle Mitarbeiter auf Urlaubsanträge über den Benutzerberechtigungen-Manager einschränken." src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-employee-user-permissions.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Den Zugriff für einen Benutzer mit der Rolle Mitarbeiter auf Urlaubsanträge über den Benutzerberechtigungen-Manager einschränken." src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-employee-user-permissions.png">
3\. **Der Personalmanager sollte alle Urlaubsanträge sehen können.** Erstellen Sie für den Personalmanager eine Berechtigungsregel auf der Ebene 0 mit Lese-Rechten. Die Option "Benutzerberechtigungen anwenden" sollte deaktiviert sein.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Einem Personalmanager Rechte für Übertragen und Stornieren für Urlaubsanträge geben. 'Benutzerberechtigungen anwenden' ist demarkiert um vollen Zugriff zu ermöglichen." src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-hr-manager-role.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Einem Personalmanager Rechte für Übertragen und Stornieren für Urlaubsanträge geben. 'Benutzerberechtigungen anwenden' ist demarkiert um vollen Zugriff zu ermöglichen." src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-hr-manager-role.png">
4\. **Der Urlaubsgenehmiger sollte die ihn betreffenden Urlaubsanträge lesen und aktualisieren können.** Der Urlaubsgenehmiger erhält Lese- und Schreibzugriff auf Ebene 0, und die Option "Benutzerberechtigungen anwenden" wird aktiviert. Zutreffende Mitarbeiter-Dokumente sollten in den Benutzerberechtigungen des Urlaubsgenehmigers aufgelistet sein. (Dieser Aufwand reduziert sich für Urlaubsgenehmiger, die in Mitarbeiterdokumenten aufgeführt werden, indem über das Programm Datensätze für Benutzerberechtigungen erstellt werden.)
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Rechte für Schreiben, Lesen und Übertragen an einen Urlaubsgenehmiger zum Genehmigen von Urlauben geben. 'Benutzerberechtigungen anwenden' ist markiert, um den Zugriff basierend auf dem Mitarbeitertyp einzuschränken." src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-leave-approver-role.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Rechte für Schreiben, Lesen und Übertragen an einen Urlaubsgenehmiger zum Genehmigen von Urlauben geben. 'Benutzerberechtigungen anwenden' ist markiert, um den Zugriff basierend auf dem Mitarbeitertyp einzuschränken." src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-leave-approver-role.png">
5\. **Ein Urlaubsantrag sollte nur von einem Mitarbeiter der Personalverwaltung oder einem Urlaubsgenehmiger bestätigt oder abgelehnt werden können.** Das Statusfeld des Urlaubsantrags wird auf Ebene 1 gesetzt. Mitarbeiter der Personalverwaltung und Urlaubsgenehmiger bekommen Lese- und Schreibrechte für Ebene 1, während allen anderen Leserechte für Ebene 1 gegeben werden.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Leserechte auf einen Satz von Feldern auf bestimmte Rollen beschränken." src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/old_images/erpnext/setting-up-permissions-level-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Leserechte auf einen Satz von Feldern auf bestimmte Rollen beschränken." src="/docs/assets/old_images/erpnext/setting-up-permissions-level-1.png">
6\. **Der Mitarbeiter der Personalverwaltung sollte die Möglichkeit haben Urlaubsanträge an seine Untergebenen zu delegieren.** Er erhält die Erlaubis Benutzerberechtigungen einzustellen. Ein Nutzer mit der Rolle "Benutzer Personalverwaltung" wäre dann also in der Lage Benutzer-Berechtigungen und Urlaubsanträge für andere Benutzer zu definieren.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Es dem Benutzer der Personalverwaltung ermöglichen, den Zugriff auf Urlaubsanträge zu delegieren, indem er 'Benutzerberechtigungen einstellen' markiert. Dies erlaubt es dem Benutzer der Personalverwaltung auf den Benutzerberechtigungen-Manager für 'Urlaubsanträge' zuzugreifen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-hr-user-role.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Es dem Benutzer der Personalverwaltung ermöglichen, den Zugriff auf Urlaubsanträge zu delegieren, indem er 'Benutzerberechtigungen einstellen' markiert. Dies erlaubt es dem Benutzer der Personalverwaltung auf den Benutzerberechtigungen-Manager für 'Urlaubsanträge' zuzugreifen" src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-hr-user-role.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md
index 2436439..aea4770 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md
@@ -5,6 +5,6 @@
Um ein Dokument zu teilen, öffnen Sie das Dokument, klicken Sie auf das "+"-Symbol im Abschnitt "Freigegeben für" und wählen Sie den Benutzer aus.
-<img class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/users/share.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/users/share.gif">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md
index 68fc412..6499cc2 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md
@@ -2,4 +2,4 @@
This document has been changed but not yet translated. Please see the English Version
-<a href="{{docs_base_url}}/erpnext/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions">User Permission</a>
+<a href="/docs/erpnext/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions">User Permission</a>
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/workflows.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/workflows.md
index 7879a0a..c53a264 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/workflows.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/workflows.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
Wenn ein Benutzer einen Urlaub beantragt, dann wird seine Anfrage an die Personalabteilung weiter geleitet. Die Personalabteilung, repräsentiert durch einen Mitarbeiter der Personalabteilung, wird diese Anfrage dann entweder genehmigen oder ablehnen. Wenn dieser Prozess abgeschlossen ist, dann bekommt der Vorgesetzte des Benutzers (der Urlaubsgenehmiger) eine Mitteilung, dass die Personalabteilung den Antrag genehmigt oder abgelehnt hat. Der Vorgesetzte, der die genehmigende Instanz ist, wird dann den Antrag entweder genehmigen oder ablehnen. Dementsprechend bekommt der Benutzer dann eine Genehmigung oder eine Ablehnung.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/workflow-leave-fl.jpg">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/workflow-leave-fl.jpg">
Um einen Workflow und Übergangsregeln zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
@@ -15,11 +15,11 @@
#### Schritt 1: Geben Sie die unterschiedlichen Zustände des Prozesses Urlaubsantrag ein.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/workflow-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/workflow-1.png">
#### Schritt 2: Geben Sie die Übergangsregeln ein.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/workflow-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/workflow-2.png">
Hinweise:
@@ -37,14 +37,14 @@
Wenn ein Urlaubsantrag übertragen wird, steht der Status in der Ecke der rechten Seite auf "Beantragt".
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/workflow-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/workflow-3.png">
Wenn sich ein Mitarbeiter der Personalabteilung anmeldet, dann kann er den Antrag genehmigen oder ablehnen. Wenn eine Genehmigung erfolgt, wechselt der Status in der rechten Ecke zu "Genehmigt". Es wird jedoch ein blaues Informationssymbol angezeigt, welches aussagt, dass der Urlaubsantrag noch anhängig ist.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/workflow-4.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/workflow-4.png">
Wenn der Urlaubsgenehmiger die Seite mit den Urlaubsanträgen öffnet, kann er den Status von "Genehmigt" auf "Abgelehnt" ändern.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/workflow-5.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/workflow-5.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md
index 1a17675..fb427e1 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
Wenn Sie Artikel kaufen und erhalten, werden diese Artikel als Vermögen des Unternehmens gebucht (Warenbestand/Anlagevermögen). Wenn Sie diese Artikel wieder verkaufen und ausliefern, werden Kosten (Selbstkosten) in Höhe der Bezugskosten der Artikel verbucht. Nach jeder Lagertransaktion werden Buchungen im Hauptbuch erstellt. Dies hat zum Ergebnis, dass der Wert im Lagerbuch immer gleich dem Wert in der Bilanz bleibt. Das verbessert die Aussagekraft der Bilanz und der Gewinn- und Verlustrechnung.
-Um Buchungen für bestimmte Lagertransaktionen zu überprüfen, bitte unter [Beispiele]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.html) nachlesen.
+Um Buchungen für bestimmte Lagertransaktionen zu überprüfen, bitte unter [Beispiele](/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.html) nachlesen.
#### Vorteile
@@ -33,6 +33,6 @@
Dieser Gesamtprozess wird als Stichtagsinventur bezeichnet.
-Wenn Sie als bereits existierender Benutzer die Stichtagsinventur nutzen aber zur Ständigen Inventur wechseln möchten, müssen Sie der Migrationsanleitung folgen. Für weitere Details lesen Sie [Migration aus der Stichtagsinventur]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.html).
+Wenn Sie als bereits existierender Benutzer die Stichtagsinventur nutzen aber zur Ständigen Inventur wechseln möchten, müssen Sie der Migrationsanleitung folgen. Für weitere Details lesen Sie [Migration aus der Stichtagsinventur](/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.html).
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md
index 742d246..62a9166 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
> Einstellungen > Rechnungswesen > Konteneinstellungen > Eine Buchung für jede Lagerbewegung erstellen
-
+
* Erstellen Sie Lagerbuchungen (Materialübertrag) um verfügbare Lagerbestände von einem existierenden Lager auf ein neues Lager zu übertragen. Sobald im neuen Lager der Lagerbestand verfügbar wird, sollten Sie für zukünftige Transaktionen nur noch das neue Lager verwenden.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md
index f0e1f7a..639e140 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md
@@ -133,11 +133,11 @@
<p><strong>Lagerbuch</strong>
</p>
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuch" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-receipt-sl-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuch" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-receipt-sl-1.png">
**Hauptbuch:**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Hauptbuch" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-receipt-gl-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Hauptbuch" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-receipt-gl-2.png">
Um ein System der doppelten Buchhaltung zu erhalten, werden dadurch, dass sich der Kontensaldo durch den Kaufbeleg erhöht, die Konten "In Verkaufsstellen" und "Anlagevermögen im Lager" belastet und das temporäre Konto "Lagerware erhalten aber noch nicht abgerechnet" entlastet. Zum selben Zeitpunkt wird eine negative Aufwendung auf das Konto "In der Bewertung enthaltene Kosten" verbucht, um die Bewertung hinzuzufügen und um eine doppelte Aufwandsverbuchung zu vermeiden.
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@
#### Hauptbuch
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Hauptbuch" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-pinv-gl-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Hauptbuch" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-pinv-gl-3.png">
Hier wird das Konto "Lagerware erhalten aber noch nicht bewertet" belastet und hebt den Effekt des Kaufbeleges auf.
@@ -206,11 +206,11 @@
**Lagerbuch**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuch" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-dn-sl-4.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuch" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-dn-sl-4.png">
**Hauptbuch**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Hauptbuch" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-dn-gl-5.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Hauptbuch" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-dn-gl-5.png">
Da der Artikel aus dem Lager "In Verkaufsstellen" geliefert wird, wird das Konto "In Verkaufsstellen" entlastet und ein Betrag in gleicher Höhe dem Aufwandskonto "Selbstkosten" belastet. Der belastete/entlastete Betrag ist gleich dem Gesamtwert (Einkaufskosten) des Verkaufsartikels. Und der Wert wird gemäß der bevorzugten Bewertungsmethode (FIFO/Gleitender Durchschnitt) oder den tatsächlichen Kosten eines serialisierten Artikels kalkuliert.
@@ -231,11 +231,11 @@
**Lagerbuch**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuch" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-inv-sl-6.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuch" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-inv-sl-6.png">
**Hauptbuch**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Hauptbuch" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-inv-gl-7.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Hauptbuch" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-inv-gl-7.png">
Hier werden, im Gegensatz zu den normalen Buchungen für Rechnungen, die Konten "In Verkaufsstellen" und "Selbstkosten" basierend auf der Bewertung beeinflusst.
@@ -268,11 +268,11 @@
**Lagerbuch**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuch" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-receipt-sl.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuch" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-receipt-sl.png">
**Hauptbuch**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Hauptbuch" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-receipt-gl.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Hauptbuch" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-receipt-gl.png">
* * *
@@ -303,11 +303,11 @@
**Lagerbuch**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuch" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-issue-sl.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuch" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-issue-sl.png">
**Hauptbuch**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Hauptbuch" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-issue-gl.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Hauptbuch" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-issue-gl.png">
* * *
@@ -340,8 +340,8 @@
**Lagerbuch**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuch" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-transfer-sl.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuch" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-transfer-sl.png">
**Hauptbuch**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Hauptbuch" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-transfer-gl.png">
\ No newline at end of file
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Hauptbuch" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-transfer-gl.png">
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/batch.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/batch.md
index 783e7e3..69171e1 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/batch.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/batch.md
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
Die Chargenstammdaten werden vor der Ausfertigung des Kaufbelegs erstellt. Somit erstellen Sie immer dann, wenn für einen Chargenartikel ein Kaufbeleg oder ein Produktionsauftrag ausgegeben werden, zuerst die Chargennummer des Artikels und wählen diese dann im Kaufbeleg oder im Produktionsauftrag aus.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Charge" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/batch.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Charge" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/batch.png">
> Anmerkung: Bei Lagertransaktionen werden die Chargen-IDs basierend auf dem Code, dem Lager, dem Verfallsdatum der Charge (verglichen mit dem Veröffentlichungsdatum der Transaktion) und der aktuellen Menge im Lager gefiltert.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/delivery-note.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/delivery-note.md
index 00e66ca..5ee2567 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/delivery-note.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/delivery-note.md
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
oder aber über eine "übertragene" Kundenbestellung (die noch nicht versandt wurde) indem Sie auf "Lieferschein erstellen" klicken.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lieferschein" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/delivery-note.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lieferschein" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/delivery-note.png">
Sie können die Details auch aus einer noch nicht gelieferten Kundenbestellung "herausziehen".
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@
### Pakete oder Artikel mit Produkt-Bundles versenden
-Wenn Sie Artikel, die ein [Produkt-Bundle]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/selling/setup/product-bundle.html), ERPNext will automatically beinhalten, versenden, erstellt Ihnen ERPNext automatisch eine Tabelle "Packliste" basierend auf den Unterartikeln dieses Artikels.
+Wenn Sie Artikel, die ein [Produkt-Bundle](/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/product-bundle.html), ERPNext will automatically beinhalten, versenden, erstellt Ihnen ERPNext automatisch eine Tabelle "Packliste" basierend auf den Unterartikeln dieses Artikels.
Wenn Ihre Artikel serialisiert sind, dann müssen Sie für Artikel vom Typ Produkt-Bundle die Seriennummer in der Tabelle "Packliste" aktualisieren.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/material-request.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/material-request.md
index 5a47b13..2a59ecb 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/material-request.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/material-request.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
Eine Materialanfrage ist ein einfaches Dokument, welches einen Bedarf an Artikeln (Produkte oder Dienstleistungen) für einen bestimmten Zweck erfasst.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Materialanfrage" src="({{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/material-request-workflow.jpg">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Materialanfrage" src="(/docs/assets/img/buying/material-request-workflow.jpg">
Um eine Materialanfrage manuell zu erstellen, gehen Sie bitte zu:
@@ -11,14 +11,14 @@
### Materialanfrage erstellen
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Materialanfrage" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/material-request.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Materialanfrage" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/material-request.png">
Eine Materialanfrage kann auf folgende Arten erstellt werden:
* Automatisch aus einem Kundenauftrag heraus.
* Automatisch, wenn die projizierte Menge eines Artikels in den Lagern einen bestimmten Bestand erreicht.
* Automatisch aus einer Stückliste heraus, wenn Sie das Modul "Produktionsplanung" benutzen, um Ihre Fertigungsaktivitäten zu planen.
-* Wenn Ihre Artikel Bestandsposten sind, müssen Sie überdies das Lager angeben, auf welches diese Artikel geliefert werden sollen. Das hilft dabei die [projizierte Menge]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/stock/projected-quantity.html) für diesen Artikel im Auge zu behalten.
+* Wenn Ihre Artikel Bestandsposten sind, müssen Sie überdies das Lager angeben, auf welches diese Artikel geliefert werden sollen. Das hilft dabei die [projizierte Menge](/docs/user/manual/de/stock/projected-quantity.html) für diesen Artikel im Auge zu behalten.
Es gibt folgende Typen von Materialanfragen:
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/projected-quantity.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/projected-quantity.md
index 2b3d9e7..2f6e001 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/projected-quantity.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/projected-quantity.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
Eine strikte Kontrolle des projizierten Lagerbestandes ist entscheidend um Engpässe vorherzusagen und die richtige Bestellmenge kalkulieren zu können.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Bericht zur projizierten Menge" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/projected-quantity-stock-report.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Bericht zur projizierten Menge" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/projected-quantity-stock-report.png">
> Projizierte Menge = Momentan vorhandene Menge + Geplante Menge + Angefragte Menge + Bestellte Menge - Reservierte Menge
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/purchase-receipt.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/purchase-receipt.md
index f78600d..5303895 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/purchase-receipt.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/purchase-receipt.md
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
oder aus einer "übertragenen" Einkaufsbestellung heraus, in dem Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Kaufbeleg erstellen" klicken.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kaufbeleg" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/purchase-receipt.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kaufbeleg" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/purchase-receipt.png">
### Ausschuss
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/purchase-return.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/purchase-return.md
index 1da0bc4..0805d75 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/purchase-return.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/purchase-return.md
@@ -7,18 +7,18 @@
Öffnen Sie hierzu zuerst die ursprüngliche Eingangsrechnung zu der der Lieferant die Artikel geliefert hat.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Original-Eingangsrechnung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/purchase-return-original-purchase-receipt.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Original-Eingangsrechnung" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/purchase-return-original-purchase-receipt.png">
Klicken Sie dann auf "Lieferantenreklamation erstellen", dies öffnet einen neuen Kaufbeleg bei dem "Ist Reklamation" markiert ist, und bei dem die Artikel mit negativer Menge aufgeführt sind.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Reklamation zum Lieferschein" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/purchase-return-against-purchase-receipt.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Reklamation zum Lieferschein" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/purchase-return-against-purchase-receipt.png">
Bei der Ausgabe eines Reklamations-Kaufbelegs vermindert das System die Menge des Artikels auf dem entsprechenden Lager. Um einen korrekten Lagerwert zu erhalten, verändert sich der Lagersaldo entsprechend dem Einkaufspreis des zurückgesendeten Artikels.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Reklamation und Lagerbuch" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/purchase-return-stock-ledger.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Reklamation und Lagerbuch" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/purchase-return-stock-ledger.png">
Wenn die Ständige Inventur aktiviert wurde, verbucht das System weiterhin Buchungssätze zum Lagerkonto um den Lagersaldo mit dem Lagerbestand des Lagerbuchs zu synchronisieren.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Reklamation und Lagerbuch" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/purchase-return-general-ledger.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Reklamation und Lagerbuch" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/purchase-return-general-ledger.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/sales-return.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/sales-return.md
index 2b4fbb4..0daef5c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/sales-return.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/sales-return.md
@@ -7,22 +7,22 @@
Öffnen Sie dazu zuerst den Lieferschein/die Ausgangsrechnung zu dem/der der Kunde einen Artikel zurück sendet.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Original-Lieferschein" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/sales-return-original-delivery-note.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Original-Lieferschein" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/sales-return-original-delivery-note.png">
Klicken Sie dann auf "Kundenreklamation erstellen", das öffnet einen neuen Lieferschein, bei dem "Ist Reklamation" aktiviert ist, und die Artikel und Steuern mit negativem Betrag angezeigt werden.
Sie können die Reklamation auch über die Originalausgangsrechnung erstellen. Um Material mit einer Gutschrift zurück zu geben, markieren Sie die Option "Lager aktualisieren" in der Reklamationsrechnung.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kundenreklamation zum Lieferschein" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/sales-return-against-delivery-note.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kundenreklamation zum Lieferschein" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/sales-return-against-delivery-note.png">
Bei der Ausgabe eines Rücksendelieferscheins / einer Reklamationsrechnung erhöht das System den Lagerbestand im entsprechenden Lager. Um den richtigen Lagerwert zu erhalten erhöht sich der Lagerbestand um den Wert des ursprünglichen Einkaufspreises des zurückgeschickten Artikels.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kundenreklamation zur Eingangsrechnung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/sales-return-against-sales-invoice.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kundenreklamation zur Eingangsrechnung" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/sales-return-against-sales-invoice.png">
Für den Fall einer Reklamationsrechnung erhält das Kundenkonto eine Gutschrift und die damit verknüpften Konten für Erträge und Steuern werden belastet.
Wenn die ständige Inventur aktiviert ist, erstellt das System auch Buchungen für das Lagerkonto um den Kontostand des Lagers mit dem Lagerbuch zu synchronisieren.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuch und Reklamation" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/sales-return-stock-ledger.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuch und Reklamation" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/sales-return-stock-ledger.png">
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuch und Reklamation" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/sales-return-general-ledger.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuch und Reklamation" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/sales-return-general-ledger.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/serial-no.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/serial-no.md
index 1fb8bd8..883a45e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/serial-no.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/serial-no.md
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
Der Lagerbestand eines Artikels kann nur dann beeinflusst werden, wenn die Seriennummer mit Hilfe einer Lagertransaktion (Lagerbuchung, Kaufbeleg, Lieferschein, Ausgangsrechnung) übertragen wird. Wenn eine neue Seriennummer direkt erstellt wird, kann der Lagerort nicht eingestellt werden.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Seriennummer" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/serial-no.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Seriennummer" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/serial-no.png">
* Der Status wird aufgrund der Lagerbuchung eingestellt.
* Nur Seriennummern mit dem Status "Verfügbar" können geliefert werden.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/item-attribute.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/item-attribute.md
index 6deabb3..d61c6fc 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/item-attribute.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/item-attribute.md
@@ -3,18 +3,18 @@
Sie können Attribute und Attributwerte für Ihre Artikelvarianten hier auswählen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Attributvorlage" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-attribute.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Attributvorlage" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-attribute.png">
### Nicht-numerische Attribute
* Für nicht-numerische Attribute definieren Sie Attributwerte und deren Abkürzungen in der Tabelle Attributwerte.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Attributvorlage" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-attribute-non-numeric.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Attributvorlage" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-attribute-non-numeric.png">
### Numerische Attribute
* Wenn Ihr Attribut numerisch ist, wählen Sie numerische Werte.
* Geben Sie den Bereich an und die Schrittweite.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Attributvorlage" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-attribute-numeric.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Attributvorlage" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-attribute-numeric.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/item-group.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/item-group.md
index 8be1a60..c911c6c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/item-group.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/item-group.md
@@ -3,19 +3,19 @@
Die Artikelgruppe ist die Klassifikationskategorie. Ordnen Sie ein Produkt abhängig von seiner Art in einen entsprechenden Bereich ein. Wenn das Produkt dienstleistungsorientiert ist, ordnen Sie es unter dem Hauptpunkt Dienstleistung ein. Wenn das Produkt als Rohmaterial verwendet wird, müssen Sie es in der Kategorie Rohmaterial einordnen. Für den Fall, dass es sich bei dem Produkt um reine Handelsware handelt, können Sie es im Bereich Handelsware einordnen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Baumstruktur Artikelgruppe" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-group-tree.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Baumstruktur Artikelgruppe" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-group-tree.png">
### Eine Artikelgruppe erstellen
* Wählen Sie eine Artikelgruppe aus unter der Sie eine Artikelgruppe erstellen wollen.
* Klicken Sie auf "Unterpunkt hinzufügen".
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Artikelgruppe hinzufügen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-group-new.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Artikelgruppe hinzufügen" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-group-new.gif">
### Eine Artikelgruppe löschen
* Wählen Sie die zu löschende Artikelgruppe aus.
* Klicken Sie auf "Löschen"
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Artikelgruppe hinzufügen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-group-del.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Artikelgruppe hinzufügen" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-group-del.gif">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/stock-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/stock-settings.md
index c7237b0..2eb84eb 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/stock-settings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/stock-settings.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
Sie können Standardeinstellungen für Ihre mit dem Lager verbundenen Transaktionen hier voreinstellen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagereinstellungen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/stock-settings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagereinstellungen" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/stock-settings.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/stock-entry.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/stock-entry.md
index 4b9fe08..442c42d 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/stock-entry.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/stock-entry.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
> Lagerbestand > Dokumente > Lagerbuchung > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuchung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/stock-entry.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuchung" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/stock-entry.png">
Lagerbuchungen können aus folgenden Gründen erstellt werden:
@@ -27,15 +27,15 @@
Um Zusatzkosten hinzuzufügen, geben Sie die Beschreibung und den Betrag der Kosten in die Tabelle Zusatzkosten ein.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuchung Zusatzlkosten" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/additional-costs-table.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuchung Zusatzlkosten" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/additional-costs-table.png">
Die hinzugefügten Zusatzkosten werden basierend auf dem Grundwert der Artikel proportional auf die erhaltenen Artikel verteilt. Dann werden die verteilten Zusatzkosten zum Grundpreis hinzugerechnet, um den Wert neu zu berechnen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuchung Preis für Artikelvarianten" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/stock-entry-item-valuation-rate.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lagerbuchung Preis für Artikelvarianten" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/stock-entry-item-valuation-rate.png">
Wenn die laufende Inventur aktiviert ist, werden Zusatzkosten auf das Konto "Aufwendungen im Wert beinhaltet" gebucht.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Zusatzkosten Hauptbuch" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/additional-costs-general-ledger.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Zusatzkosten Hauptbuch" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/additional-costs-general-ledger.png">
> Hinweis: Um den Lagerbestand über eine Tabellenkalkulation zu aktualisieren, bitte unter Lagerabgleich nachlesen.
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md
index 340e104..0cb6ea1 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@
Im Dokument können Sie verschiedene Kaufbelege auswählen und alle Artikel daraus abrufen. Dann sollten Sie zutreffende Abgaben aus der Tabelle "Steuern und Abgaben" hinzufügen. Die hinzugefügten Abgaben werden proportional auf die Artikel aufgeteilt, basierend auf ihrem Wert.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Einstandskostenbeleg" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/landed-cost.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Einstandskostenbeleg" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/landed-cost.png">
### Was passiert bei der Ausgabe?
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/packing-slip.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/packing-slip.md
index 93752be..474f2d5 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/packing-slip.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/packing-slip.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
Ein Packzettel ist ein Dokument, welches die Artikel einer Sendung auflistet. Normalerweise wird er den gelieferten Waren beigelegt. Beim Versand eines Produktes wird ein Entwurf für einen Lieferschein erstellt. Sie können aus diesem Lieferschein (Entwurf) einen Packzettel erstellen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Packzettel" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/packing-slip.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Packzettel" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/packing-slip.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md
index 9c375df..76ef650 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md
@@ -5,6 +5,6 @@
> Lagerbestand > Werkzeuge > Qualitätsprüfung > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Qualitätsprüfung" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/quality-inspection.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Qualitätsprüfung" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/quality-inspection.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/warehouse.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/warehouse.md
index a2e6c43..56c5913 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/warehouse.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/stock/warehouse.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
> Lagerbestand > Einstellungen > Lager > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lager" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/warehouse.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lager" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/warehouse.png">
In ERPNext muss jedes Lager einer festen Firma zugeordnet sein, um einen unternehmensbezogenen Lagerbestand zu erhalten. Die Lager werden mit den ihnen zugeordneten Firmenkürzeln abgespeichert. Dies erleichtert es auf einen Blick herauszufinden, welches Lager zu welcher Firma gehört.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/support/issue.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/support/issue.md
index 37a1b84..5483e7e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/support/issue.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/support/issue.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
> Support > Dokumente > Anfrage > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Fall" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/support/issue.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Fall" src="/docs/assets/img/support/issue.png">
### Gesprächsaufzeichnung
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/support/maintenance-schedule.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/support/maintenance-schedule.md
index dcc88ae..df08375 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/support/maintenance-schedule.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/support/maintenance-schedule.md
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
> Support > Dokumente > Wartungsplan > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Wartungsplan" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/support/maintenance-schedule.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Wartungsplan" src="/docs/assets/img/support/maintenance-schedule.png">
Im Wartungsplan gibt es zwei Abschnitte:
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/support/maintenance-visit.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/support/maintenance-visit.md
index d215c73..86ed897 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/support/maintenance-visit.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/support/maintenance-visit.md
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
> Support > Dokumente > Wartungsbesuch > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Wartungsbesuch" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/support/maintenance-visit.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Wartungsbesuch" src="/docs/assets/img/support/maintenance-visit.png">
Der Wartungsbesuch inhält Informationen über:
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/support/warranty-claim.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/support/warranty-claim.md
index 42ae52d..a54aac8 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/support/warranty-claim.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/support/warranty-claim.md
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
> Support > Dokukumente > Garantieantrag > Neu
-
+
Wenn für die Lösung des Problems ein Besuch beim Kunden notwendig ist, können Sie einen neuen Wartungsbesuch erstellen.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/assignment.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/assignment.md
index 6631491..e24d132 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/assignment.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/assignment.md
@@ -11,9 +11,9 @@
Die Option "Zuweisen zu" befindet sich in der Fußzeile des Dokuments. Wenn Sie auf das Zuteilungs-Symbol in der Werkzeugleiste klicken, werden Sie schnell zur Fußzeile des selben Dokuments weiter geleitet.
-
+
-
+
### Schritt 2: Zu einem Benutzer zuweisen
@@ -21,19 +21,19 @@
Bei der Zuordnung können Sie auch einen Kommentar für denjenigen hinterlassen, dem das Dokument zugeordnet wird.
-
+
### Aufgabenliste des Empfängers
Diese Transaktion erscheint in der Aufgabenliste des Empfängers.
-
+
Zuordnung entfernen
Ein Benutzer kann eine Zuordnung entfernen, indem im Dokument die Schaltfläche "Zuordnung abgeschlossen" angeklickt wird.
-
+
Wenn die Zuordnung einmal als abgeschlossen markiert wurde, wird der Status des zugehörigen Eintrages in der Aufgabenliste auf "Abgeschlossen" gesetzt.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/calendar.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/calendar.md
index 42d884b..8be1609 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/calendar.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/calendar.md
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
Sie können die Kalenderansicht umschalten zwischen Monatsansicht, Wochenansicht und Tagesansicht.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Calendar" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calendar-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Calendar" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calendar-1.png">
### Ereignisse im Kalender erstellen
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
Diese Ansicht zeigt die 24 Stunden des Tages aufgeteilt in verschiedene Zeitfenster an. Klicken Sie für den Startzeitpunkt auf ein Zeitfenster und ziehen Sie den Rahmen auf bis Sie den Endzeitpunkt erreichen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Calendar" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calendar-2.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Calendar" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calendar-2.gif">
Auf Grundlage der Auswahl des Zeitfensters werden Start- und Endzeitpunkt in die Ereignisvorlage übernommen. Sie können dann noch die Bezeichnung des Ereignisses angeben und speichern.
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@
Im Leadformular finden Sie die Felder "Nächster Kontakt durch" und "Nächstes Kontaktdatum". Wenn Sie in diesen Feldern einen Termin und eine Kontaktperson eintragen, wird automatisch ein Ereignis erstellt.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lead Event" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calendar-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lead Event" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calendar-3.png">
#### Geburtstag
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
Sie können Ereignisse als wiederkehrend in bestimmten Intervallen markieren, indem Sie "Dieses Ereignis wiederholen" aktivieren.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Calendar Recurring Event" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calendar-4.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Calendar Recurring Event" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calendar-4.png">
### Erinnerungen an Ereignisse
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
Wenn Sie in der Ereignisvorlage den Punkt "E-Mail-Erinnerung am Morgen senden" anklicken, erhalten alle Teilnehmer an diesem Ereignis eine Benachrichtungs-E-Mail.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Calendar Recurring Event" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calendar-6.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Calendar Recurring Event" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calendar-6.png">
#### Einen täglichen E-Mail-Bericht erstellen
@@ -53,6 +53,6 @@
> Einstellungen > E-Mail > Täglicher E-Mail-Bericht
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Calendar Recurring Event" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calender-email-digest.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Calendar Recurring Event" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calender-email-digest.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/collaborating-around-forms.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/collaborating-around-forms.md
index 3107a2b..956a774 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/collaborating-around-forms.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/collaborating-around-forms.md
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
Sie können jedwede Transaktion aus dem System versenden, indem Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Zugeordnet zu" klicken. Im Menü "Kommunikation" wird ein Protokoll aller von Ihnen versendeter E-Mails gepflegt.
-
+
### Kommentar
@@ -13,6 +13,6 @@
### Schlagworte
-Lesen Sie hier mehr über [Schlagworte]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/tags.html)
+Lesen Sie hier mehr über [Schlagworte](/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/tags.html)
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/messages.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/messages.md
index 11722a6..f9d1796 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/messages.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/messages.md
@@ -3,10 +3,10 @@
Sie können mithilfe des Nachrichtenwerkzeuges Mitteilungen über das System versenden und empfangen. Wenn Sie einem Benutzer eine Mitteilung senden, und der Benutzer angemeldet ist, öffnet sich ein Mitteilungsfenster und der Zähler für ungelesene Mitteilungen in der Kopfleiste wird angepasst.
-
+
Sie können Mitteilungen an alle Benutzer oder nur an bestimmte versenden.
-
+
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/notes.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/notes.md
index a791352..cb79771 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/notes.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/notes.md
@@ -11,13 +11,13 @@
Geben Sie Titel und Inhalt ein.
-
+
## Berechtigungen für ausgewählte Benutzer setzen
Damit alle auf eine Anmerkung zugreifen können, aktivieren Sie "Öffentlich" unter dem Abschnitt Verknüpfungen. Damit ein Benutzer auf eine bestimmte Anmerkung zugreifen kann, können diese in der Tabelle "Teilen mit" ausgewählt werden.
-
+
Anmerkungen können intern auch als Wissensdatenbank genutzt werden. Sie können an die Anmerkungen auch Dateien anhängen und diese einer bestimmten Auswahl an Benutzern zugänglich machen.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/tags.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/tags.md
index 68282b8..e61a598 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/tags.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/tags.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
Genauso wie Zuordnungen und Kommentare können Sie auch Ihre eigenen Schlagworte zu jeder Art von Transaktionen hinzufügen. Diese Schlagworte helfen Ihnen bei der Suche nach einem Dokument und klassifizieren dieses. ERPNext zeigt Ihnen die wichtigen Schlagworte in der Dokumentenliste an.
-
+
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/to-do.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/to-do.md
index 70e7188..54b6cf4 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/to-do.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/to-do.md
@@ -3,10 +3,10 @@
"Aufgaben" ist ein einfaches Werkzeug, welches alle Aktivitäten, die Ihnen [zugeordnet](https://erpnext.com/collaboration-tools/assignment) wurden, und die Sie zugeordnet haben, auflistet. Sie können zudem Ihre eigenen ToDos der Liste hinzufügen.
-
+
Wenn eine Aufgabe abgeschlossen wurde, können Sie einfach die Zuweisung vom Dokument entfernen. Dabei wird die Aufgabe von der ToDo-Liste entfernt. Bei Aufgaben, die nicht über ein Dokument zugeordnet wurden, können Sie den Status über den ToDo-Datensatz selbst auf "abgeschlossen" setzen.
-
+
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/website/blog-post.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/website/blog-post.md
index 1641ea9..c316577 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/website/blog-post.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/website/blog-post.md
@@ -9,12 +9,12 @@
> Webseite > Blog-Eintrag > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Blogeintrag" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/blog-post.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Blogeintrag" src="/docs/assets/img/website/blog-post.png">
Sie können einen Blog mit Hilfe des Markdown-Formats formatieren. Sie können auf Ihren Blog auch zugreifen, indem Sie zur Seite "blog.html" gehen.
#### Ein Beispiel für einen Blog.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Beispiel für ein Blog" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/blog-sample.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Beispiel für ein Blog" src="/docs/assets/img/website/blog-sample.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/website/blogger.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/website/blogger.md
index 8d81b39..6332fb6 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/website/blogger.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/website/blogger.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
Ein Blogger ist ein Benutzer, der Blog-Einträge erstellen kann. Sie können eine Kurzbiografie des Bloggers angeben und dazu einen Avatar.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Blogger" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/blogger.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Blogger" src="/docs/assets/img/website/blogger.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/website-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/website-settings.md
index 45a4498..2082455 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/website-settings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/website-settings.md
@@ -3,11 +3,11 @@
Die meisten der Einstellungen, die Ihre Webseite betreffen, können hier eingestellt werden.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Webseiten-Einstellungen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/website-settings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Webseiten-Einstellungen" src="/docs/assets/img/website/website-settings.png">
### Zielseite
-* Homepage: Sie können angeben, welche [Webseite]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/website/web-page.html) die Startseite der Homepage ist.
+* Homepage: Sie können angeben, welche [Webseite](/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-page.html) die Startseite der Homepage ist.
* Startseite ist "Products": Wenn diese Option markiert ist, ist die Standard-Artikelgruppe die Startseite der Webseite.
* Titel-Präfix: Stellt den Browser-Titel ein.
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
Wählen Sie das Thema für Ihre Webseite aus. Sie können auch neue Themen für Ihre Webseite erstellen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Webseiten-Themen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/website-theme.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Webseiten-Themen" src="/docs/assets/img/website/website-theme.png">
* Wählen "Neues Webseiten-Thema erstellen" wenn Sie das Standars-Thema der Webseite anpassen wollen.
@@ -23,13 +23,13 @@
Hier können Sie ein Banner/Logo auf Ihrer Webseite hinzufügen. Hängen Sie das Bild an und klicken Sie auf "Banner aus Bild einrichten". Das System erstellt einen HTML-Kode unter Banner HTML.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Banner" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/banner.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Banner" src="/docs/assets/img/website/banner.png">
### Kopfleiste
Hier können Sie die Menüeinträge in der Kopfleiste einstellen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Kopfleiste" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/top-bar.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Kopfleiste" src="/docs/assets/img/website/top-bar.png">
* In ähnlicher Art und Weise können Sie auch die Verknüpfungen auf der Seitenleiste und in der Fußzeile einstellen.
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
Sie können Google Analytics und soziale Netzwerke in Ihre Webseite mit einbinden und Einträge auf der Webseite teilen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Einbindungen" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/integrations.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Einbindungen" src="/docs/assets/img/website/integrations.png">
* Sie können ein öffentliches Anmelden auf Ihr ERPNext-Konto unterbinden indem Sie auf "Anmelden deaktivieren" klicken.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-form.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-form.md
index 473f2c7..e8c9850 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-form.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-form.md
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
3. Geben Sie an, ob sich der Benutzer einloggen muss, Daten ändern muss, mehrere verschiedene Datensätze verwalten soll, etc.
4. Fügen Sie die Felder, die Sie in den Datensätzen haben wollen, hinzu.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Webformular" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/web-form.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Webformular" src="/docs/assets/img/website/web-form.png">
* * *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
Wenn Sie das Web-Formular erstellt haben, können Sie es unter der URL ansehen und ausprobieren!
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Webformular" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/web-form-view.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Webformular" src="/docs/assets/img/website/web-form-view.png">
* * *
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-page.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-page.md
index 91bd7d5..96f917f 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-page.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-page.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
> Webseite > Webseite > Neu
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Webseit" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/web-page.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Webseit" src="/docs/assets/img/website/web-page.png">
### Bezeichnung
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/contact.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/contact.md
index f87f82c..dcc8e17 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/contact.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/contact.md
@@ -18,12 +18,12 @@
> CRM > Contact > New
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Contact" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/contact.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Contact" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/contact.png">
Or you can add a Contact or Address directly from the Customer record, click on “New
Contact” or “New Address”.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Contact" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/contact-from-cust.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Contact" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/contact-from-cust.png">
> Tip: When you select a Customer in any transaction, one Contact and Address
gets pre-selected. This is the “Default Contact or Address”.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/crm_reports.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/crm_reports.md
index 3680bad..4ac90bb 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/crm_reports.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/crm_reports.md
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
###Lead Details
It has data about the leads and their contact and address details.
<img alt="Lead Details" class="screenshot"
- src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/report/lead.png">
+ src="/docs/assets/img/crm/report/lead.png">
###Sales Funnel
By using the sales funnel report, and by quantifying the number of prospects at each stage of the process, you can get an idea of your potential customers.
@@ -15,28 +15,28 @@
For example, if you notice that very few communications with the prospects has taken place in a month which might indicate a decrease in the sales. From the next month, organization should make sure that more communications has to take place with the prospects.
<img alt="Lead Details" class="screenshot"
- src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/report/sales_funnel.png">
+ src="/docs/assets/img/crm/report/sales_funnel.png">
###Prospects Engaged But Not Converted
Using this report, user gets the information about the leads who has shown interest in the business with you but due to some reason they were not converted into the customers.
<img alt="Lead Details" class="screenshot"
- src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/report/prospects_engaged_but_not_converted.png">
+ src="/docs/assets/img/crm/report/prospects_engaged_but_not_converted.png">
###Minutes to First Response for Opportunity
Immediacy is so important – and so valued
In this internet area, we all expect a quicker response time to any of our query. This report gives you the information about the first response time given to an opportunities or issues. Using this report, the organization can improve their first response time to the prospects which can help to the better sales in the future.
<img alt="Lead Details" class="screenshot"
- src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/report/minutes_to_first_response.png">
+ src="/docs/assets/img/crm/report/minutes_to_first_response.png">
###Customer Addresses And Contacts
It has data about the customers and their contact and address details.
<img alt="Lead Details" class="screenshot"
- src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/report/customer_address_and_contact.png">
+ src="/docs/assets/img/crm/report/customer_address_and_contact.png">
###Inactive Customers
This report shows the list of customers who has not purchased since long time.
<img alt="Lead Details" class="screenshot"
- src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/report/inactive_customers.png">
+ src="/docs/assets/img/crm/report/inactive_customers.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/customer.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/customer.md
index 41d26a3..5924665 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/customer.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/customer.md
@@ -11,20 +11,20 @@
> Selling > Customer
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Create Customer" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/create-customer.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Create Customer" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/create-customer.gif">
-or upload it via the [Data Import Tool]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.html).
+or upload it via the [Data Import Tool](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.html).
A Customer can avail the features (operations) in the selling process. The general flow can be summarised as:
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/customer-to selling-flowchart.jpeg">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/customer-to selling-flowchart.jpeg">
> Note: Customers are separate from Contacts and Addresses. A Customer can
have multiple Contacts and Addresses.
### Contacts and Addresses
-[Contacts and Addresses]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/CRM/contact.html) in ERPNext are stored separately so that you can
+[Contacts and Addresses](/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/contact.html) in ERPNext are stored separately so that you can
attach multiple Contacts or Addresses to Customers and Suppliers
Thus we may have identical Customer Names that are uniquely identified by the ID. Since the email address is not part of the
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
By default, the system does not generate an account for every customer. All
Customers can be booked in one account called Debtors. In order to manage a
separate account for each customer, you have to first create the account under
-Accounts Receivable in the [Chart of Accounts]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/chart-of-accounts.html) and then add it on the customer's
+Accounts Receivable in the [Chart of Accounts](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/chart-of-accounts.html) and then add it on the customer's
form accounts table.
### Customer Settings
@@ -62,12 +62,12 @@
“Credit Limit”. You can also set a global “Credit Limit” in the Company
master. Classifying Customers
-ERPNext allows you to group your Customers using [Customer Group]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/customer-group.html)
-and also divide them into [Territories]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/territory.html)
+ERPNext allows you to group your Customers using [Customer Group](/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/customer-group.html)
+and also divide them into [Territories](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/territory.html)
Grouping will help you get better analysis of your data and
identify which Customers are profitable and which are not. Territories will
help you set sales targets for the respective territories.
-You can also mention [Sales Person]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/sales-person.html) against a customer.
+You can also mention [Sales Person](/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/sales-person.html) against a customer.
### Sales Partner
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/lead.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/lead.md
index fab1ab6..15b1159 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/lead.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/lead.md
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
> CRM > Lead > New Lead
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lead" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/lead.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lead" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/lead.png">
ERPNext gives you a lot of options you may want to store about your Leads. For
example what is the source, how likely are they to give you business etc. If
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
further Opportunities from the same source can be created against this
Customer.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Create Customer" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/lead-to-customer.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Create Customer" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/lead-to-customer.gif">
---
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/newsletter.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/newsletter.md
index e41ba1f..2aac1b2 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/newsletter.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/newsletter.md
@@ -14,8 +14,8 @@
document before testing. A test email will be sent to your Email Address. You can
send the email to all the intended receipients by clicking on the send button.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Newsletter - New" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/newsletter-new.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Newsletter - New" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/newsletter-new.png">
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Newsletter - Test" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/newsletter-test.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Newsletter - Test" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/newsletter-test.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/opportunity.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/opportunity.md
index e1ffdbf..94338f9 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/opportunity.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/opportunity.md
@@ -9,17 +9,17 @@
#### Figure 1: Create Opportunity
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Opportunity" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/new-opportunity.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Opportunity" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/new-opportunity.gif">
You can also go to an “Open” Lead and select “Opportunity” from the **Make** dropdown.
#### Figure 2: Create Opportunity from an open Lead
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Opportunity" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/lead-to-opportunity.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Opportunity" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/lead-to-opportunity.png">
#### Figure 3: Create Opportunity for Customer to Collect their Requirement
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Opportunity" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/requirement-gathering.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Opportunity" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/requirement-gathering.png">
An Opportunity can also come from an existing Customer. You can create
multiple Opportunities against the same Lead. In Opportunity, apart from the
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@
#### Make Supplier Quotation
In some businesses, users collect the rates from their supplier against the customer requirement and based on the supplier rates they prepare the quotation for the customer. With ERPNext, you can make a supplier quotation from the opportunity itself.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Opportunity" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/make-sq-from-opportunity.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Opportunity" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/make-sq-from-opportunity.png">
> Best Practice: Leads and Opportunities are often referred as your “Sales
Pipeline” this is what you need to track if you want to be able to predict how
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/campaign.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/campaign.md
index 846f7d7..17b06f1 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/campaign.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/campaign.md
@@ -4,19 +4,19 @@
product or a service. This is done in a market segment of a particular
geographical area, to achieve specified objectives.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Campaign" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/campaign.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Campaign" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/campaign.png">
-You can track [Lead]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/CRM/lead.html), [Opportunity]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/CRM/opportunity.html), [Quotation]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/selling/quotation.html) against a campaign.
+You can track [Lead](/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/lead.html), [Opportunity](/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/opportunity.html), [Quotation](/docs/user/manual/en/selling/quotation.html) against a campaign.
###Track Leads against Campaign
* To track a 'Lead' against a campaign select 'View Leads'.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Campaign - View Leads" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/campaign-view-leads.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Campaign - View Leads" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/campaign-view-leads.png">
* You shall get a filtered list of all leads made against that campaign.
* You can also create new leads by clicking 'New'
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Campaign - New Lead" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/campaign-new-lead.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Campaign - New Lead" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/campaign-new-lead.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/customer-group.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/customer-group.md
index 8709ca2..628057a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/customer-group.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/customer-group.md
@@ -5,12 +5,12 @@
group. Typically Customers are grouped by market segment (that is usually
based on your domain).
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Group Tree" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/customer-group-tree.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Group Tree" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/customer-group-tree.png">
> Tip: If you think all this is too much effort, you can leave it at “Default
Customer Group”. But all this effort, will pay off when you start getting
reports. An example of a sample report is given below:
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Group report" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/sales-analytics-customer.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Group report" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/sales-analytics-customer.gif">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/sales-person.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/sales-person.md
index ce78388..b96020e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/sales-person.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/sales-person.md
@@ -5,12 +5,12 @@
individually. Again as in Territory, the target has to be set against Item
Group.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Person Tree" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/sales-person-tree.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Person Tree" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/sales-person-tree.png">
####Sales Person in Transactions
You can use this Sales Person in Customer and sales transactions like Sales Order, Delivery Note and Sales Invoice.
-Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions) to learn more
+Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions) to learn more
about how Sales Persons are used in the transactions of Sales Cycle.
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounting-entries.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounting-entries.md
index 23f115c..abd2322 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounting-entries.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounting-entries.md
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
* Mama (The Tea-stall owner) invests Rs 25000 to start the business.
-
+
__Analysis:__ Mama invested 25000 in company, hoping to get some profit. In other
words, company is liable to pay 25000 to Mama in the future. So, account
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
* The company needs equipments (Stove, teapot, cups etc) and raw materials (tea, sugar, milk etc) immediately. He decides to buy from the nearest general store "Super Bazaar" who is a friend so that he gets some credit. Equipments cost him 2800 and raw materials worth of 2200. He pays 2000 out of total cost 5000.
-
+
__Analysis:__ Equipments are "Fixed Assets" (because they have a long life) of the
company and raw materials "Current Assets" (since they are used for day-to-day
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
* Mama (who takes care of all entries) decides to book sales at the end of the every day, so that he can analyze daily sales. At the end of the very first day, the tea stall sells 325 cups of tea, which gives net sales of Rs. 1575. The owner happily books his first day sales.
-
+
__Analysis:__ Income has been booked in "Sales of Tea" account which has been
credited to increase the value and the same amount will be debited to "Cash"
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@
At the end of the month, the company paid the rent amount of stall (5000) and
salary of one employee (8000), who joined from the very first day.
-
+
### Booking Profit
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@
Sheet is not balanced i.e. Debit is not equal to Credit, the profit has not
yet been booked. To book profit, the following entry has to be made:
-
+
Explanation: Company's net sales and expenses are 40000 and 20000
respectively. So, company made a profit of 20000. To make the profit booking
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounting-reports.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounting-reports.md
index a71a26c..99d7029 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounting-reports.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounting-reports.md
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
done in that period for that Account.
<img alt="General Ledger" class="screenshot"
- src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/general-ledger.png">
+ src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/general-ledger.png">
### Trial Balance
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
* Credits
* Closing
-<img alt="Trial Balance" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/trial-balance.png">
+<img alt="Trial Balance" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/trial-balance.png">
The sum of all closing balances in a Trial Balance must be zero.
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
Suppliers. In this report, you will get your outstanding amounts period wise.
i.e. between 0-30 days, 30-60 days and so on.
-<img alt="Accounts Receivable" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/accounts-receivable.png">
+<img alt="Accounts Receivable" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/accounts-receivable.png">
### Sales and Purchase Register
@@ -40,6 +40,6 @@
invoice Item, you will get the amount of individual tax that has been paid,
based on the Taxes and Charges table.
-<img alt="Sales Register" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/sales-register.png">
+<img alt="Sales Register" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/sales-register.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
index 4ae0a5c..9627ff2 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
#### Figure 1 : Journal Entry -Advance Entry
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Advace Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/advance-payment-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Advace Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/advance-payment-1.png">
### Double Entry Accounting
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
#### Figure 2: Transaction and Difference Entry
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Advace Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/advance-payment-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Advace Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/advance-payment-2.png">
Save and submit the Journal Entry. If this document is not saved it will not be pulled in
other accounting documents.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
#### Figure 3: Receive Advance
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Advace Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/advance-payment-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Advace Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/advance-payment-3.png">
Save and submit the Sales Invoice.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/adjust-withhold-amount-payment-entry.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/adjust-withhold-amount-payment-entry.md
index ced5250..01f6ef5 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/adjust-withhold-amount-payment-entry.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/adjust-withhold-amount-payment-entry.md
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
Enter Payment Amount as 19,600.
-<img alt="Sales Invoice Payment Amount" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/withhold-1.png">
+<img alt="Sales Invoice Payment Amount" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/withhold-1.png">
#####Step 2.2: Allocate Against Sales Invoice
@@ -34,6 +34,6 @@
You can notice that there is a difference of 400 in the Payment Amount and the Amount Allocated against Sales Invoice. You can book this difference account under Withhold Account.
-<img alt="Deduction/Loss Account" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/withhold-2.gif">
+<img alt="Deduction/Loss Account" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/withhold-2.gif">
Following same steps, you can also manage difference availed due to Currency Exchange Gain/Loss.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/c-form.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/c-form.md
index 0169755..78d15ac 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/c-form.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/c-form.md
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
While creating Sales invoice for the customer, set C-Form applicability in Sales Invoice. In More Info section of Sales Invoice, set field called **Is C-Form Applicable** as **Yes**. Bydefault, this field will have No for a value.
-
+
Updating this field as Yes will allow you to pull this Sales Invoice in the C-Form Tool, and update C-Form No. as received from the Customer.
@@ -28,22 +28,22 @@
Enter details like C-Form No, Received Date, State and Amount etc. Select Customer and pull related Sales Invoices under provided table.
-
+
####Save & Submit C-Form
After entering details, save and submit C-Form record. On save system will generate C-Form record and on submission update that C-Form No. in the Sales Invoice.
-
+
C-Form serial no will be updated in related invoice under the field 'C-Form No'.
-
+
####Tracking Pending Invoice for C-Form
To track invoices for which C-Form has not yet been received from Customer, you can create custom report on Sales Invoice. In this report, you can filter invoices which doesn't have C-Form updated in them yet, and followup with the customer accordingly.
-
+
<!-- markdown -->
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/changing-parent-account.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/changing-parent-account.md
index 7f390d5..1b6c0fb 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/changing-parent-account.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/changing-parent-account.md
@@ -16,22 +16,22 @@
####2. Edit Account
-<img alt="Project Default Cost Center" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/change-parent-1.png">
+<img alt="Project Default Cost Center" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/change-parent-1.png">
####3. Change Parent Account
Search and select preferred Parent Account and save.
-<img alt="Project Default Cost Center" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/change-parent-2.png">
+<img alt="Project Default Cost Center" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/change-parent-2.png">
Refresh system from Help menu to experience the change.
-<img alt="Project Default Cost Center" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/change-parent-3.png">
+<img alt="Project Default Cost Center" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/change-parent-3.png">
<div class="well"> Note: Parent cannot be customized for the Root Accounts, like Asset, Liability, Income, Expense, Equity.</div>
#### Quick Help
-<img alt="Project Default Cost Center" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/change-parent-account-1.gif">
+<img alt="Project Default Cost Center" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/change-parent-account-1.gif">
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/difference-entry-button.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/difference-entry-button.md
index 2c26798..06a4479 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/difference-entry-button.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/difference-entry-button.md
@@ -4,13 +4,13 @@
As per accounting standards, debit in a accounting entry must be equal to credit. If not, system does allow submission of accounting transaction, thereby stops ledger posting. In ERPNext, on saving accounting entry, system validates if debit and credit is tallying.
-<img alt="Debit Credit Not Equal" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/difference-entry-1.png">
+<img alt="Debit Credit Not Equal" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/difference-entry-1.png">
To have entry balanced, you should one more row, select another account, and update different amount in it. Or you can add difference amount in one of the Account's row itself.
On clicking 'Make Difference Entry' button, new Row will be added under Journal Entry Accounts table, with difference amount. You can edit that row to select appropriate Account.
-<img alt="Debit Credit Not Equal" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/difference-entry-2.gif">
+<img alt="Debit Credit Not Equal" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/difference-entry-2.gif">
On selecting account under new row, debit and credit an entry will be tallying, and you should be able to submit Journal Entri correctly.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/fiscal-year-error.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/fiscal-year-error.md
index 003ad31..4a1b54b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/fiscal-year-error.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/fiscal-year-error.md
@@ -12,19 +12,19 @@
`Accounts > Setup > Fiscal Year`
-Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.html) to learn more about Fiscal Year.
+Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.html) to learn more about Fiscal Year.
#### Set Fiscal Year as Default
After Fiscal Year is saved, you will find option to set that Fiscal year as Default.
-<img alt="Debit Credit Not Equal" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/fiscal-year-error-1.png">
+<img alt="Debit Credit Not Equal" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/fiscal-year-error-1.png">
Default Fiscal Year will be updated in the Global Default setting as well. You can manually update Default Fiscal Year from:
`Setup > Settings > Global Default`
-<img alt="Debit Credit Not Equal" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/fiscal-year-error-2.png">
+<img alt="Debit Credit Not Equal" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/fiscal-year-error-2.png">
Save Global Default, and Reload your ERPNext account. Then, default Fiscal Year will be auto-updated in your transactions.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/freeze-accounting-entries.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/freeze-accounting-entries.md
index 768e3f2..677bb81 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/freeze-accounting-entries.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/freeze-accounting-entries.md
@@ -12,12 +12,12 @@
Set date in the **Accounts Frozen Upto** field.
-<img alt="Accounts Frozen Date" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/frozen-date-1.png">
+<img alt="Accounts Frozen Date" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/frozen-date-1.png">
Now, the system will not allow to make any accounting entries before set date. If at all someone tries creating entries, system will show error message as below.
-<img alt="Frozen Date Error" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/frozen-date-2.png">
+<img alt="Frozen Date Error" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/frozen-date-2.png">
You can still allow user with certain role to create/edit entries within accounts frozen date. You can set that Role in the Account Settings itself.
-<img alt="Frozen Date Error" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/frozen-date-3.png">
+<img alt="Frozen Date Error" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/frozen-date-3.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/how-to-freeze-accounting-ledger.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/how-to-freeze-accounting-ledger.md
index f7cb4e7..9ddee07 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/how-to-freeze-accounting-ledger.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/how-to-freeze-accounting-ledger.md
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
`Explore > Accounts > Chart of Accounts`
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Freeze Account" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/freeze-account-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Freeze Account" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/freeze-account-1.png">
Click on Account in which Frozen Date is to be updated.
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
In the Account form, you will find a field called **Frozen**. Set value in this field as 'Yes'
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Freeze Account" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/freeze-account-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Freeze Account" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/freeze-account-2.png">
####Step 3: Save
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/manage-foreign-exchange-difference.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/manage-foreign-exchange-difference.md
index a9a9fef..643636b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/manage-foreign-exchange-difference.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/manage-foreign-exchange-difference.md
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
To mange currency difference, create Account **Foreign Exchange Gain/Loss**. This account is generally created on the Expense side of P&L statement. However, you can place it under another group as per your accounting requirement.
-<img alt="Accounts Frozen Date" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/exchange-rate-difference-1.png">
+<img alt="Accounts Frozen Date" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/exchange-rate-difference-1.png">
#### Book Payment Entry
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
One receipt of payment, exchange rate changed. As per the new exchange rate, payment received in the base currency was $1080. This means gain of $80 due to change in exchange rate. Following is how Foreign Exchange Gain will be booked in this scenerio.
-<img alt="Accounts Frozen Date" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/exchange-rate-difference-2.gif">
+<img alt="Accounts Frozen Date" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/exchange-rate-difference-2.gif">
In case you incur loss due to change foriegn exchnage rate, then different amount about be updated in the debit of Foreign Exchange Gain/Loss account. Also you can add another row to update another expenses like bank charges, remittance charges etc.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/managing-transactions-in-multiple-currency.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/managing-transactions-in-multiple-currency.md
index 804bd4f..46b9e4e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/managing-transactions-in-multiple-currency.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/managing-transactions-in-multiple-currency.md
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
Currency Exchange between base currency and customer currency will auto-fetch.
-<img alt="Accounts Frozen Date" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/multiple-currency-1.gif">
+<img alt="Accounts Frozen Date" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/multiple-currency-1.gif">
#### Step 4: Update Details
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
Save Sales Invoice and then check Print Format. For all the Currency field (rate, amount, totals) Customer's Currency symbol will be updated as well.
-<img alt="Accounts Frozen Date" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/multiple-currency-2.png">
+<img alt="Accounts Frozen Date" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/multiple-currency-2.png">
#### Currency Exchange Masters
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/post-dated-cheque-entry.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/post-dated-cheque-entry.md
index 2b8f3d0..a2436f3 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/post-dated-cheque-entry.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/post-dated-cheque-entry.md
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
Assuming your Cheque Date is 31st December, 2016 (or any future date). As a result, this posting in your bank ledger will appear on Posting Date updated.
-<img alt="JE Posting Date" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/post-dated-1.png">
+<img alt="JE Posting Date" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/post-dated-1.png">
Note: Payment Entry Reference Date should equal to or less than Posting Date.
@@ -26,9 +26,9 @@
####Adjusting Post Dated Cheque Entry
-You can adjust Post Dated Payment Entry against an invoice via [Payment Reconciliation Tool]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.html).
+You can adjust Post Dated Payment Entry against an invoice via [Payment Reconciliation Tool](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.html).
-When cheque is cleared, i.e. on actual date on the cheque, you can update its Clearance Date via [Bank Reconciliation Tool]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.html).
+When cheque is cleared, i.e. on actual date on the cheque, you can update its Clearance Date via [Bank Reconciliation Tool](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.html).
In the Chart of Accounts, you might find value of this Payment Entry already reflecting against bank Account. You should check **Bank Reconciliation Statement**, a report in the account module to know difference of bank balance as per system, and actual balance in the bank's statement.
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/tracking-project-profitability-using-cost-center.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/tracking-project-profitability-using-cost-center.md
index 98d74e8..921a7fa 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/tracking-project-profitability-using-cost-center.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/tracking-project-profitability-using-cost-center.md
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
`Projects > Project > New`
-<img alt="Project Default Cost Center" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/project-cost-center-4.png">
+<img alt="Project Default Cost Center" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/project-cost-center-4.png">
#### 1.2 Create Cost Center
@@ -27,13 +27,13 @@
`Accounts > Setup > Cost Center`
-[Click here to learn how to manage Cost Centers.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/cost-center.html)
+[Click here to learn how to manage Cost Centers.](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/cost-center.html)
#### 1.3 Update Cost Center in the Project
Update Cost Center in the Project master.
-<img alt="Project Default Cost Center" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/project-cost-center-1.png">
+<img alt="Project Default Cost Center" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/project-cost-center-1.png">
In the sales and purchase transactions, if Project is selected, then Cost Center will fetched from the Project master.
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
In the sales transactions (which are Sales Order, Delivery Note and Sales Invoice), Project will be selected in the More Info section. On selection of a Project, respective Cost Center will be updated for all the items in that transaction. Cost Center will be updated on in the transactions which has Cost Center field.
-<img alt="Project Default Cost Center" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/project-cost-center-2.png">
+<img alt="Project Default Cost Center" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/project-cost-center-2.png">
#### 2.2 Project in the Purchase Transactions
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@
As per perpetual inventory valuation system, expense for the purchased item will be booked when raw-materials are consumed. On consumption of goods, if you are creating Material Issue (stock) entry, then Expense Cost (says Cost of Goods Sold) and Project's Cost Center should be updated in that entry.
-<img alt="Project Default Cost Center" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/project-cost-center-3.png">
+<img alt="Project Default Cost Center" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/project-cost-center-3.png">
### 3. Accounting Report for a Project
@@ -63,11 +63,11 @@
**Monthly Project Analysis**
-<img alt="Project Default Cost Center" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/project-cost-center-5.png">
+<img alt="Project Default Cost Center" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/project-cost-center-5.png">
**Overall Profitability**
-<img alt="Project Default Cost Center" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/project-cost-center-6.png">
+<img alt="Project Default Cost Center" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/project-cost-center-6.png">
#### 3.2 Projectwise Budgeting
@@ -77,6 +77,6 @@
`Accounts > Budget and Cost Center > Budget Variance Report`
-[Click here to learn how to do budgeting from Cost Center]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/budgeting.html).
+[Click here to learn how to do budgeting from Cost Center](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/budgeting.html).
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/update-stock-option-in-sales-invoice.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/update-stock-option-in-sales-invoice.md
index a7afdac..6fb7915 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/update-stock-option-in-sales-invoice.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/update-stock-option-in-sales-invoice.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
If you have items delivery and invoicing happening at the same time, you can create delivery from with Sales Invoice itself. Sales Invoice has field called **Update Stock**, just before Item table. If this field is checked, on submission of Sales Invoice, stock of Item will be deducted from selected Warehouse.
-<img alt="Update Stock" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/update-stock.png">
+<img alt="Update Stock" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/update-stock.png">
On checking Update Stock, Sales Invoice Item will show relevant fields like Warehouse, Serial No., Batch No., Item valuation etc.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/what-is-the-differences-of-total-and-valuation-in-tax-and-charges.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/what-is-the-differences-of-total-and-valuation-in-tax-and-charges.md
index 4ac70b4..0273f5c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/what-is-the-differences-of-total-and-valuation-in-tax-and-charges.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/what-is-the-differences-of-total-and-valuation-in-tax-and-charges.md
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
- Valuation
- Total and Valuation
-<img alt="Purchase Tax and Charges Categories" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/purchase-other-charges-1.png">
+<img alt="Purchase Tax and Charges Categories" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/purchase-other-charges-1.png">
Let's consider an example to understand an effect of each charge type. We purchase ten units of item, at the rate of 800. total purchase amount is 800. Purchased item has 4% VAT applied on it, and INR 100 was incurred in transportation.
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
Transportation charge of INR 100 should be categorized as valuation. With this, the value of purchased item will be increased from 800 to 900. Also, this charge will be not be added to the total of purchase transaction, because it your expense, and should not be reflected to the supplier.
-Check [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.html) to learn general posting done for expense categorized as Valuation.
+Check [here](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.html) to learn general posting done for expense categorized as Valuation.
####Total and Valuation:
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/bank-guarantee.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/bank-guarantee.md
index 9e0e766..c0c6d7a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/bank-guarantee.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/bank-guarantee.md
@@ -6,6 +6,6 @@
This document allows you to track Bank Guarantees given to clients. You can set Email Alerts as the Bank Guarantee expiry date approaches to remind yourself to get the Bank Guarantee back from your client.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Bank Guarantee" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/bank-guarantee.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Bank Guarantee" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/bank-guarantee.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/budgeting.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/budgeting.md
index 6602110..3e7db19 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/budgeting.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/budgeting.md
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
> Accounts > Budget and Cost Center > Chart of Cost Center > Add New Cost Center
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Budget" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/budgeting-cost-center.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Budget" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/budgeting-cost-center.png">
###Budgeting
@@ -30,20 +30,20 @@
In the Budgets table, select Income / Expense account for which Budget is to be defined.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Budget" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/budget-account.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Budget" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/budget-account.png">
####Step 4: Monthly Distribution
If you have seasonal business, you can also define a Monthly Distribution record, to distribute the budget between months. If you don't set the monthly distribution, ERPNext will calculate the budget on yearly
basis or in equal proportion for every month.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Monthly Distribution" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/monthly-budget-distribution.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Monthly Distribution" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/monthly-budget-distribution.png">
####Step 5: Alert on Budget
While setting budget, you can also define the actions when expenses will exceed the allocated budget for a period. You can set separate action for monthly and annual budgets. There are 3 types of actions: Stop, Warn and Ignore. If Stop, system will not allow to book expenses more than allocated budget. In Case of Warn, it will just warn the user that expenses has been exceeded from the allocated budget. And Ignore will do nothing.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Monthly Distribution" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/budget-warning.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Monthly Distribution" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/budget-warning.png">
####Budget Variance Report
@@ -53,6 +53,6 @@
Accounts > Budget and Cost Center > Budget Variance Report
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Budget Variance Report" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/budget-variance-report.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Budget Variance Report" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/budget-variance-report.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md
index 656db93..f2208b4 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md
@@ -27,13 +27,13 @@
An Example of various financial statement are given below:
#### Cash Flow Report
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Cash Flow Report" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/cash_flow_report.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Cash Flow Report" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/cash_flow_report.png">
#### Profit and Loss Report
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Profit and Loss Report" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/profit_n_loss_report.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Profit and Loss Report" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/profit_n_loss_report.png">
#### Balance Sheet Report
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Balance Sheet Report" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/balance_sheet_report.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Balance Sheet Report" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/balance_sheet_report.png">
To edit your Chart of Accounts in ERPNext go to:
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
Let us understand the main groups of the Chart of Accounts.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Chart of Accounts" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/chart-of-accounts-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Chart of Accounts" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/chart-of-accounts-1.png">
### Balance Sheet Accounts
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@
In ERPNext it is easy to create a Profit and Loss analysis chart. An example
of a Profit and Loss analysis chart is given below:
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Financial Analytics Profit and Loss Statement" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/financial-analytics-pl.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Financial Analytics Profit and Loss Statement" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/financial-analytics-pl.png">
(On the first day of the year you have not made any profit or loss, but you
still have assets, hence balance sheet accounts never become zero at the
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@
> Note: An Account “Ledger” is also sometimes called as Account “Head”.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Chart of Accounts" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/chart-of-accounts-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Chart of Accounts" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/chart-of-accounts-2.png">
### Other Account Types
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@
group under which you want to create the new Account. On the right side, you
will see an option to “Open” or “Add Child” a new Account.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Chart of Accounts" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/chart-of-accounts-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Chart of Accounts" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/chart-of-accounts-3.png">
Option to create will only appear if you click on a Group (folder) type
Account.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/credit-limit.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/credit-limit.md
index b95a430..8f92f90 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/credit-limit.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/credit-limit.md
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
#### Figure 1: Credit Limit
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Credit Limit" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/credit-limit-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Credit Limit" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/credit-limit-1.png">
Go to the 'More Info section' and enter the amount in the field Credit Limit.
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@
#### Figure 2: Credit Controller
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Credit Limit" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/credit-limit-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Credit Limit" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/credit-limit-2.png">
Save the changes.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/item-wise-taxation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/item-wise-taxation.md
index 85df285..a2aefc3 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/item-wise-taxation.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/item-wise-taxation.md
@@ -12,17 +12,17 @@
Here is the example of Item on which 12% GST is applied only.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/item-wise-tax.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/item-wise-tax.png">
For the item which is exempted from GST totally, mention 0% as tax rate in the Item master.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/exempted-item.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/exempted-item.png">
####Step 2: Setup Taxes and Other Charges
In Sales Taxes and Other Charges master, select GST 16% account and mention Tax Rate as 16. This tax rate will be applied on all the Items selected in the Sales Order, unless specific Tax Rate is defined in the Item master.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/tax-master.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/tax-master.png">
<div class="well">If you want to have tax rate always applied from the Item master, then you should update Rate for the tax account as zero in the Taxes and Charges master.</div>
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
In the Sales Order, we have selected many Items. For the items mentioned in blue, tax rate is applied based on tax rate mentioned in the taxes table. For the items highlited in red, tax rate has fetched for them from the respective item master.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/tax-calulation.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/tax-calulation.png">
Please note that item's tax rate will be pulled from the item master only if you have update same tax account (GST 16% in this case) in both Item master and tax master.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/journal-entry.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/journal-entry.md
index 8c9ee4a..ebfc9f5 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/journal-entry.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/journal-entry.md
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
> Accounts > Documents > Journal Entry > New
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Journal Entry" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/journal-entry.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Journal Entry" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/journal-entry.png">
In a Journal Entry, you must select.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/managing-fixed-assets.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/managing-fixed-assets.md
index 9ba8b7c..45bd227 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/managing-fixed-assets.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/managing-fixed-assets.md
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
Based on the type of assets, create Asset Category. For example, all your desktops and laptops can be part of an Asset Category named "Computers". Here you can set default depreciation method, periodicity and depreciation related accounts, which will be applicable to all the assets under the category.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Asset Category" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/asset-category.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Asset Category" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/asset-category.png">
> **Note:** You can also set default depreciation related Accounts and Cost Centers in Company master.
@@ -14,13 +14,13 @@
Asset master is the heart of fixed asset management feature. All the transactions related to Asset like purchasing, sales, depreciation, scrapping will be managed from the Asset master.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Asset" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/asset.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Asset" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/asset.png">
Explanation of the fields:
1. Item Code: An Item for the Asset must be a non-stock item, with "Is Asset" field checked.
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Asset Item" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/asset-item.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Asset Item" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/asset-item.png">
2. Asset Category: The category of assets it belongs to.
3. Is Existing Asset: Check if the asset is being carried forward from the previous Fiscal Year. The existing assets which are partially / fully depreciated can also be created/maintained for the future reference.
@@ -42,24 +42,24 @@
The system automatically creates a schedule for depreciation based on depreciation method and other related inputs in the Asset record.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Asset" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/depreciation-schedule.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Asset" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/depreciation-schedule.png">
On the scheduled date, system creates depreciation entry by creating a Journal Entry and the same Journal Entry is updated in the depreciation table for reference. Next Depreciation Date and Current Value are also updated on submission of depreciation entry.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Asset" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/depreciation-entry.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Asset" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/depreciation-entry.png">
In the depreciation entry, the "Accumulated Depreciation Account" is credited and "Depreciation Expense Account" is debited. The related accounts can be set in the Asset Category or Company.
For better visibility, net value of the asset on different depreciation dates are shown in a line graph.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Asset" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/asset-graph.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Asset" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/asset-graph.png">
## Purchase an Asset
For purchasing a new asset, create and submit the asset record with all the depreciation settings. Then create a Purchase Invoice via "Make Purchase Invoice" button. On clicking the button, system will load a new Purchase Invoice form with pre-loaded items table. It will also set proper fixed asset account (defined in the Asset Category) in the Expense Account field. You need to select Supplier and other necessary details and submit the Purchase Invoice.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Asset" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/asset-purchase-invoice.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Asset" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/asset-purchase-invoice.png">
On submission of the invoice, the "Fixed Asset Account" will be debited and payable account will be credited. It also updates purchase date, supplier and Purchase Invoice no. in the Asset master.
@@ -73,23 +73,23 @@
- "Accumulated Depreciation Account" will be debited by the total depreciated amount till now.
- "Gain/Loss Account on Asset Disposal" will be credited/debited based on gain/loss amount. The Gain/Loss account can be set in Company record.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Asset" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/asset-sales.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Asset" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/asset-sales.png">
## Scrap an Asset
You can scrap an asset anytime using the "Scrap Asset" button in the Asset record. The "Gain/Loss Account on Asset Disposal" mentioned in the Company is debited by the Current Value (After Depreciation) of the asset. After scrapping, you can also restore the asset using "Restore Asset" button.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Asset" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/scrap-journal-entry.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Asset" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/scrap-journal-entry.png">
## Asset Movement
The movement of the assets (from one warehouse to another) is also tracked via Asset Movement form.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Asset" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/asset-movement.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Asset" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/asset-movement.png">
There is also a dedicated button "Transfer Asset" inside the Asset form to track the Asset Movement.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Asset" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/asset-movement-using-button.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Asset" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/asset-movement-using-button.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md
index 6caff8a..598aa0e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md
@@ -6,15 +6,15 @@
To get started with multi-currency accounting, you need to assign accounting currency in Account record. You can define Currency from Chart of Accounts while creating Account.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Set Currency from Chart of Accounts" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/chart-of-accounts.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Set Currency from Chart of Accounts" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/chart-of-accounts.png">
You can also assign / modify the currency by opening specific Account record for existing Accounts.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Modify Account Currency" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/account.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Modify Account Currency" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/account.png">
For Customer / Supplier (Party), you can also define it's billing currency in the Party record. If the Party's accounting currency is different from Company Currency, you should mention Default Receivable / Payable Account in that currency.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Accounting Currency" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/customer.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Accounting Currency" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/customer.png">
Once you defined Currency in the Account and selected relevant accounts in the Party record , you are ready to make transactions against them. If Party account currency is different from Company Currency, system will restrict to make transaction for that party with that currency only. If account currency is same as Company Currency, you can make transactions for that Party in any currency. But accounting entries (GL Entries) will always be in Party Account Currency.
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
Outstanding Amount and Advance Amount will always be calculated and shown in Customer's Account Currency.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice Outstanding" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/sales-invoice.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice Outstanding" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/sales-invoice.png">
### Purchase Invoice
@@ -43,12 +43,12 @@
In Journal Entry, you can make transactions in different currencies. There is a checkbox "Multi Currency", to enable multi-currency entries. If "Multi Currency" option selected, you will be able to select accounts with different currencies.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Journal Entry Exchange Rate" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/journal-entry-multi-currency.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Journal Entry Exchange Rate" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/journal-entry-multi-currency.png">
In Accounts table, on selection of foreign currency account, system will show Currency section and fetch Account Currency and Exchange Rate automatically. You can change / modify the Exchange Rate later manually. Debit / Credit amount should be entered in Account Currency, system will calculate and show the Debit / Credit amount in Company Currency automatically.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Journal Entry in multi currency" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/journal-entry-row.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Journal Entry in multi currency" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/journal-entry-row.png">
#### Example 1: Payment Entry Against Customer With Alternate Currency
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@
Exchange Rate in the payment entry should always be same as invoice (60), even if exchange rate on the payment date is 62. The bank account will be credited by the amount considering exchange rate as 62. Hence, Exchnage Gain / Loss will be booked based on exchange rate difference.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Entry" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/payment-entry.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Entry" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/payment-entry.png">
#### Example 2: Inter-bank Transfer (USD -> INR)
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@
Suppose, Exchange Rate on the payment date is 62 and Bank Transfer Entry will be look like below:
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Inter Bank Transfer" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/bank-transfer.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Inter Bank Transfer" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/bank-transfer.png">
## Reports
@@ -111,12 +111,12 @@
In General Ledger, system shows debit / credit amount in both currency if filtered by an Account and Account Currency is different from Company Currency.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="General Ledger Report" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/general-ledger.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="General Ledger Report" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/general-ledger.png">
### Accounts Receivable / Payable
In Accounts Receivable / Payable report, system shows all the amounts in Party / Account Currency.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Accounts Receivable Report" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/accounts-receivable.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Accounts Receivable Report" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/multi-currency/accounts-receivable.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/opening-accounts.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/opening-accounts.md
index eb35eed..1ad9090 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/opening-accounts.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/opening-accounts.md
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
* List of outstanding sales and purchase invoices (Payables and Receivables).
-If you were using another accounting software before, firstly you should close financial statements in that software. The closing balance of the accounts should be updated as an opening balance in the ERPNext. Before starting to update opening balance, ensure that your [Chart of Accounts]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/chart-of-accounts.html) has all the Accounts required.
+If you were using another accounting software before, firstly you should close financial statements in that software. The closing balance of the accounts should be updated as an opening balance in the ERPNext. Before starting to update opening balance, ensure that your [Chart of Accounts](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/chart-of-accounts.html) has all the Accounts required.
> Opening entry is only for Balance Sheet accounts and not for the Accounts in the Profit and Loss statement.
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
If Entry Type is selected as Opening Entry, all the Balance Sheet Accounts will be auto-fetched in the Journal Entry.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/opening-account-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/opening-account-1.png">
####Step 3: Posting Date
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
For each Account, enter opening value in the Debit or Credit column. As per the double entry valuation system, Total Debit value in a entry must be equal to Total Credit value.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/opening-6.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/opening-6.png">
####Step 5: Is Opening
Set field `Is Opening` as `Yes`.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/opening-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/opening-3.png">
####Step 6: Save and Submit
@@ -58,13 +58,13 @@
If you are updating account opening balance in few accounts at a time, you can use **Temporary Opening** account for balancing purpose. In the standard chart of accounts, a Temporary Opening Account is auto-created under Assets.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/opening-7.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/opening-7.png">
In the Journal Entry, manually select an Account for which opening balance is to be updated. For each Account, enter opening balance value in the Debit or Credit column, based on it's Account Type (Asset or Liability).
For example, if you want to update balance in bank accounts, create Journal Entry as following.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/opening-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/opening-2.png">
Once all your invoices are entered, your **Temporary Opening** account will have a balance of zero!
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@
After completing the accounting entries, the trial balance report will look like the one given below:
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/opening-4.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/opening-4.png">
###Stock Opening
@@ -80,13 +80,13 @@
`Chart of Accounts > Assets > Current Asset > StocK Assets > (Warehouse Account)`
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/opening-5.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Opening Account" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/opening-5.png">
-To update stock opening balance, create [Stock Reconciliation entry]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/opening-stock.html). Based on the valuation of items's update in the Warehouse, balance will be updated in the Warehouse account.
+To update stock opening balance, create [Stock Reconciliation entry](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/opening-stock.html). Based on the valuation of items's update in the Warehouse, balance will be updated in the Warehouse account.
###Fixed Asset Opening
-Opening balance for the fixed asset account should be updated via Journal Entry. Assets which are not fully depreciated should be added in the [Asset master]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/managing-fixed-assets.html). For adding Assets in your possession, ensure to check **Is Existing Asset** field.
+Opening balance for the fixed asset account should be updated via Journal Entry. Assets which are not fully depreciated should be added in the [Asset master](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/managing-fixed-assets.html). For adding Assets in your possession, ensure to check **Is Existing Asset** field.
### Outstanding Invoices
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-entry.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-entry.md
index f97b8f3..a6dbde0 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-entry.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-entry.md
@@ -11,25 +11,25 @@
On submitting a document against which Payment Entry can be made, you will find Make Payment button.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-1.png">
####Step 2: Mode of Payment
In the Payment Entry, select Mode of Payment (eg: Bank, Cash, Wire Transfer). In the Mode of Payment master, default Account can be set. This default payment Account will fetch into Payment Entry.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Paymentt" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-2.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Paymentt" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-2.gif">
####Step 3: Payment Amount
Enter actual payment amount received from the Customer or paid to the Supplier.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-3.png">
####Step 4: Allocate Amount
If creating Payment Entry for the Customer, Payment Amount will be allocated against Sales Invoice.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-4.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-4.gif">
On the same lines, when creating Payment Entry for a Supplier, Payment Amount will be allocated against Purchase Invoice.
@@ -39,13 +39,13 @@
When making payment entry, there could be some difference in the actual payment amount and the invoice outstanding. This difference could be due to rounding error, or change in the currency exchange rate. You can set an Account here where this difference amount will be booked.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-5.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-5.gif">
####Step 6: Submit
Save and Submit Payment Entry. On submission, outstanding will be updated in the Invoices.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-8.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-8.png">
If payment entry was created against Sales Order or Purchase Order, field Advance Paid will be updated in them. when creating Payment invoice against those transactions, Payment Entry will auto-update in that Invoice, so that you can allocate invoice amount against advance payment entry.
@@ -61,13 +61,13 @@
###Multi Currency Payment Entry
-ERPNext allows you maintain accounts and invoicing in the [multiple currency]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.html). If invoice is made in the party currency, Currency Exchange Rate between companies base currency and party currency is also entered in the invoice. When creating Payment Entry against that invoice, you will again have to mention the Currency Exchange Rate at the time of payment.
+ERPNext allows you maintain accounts and invoicing in the [multiple currency](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.html). If invoice is made in the party currency, Currency Exchange Rate between companies base currency and party currency is also entered in the invoice. When creating Payment Entry against that invoice, you will again have to mention the Currency Exchange Rate at the time of payment.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-6.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-6.png">
Since Currency Exchange Rate is fluctuating all the time, it can lead to difference in the payment amount against invoice total. This difference amount can be booked in the Currency Exchange Gain/Loss Amount.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-7.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-7.png">
Payments can also be made independent of invoices by creating a new Payment Entry.
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@
3. Cash - Cash
4. Bank - Bank
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-9.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-9.png">
###Difference between Payment Entry and Journal Entry?
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-request.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-request.md
index a654611..7ee397e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-request.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-request.md
@@ -3,10 +3,10 @@
Payment Request is sent via Email and will contain a link to a Payment Gateway if setup. You can create payment request via Sales Order or Sales Invoice.
- Create Payment Request via Sales Order
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Request" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/pr-from-so.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Request" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/pr-from-so.png">
- Create payment Request via Sales Invoice
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Request" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/pr-from-si.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Request" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/pr-from-si.png">
---
@@ -15,16 +15,16 @@
Note: Invoice/Order currency and Payment Gateway Account currency should be same.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Request" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/pr-details-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Request" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/pr-details-1.png">
---
##### Notify Customer
You can notify customer from Payment Request with print format. If customer contact email is mentioned, it will automatically fetch email. If not so you can set Email Address on Payment Request.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Request" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/pr-details-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Request" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/pr-details-2.png">
##### Request Mail
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Request" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/pr-email.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Request" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/pr-email.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payments.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payments.md
index e0f8905..e2d8ade 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payments.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payments.md
@@ -18,13 +18,13 @@
On submitting a document against which Payment Entry can be made, you will find Make Payment button.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-1.png">
####Step 2: Payment Entry
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-9.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-9.png">
-For more details about payment entry [check here.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-entry)
+For more details about payment entry [check here.](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-entry)
## Journal Entry
@@ -34,19 +34,19 @@
Goto Accounts Settings > checked Make Payment via Journal Entry
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/account-settings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/account-settings.png">
####Step 2: Make Payment
On submitting a document against which Journal Entry can be made, you will find Make Payment button.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/payment-entry-1.png">
####Step 3: Journal Entry
Save and submit the journal entry to record the payament against the invoice
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/journal-entry.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Making Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/journal-entry.png">
-For more details about journal entry [check here.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/journal-entry)
+For more details about journal entry [check here.](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/journal-entry)
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/point-of-sale-pos-invoice.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/point-of-sale-pos-invoice.md
index 763c142..7458f0d 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/point-of-sale-pos-invoice.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/point-of-sale-pos-invoice.md
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
In ERPNext all Sales and Purchase transactions, like Sales Invoice, Quotation, Sales Order, Purchase Order etc. can be edited via the POS. There two steps to Setup POS:
1. Enable POS View via (Setup > Customize > Feature Setup)
-2. Create a [POS Profile]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/pos-setting.html) record
+2. Create a [POS Profile](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/pos-setting.html) record
#### Different sections of the POS
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@
In POS, user can select the existing customer during making an order or create the new customer. This features works in the offline mode also. User can also add the customer details like contact number, address details etc on the form. The customer which has been created from the POS will be synced when the internet connection is active.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Customer" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/pos-customer.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Customer" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/pos-customer.png">
### Adding an Item
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
**Barcode / Serial No** \- A Barcode / Serial No is an optical machine-readable representation of data relating to the object to which it is attached. Enter Barcode / Serial No in the box as shown in the image below and pause for a second, the item will be automatically added to the cart.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Item" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/pos-item.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Item" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/pos-item.png">
> Tip: To change the quantity of an Item, enter your desired quantity in the
quantity box. These are mostly used if the same Item is purchased in bulk.
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@
1. Select row in the cart and clik on delete button in the numeric keypad
-<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Item" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/pos_deleted_item.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Item" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/pos_deleted_item.gif">
2. Set Qty as zero to remove Item from the POS invoice. There are two ways to remove an Item.
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@
2. Select your “Mode of Payment”.
3. Click on “Pay” button to Save the document.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/pos-payment.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/pos-payment.png">
Submit the document to finalise the record. After the document is submitted,
you can either print or email it directly to the customer.
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@
Outstanding amount can be write off from the POS, user has to enter the amount under write off field on the payment screen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/write-off.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/write-off.png">
System books the write off amount into the ledger which has selected on the POS Profile.
@@ -86,12 +86,12 @@
POS calculate the extra amount paid by the customer, which user can return from the cash account. User has to set the account for the change amount on the POS profile.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/change-amount.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/change-amount.png">
### Offline Records
All the records from the POS stores into the browser's local storegae and sync submitted records after every minute of the interval if system is connected to internet. User can view the offline records by clicking on Menu > View Offline Records
-<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/offline-records.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/offline-records.png">
#### Accounting entries (GL Entry) for a Point of Sale:
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@
### Email
User can send email from the POS, after submission of an order, user has to click on menu > email
-<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/pos-email.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/pos-email.png">
After sync of an order, email sent to the customer with the print of the bill in the attachment
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/pricing-rule.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/pricing-rule.md
index 067b947..c2a273a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/pricing-rule.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/pricing-rule.md
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
####1.1 Applicable On:
-<img alt="Applicable On" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-on.png">
+<img alt="Applicable On" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-on.png">
If you want Pricing Rule to be applied on all the items, select based on Item Group. For value, select **All Item Group** (parent Item Group).
@@ -35,31 +35,31 @@
Applicability option will updated based on our selection for Selling or Buying or both. You can set applicability on one of the following master.
-<img alt="Applicable for" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-for.png">
+<img alt="Applicable for" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-for.png">
####1.3 Quantity:
Specify minimum and maximum qty of an item when this Pricing Rule should be applicable.
-<img alt="Applicable Qty" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-qty.png">
+<img alt="Applicable Qty" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-qty.png">
###2. Application:
Using Price List Rule, you can ultimately define price or %discount to be applied on an item.
-<img alt="Applicable" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-application.png">
+<img alt="Applicable" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-application.png">
####2.1 Price
Price or Discount specified in the Pricing Rule will be applied only if above applicability rules are matched with values in the transaction. Price mentioned in Pricing Rule will be given priority over item's Price List rate.
-<img alt="Applicable Price" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-price.png">
+<img alt="Applicable Price" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-price.png">
#### 2.2 Discount Percentage
Discount Percentage can be applied for a specific Price List. To have it applied for all the Price List, %Discount field should be left blank.
-<img alt="Discount" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-discount.png">
+<img alt="Discount" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-discount.png">
If %Discount is to be applied on all Price Lists, then leave Price List field blank.
@@ -67,19 +67,19 @@
Enter From and To date between which this Pricing Rule will be applicable. This will be useful if creating Pricing Rule for sales promotion exercise available for certain days.
-<img alt="Validity" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-validity.png">
+<img alt="Validity" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-validity.png">
#### Priority
If two or more Pricing Rules are found based on same conditions, Priority is applied. Priority is a number between 0 to 20 while default value is zero (blank). Higher number means it will take precedence if there are multiple Pricing Rules with same conditions.
-<img alt="Priority" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-priority.png">
+<img alt="Priority" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-priority.png">
#### Disable
Check to Disable Pricing Rule.
-<img alt="Disable" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-disable.png">
+<img alt="Disable" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-disable.png">
### Add Margin
@@ -91,21 +91,21 @@
Create price list for supllier and create item price against the price list.
-<img alt="Disable" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/price-list.png">
+<img alt="Disable" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/price-list.png">
####2. Make Pricing Rule
Create pricing rule for the item against which supplier rate has created
-<img alt="Disable" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-margin.png">
+<img alt="Disable" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-margin.png">
####2. Make Invoice
System apply the margin rate on the item price on selection of an item.
-<img alt="Disable" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-invoice.png">
+<img alt="Disable" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/pricing-rule-invoice.png">
-For more details about pricing rule [Click Here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/selling/articles/adding-margin.html)
+For more details about pricing rule [Click Here](/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/adding-margin.html)
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/purchase-invoice.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/purchase-invoice.md
index 8076bd8..c6b2050 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/purchase-invoice.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/purchase-invoice.md
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
You can also create a Purchase Invoice from:
> Accounts > Billing > Purchase Invoice > New Purchase Invoice
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/purchase-invoice.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/purchase-invoice.png">
The concept of “Posting Date” is again same as Sales Invoice. “Bill No” and
“Bill Date” helps to track the bill number as set by your Supplier for
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/recurring-orders-and-invoices.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/recurring-orders-and-invoices.md
index c0c75c2..067b633 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/recurring-orders-and-invoices.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/recurring-orders-and-invoices.md
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
Option to set document as recurring will be visible only after submission. Recurring is last section in document. Check **Is Recurring** to set document as recurring.
-<img alt="Recurring Invoice" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/recurring.gif">
+<img alt="Recurring Invoice" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/recurring.gif">
**From Date and To Date:** This defines contract period with the customer.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/sales-invoice.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/sales-invoice.md
index 94c681d..148c8eb 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/sales-invoice.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/sales-invoice.md
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
or you can Make a new Sales Invoice after you submit the Delivery Note.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/sales-invoice.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/sales-invoice.png">
#### Accounting Impact
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@
Also, if you check the **Update Stock** the stock will also update automatically,
without the need of a Delivery Note.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/pos-sales-invoice.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/pos-sales-invoice.png">
#### Billing Timesheet with Project
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@
Sales Invoice, select the Project for which the billing is to be made, and the
corresponding Timesheet entries for that Project will be fetched.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/billing-timesheet-sales-invoice.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/billing-timesheet-sales-invoice.png">
* * *
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/accounts-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/accounts-settings.md
index 4a88825..3bada56 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/accounts-settings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/accounts-settings.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
# Accounts Settings
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Account Settings" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/account-settings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Account Settings" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/account-settings.png">
* Accounts Frozen Upto: Freeze accounting transactions upto specified date, nobody can make / modify entry except specified role.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/cost-center.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/cost-center.md
index dfe4231..0eabce7 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/cost-center.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/cost-center.md
@@ -34,6 +34,6 @@
> Accounts > Setup > Chart of Cost Centers
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Cost Center" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/chart-of-cost-center.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Cost Center" src="/docs/assets/img/chart-of-cost-center.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.md
index e4c55ed..a211ee3 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.md
@@ -25,6 +25,6 @@
In case you have multiple companies sharing the same Fiscal Year, you can add
it into the grid as shown below.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Fiscal Year" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/fiscal-year.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Fiscal Year" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/fiscal-year.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/tax-rule.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/tax-rule.md
index 039c0b3..a7dee08 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/tax-rule.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/tax-rule.md
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
# Tax Rule
-You can define which [Tax Template]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html) must be applied on a Sales / Purchase transaction using Tax Rule.
+You can define which [Tax Template](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html) must be applied on a Sales / Purchase transaction using Tax Rule.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Tax Rule" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/tax-rule.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Tax Rule" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/tax-rule.png">
You can define Tax Rules for Sales or Purchase Taxes.
While making a Transaction the system will select and apply tax template based on the tax rule defined.
@@ -12,9 +12,9 @@
Suppose we define 2 Tax Rules as below.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Tax Rule" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/tax-rule-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Tax Rule" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/tax-rule-1.png">
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Tax Rule" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/tax-rule-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Tax Rule" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/tax-rule-2.png">
Here Tax Rule 1 has Billing Country as India and Tax Rule 2 has Billing Country as United Kingdom
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.md
index 2f0ebaa..77d27ef 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.md
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
####Bank Reconciliation Statement
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Bank Reconciliation statement" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/bank-reconciliation-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Bank Reconciliation statement" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/bank-reconciliation-2.png">
In the report, check whether the field 'Balance as per bank' matches the Bank Account Statement. If it is matching, it means that Clearance Date is correctly updated for all the bank entries. If there is a mismatch, Its because of bank entries for which Cleanrane Date is not yet updated.
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
__Step 4:__ Click on the JV from the table and update clearance date.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Bank Reconciliation" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/bank-reconciliation.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Bank Reconciliation" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/bank-reconciliation.png">
__Step 5:__ Click on the button 'Update Clearance Date'.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.md
index e7c888f..329d789 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.md
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
To cancel off some payments and invoices, select the Invoices and Journal Vouchers and click on “Reconcile”.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Reconciliation" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/payment-reconcile-tool.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Reconciliation" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/payment-reconcile-tool.png">
__Step 1:__ Select the Account against whom the payments need to be reconciled.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-tool.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-tool.md
index 3b3d6f7..32a539b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-tool.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-tool.md
@@ -13,14 +13,14 @@
6. Click on Get Outstanding Vouchers to fetch all the valid Vouchers, Invoices and Orders against which a payment can be made/received. These will appear in the Against Voucher section.
* __Note:__ In case User is paying a customer or receiving payment from a supplier, add the details regarding the relevant invoices and orders manually.
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Tool" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/payment-tool-1.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Tool" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/payment-tool-1.png">
7. Once details have been fetched, click on the detail entry and enter the payment amount made against that Invoice/Order/Voucher
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Tool" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/payment-tool-2.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Tool" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/payment-tool-2.png">
8. Click on 'Make Journal Entry' to generate a new Journal Entry with the relevant Party Details and Credit/Debit details filled in.
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Tool" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/payment-tool-3.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Tool" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/payment-tool-3.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md
index 6bc0f5a..e48055d 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
**Closing Fiscal Year** will be an year for which you are closing your financial statement.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Period Closing Voucher" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/period-closing-voucher.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Period Closing Voucher" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/period-closing-voucher.png">
This voucher will transfer Profit or Loss (availed from P&L statment) to Closing Account Head. You should select a liability account like Reserves and Surplus, or Capital Fund account as Closing Account.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/maintaining-suppliers-part-no-in-item.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/maintaining-suppliers-part-no-in-item.md
index 0296a77..db42fc3 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/maintaining-suppliers-part-no-in-item.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/maintaining-suppliers-part-no-in-item.md
@@ -8,15 +8,15 @@
In the Item master, under Supplier Details section, enter Item Code as given by the Supplier to this item.
-<img alt="Supplier Item Code" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/supplier-item-code.png">
+<img alt="Supplier Item Code" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/supplier-item-code.png">
#### 2. Supplier's Item Code in Transactions
-Each purchase transaction has field in the Item table where Supplier's Item Code is fetched. This field is hidden in form as well as in the Standard print format. You can make it visible by changing property for this field from [Customize Form.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/customize-form.html)
+Each purchase transaction has field in the Item table where Supplier's Item Code is fetched. This field is hidden in form as well as in the Standard print format. You can make it visible by changing property for this field from [Customize Form.](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/customize-form.html)
Supplier Item Code will only be fetched in the purchase transaction, if both Supplier and Item Code selected in purchase transaction is mapped with value mentioned in the Item master.
-<img alt="Supplier Item Code in transaction" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/supplier-item-code-in-purchase-order.png">
+<img alt="Supplier Item Code in transaction" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/supplier-item-code-in-purchase-order.png">
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/pull-items-in-purchase-order-based-on-supplier.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/pull-items-in-purchase-order-based-on-supplier.md
index 3caf48e..1e9c042 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/pull-items-in-purchase-order-based-on-supplier.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/pull-items-in-purchase-order-based-on-supplier.md
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
Update Default Supplier in the Item master.
-<img alt="Item Purchase UoM" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/for-supplier-2.png">
+<img alt="Item Purchase UoM" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/for-supplier-2.png">
####Step 2: New Purchase Order
@@ -24,13 +24,13 @@
From the options available to pull data in the Purchase Order, click on `For Supplier`.
-<img alt="Item Purchase UoM" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/for-supplier-1.gif">
+<img alt="Item Purchase UoM" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/for-supplier-1.gif">
####Step 4: Get Items
Select Supplier name and click on `Get`.
-<img alt="Item Purchase UoM" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/for-supplier-3.png">
+<img alt="Item Purchase UoM" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/for-supplier-3.png">
####Step 5: Edit Items
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/purchasing-in-different-unit.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/purchasing-in-different-unit.md
index db50543..2f8a673 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/purchasing-in-different-unit.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/purchasing-in-different-unit.md
@@ -17,28 +17,28 @@
In both the fields, default UoM of an item will be fetched by default. You should edit UoM field, and select Purchase UoM (Box in this case). Updating Purchase UoM is mainly for the reference of the supplier. In the print format, you will see item qty in the Purchase UoM.
-<img alt="Item Purchase UoM" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/editing-uom-in-po.gif">
+<img alt="Item Purchase UoM" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/editing-uom-in-po.gif">
#### Step 2: Update UoM Conversion Factors
In one Box, if you get 20 Nos. of Pen, UoM Conversion Factor would be 20.
-<img alt="Item Conversion Factor" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/po-conversion-factor.png">
+<img alt="Item Conversion Factor" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/po-conversion-factor.png">
Based on the Qty and Conversion Factor, qty will be calculated in the Stock UoM of an item. If you purchase just one Box, then Qty in the stock UoM will be set as 20.
-<img alt="Purchase Qty in Default UoM" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/po-qty-in-stock-uom.png">
+<img alt="Purchase Qty in Default UoM" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/po-qty-in-stock-uom.png">
### Stock Ledger Posting
Irrespective of the Purchase UoM selected, stock ledger posting will be done in the Default UoM of an item. Hence you should ensure that conversion factor is entered correctly while purchasing item in different UoM.
-<img alt="Print Format in Purchase UoM" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/po-stock-uom-ledger.png">
+<img alt="Print Format in Purchase UoM" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/po-stock-uom-ledger.png">
### Set Conversion Factor in Item
In the Item master, under Purchase section, you can list all the possible purchase UoM of an item, with its UoM Conversion Factor.
-<img alt="Purchase UoM master" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/item-purchase-uom-conversion.png">
+<img alt="Purchase UoM master" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/item-purchase-uom-conversion.png">
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/purchase-order.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/purchase-order.md
index 070b3a0..cdfd0f9 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/purchase-order.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/purchase-order.md
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
#### Purchase Order Flow Chart
-
+
In ERPNext, you can also make a Purchase Order directly by going to:
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
#### Create Purchase Order
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Order" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/purchase-order.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Order" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/purchase-order.png">
Entering a Purchase Order is very similar to a Purchase Request, additionally
you will have to set:
@@ -42,10 +42,10 @@
and what you pay to your Supplier. This is called Value Added Tax (VAT).
#### Add Taxes in Purchase Order
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Order" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/add_taxes_to_doc.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Order" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/add_taxes_to_doc.png">
#### Show Tax break-up
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Order" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/show_tax_breakup.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Order" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/show_tax_breakup.png">
For example you buy Items worth X and sell them for 1.3X. So your Customer
pays 1.3 times the tax you pay your Supplier. Since you have already paid tax
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@
#### Figure 3: Conversion of Purchase UOM to stock UOM
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Order - UOM" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/purchase-order-uom.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Order - UOM" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/purchase-order-uom.png">
__Step 4:__ Mention the UOM conversion factor. For example, (100);If one box has
100 pieces.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/purchase-taxes.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/purchase-taxes.md
index 448532f..b04949f 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/purchase-taxes.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/purchase-taxes.md
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
> Buying > Setup > Purchase Taxes and Charges Template > New Purchase Taxes and Charges
Master
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase taxes" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/purchase-taxes.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase taxes" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/purchase-taxes.png">
You can specify if the tax / charge is only for valuation (not a part of
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/request-for-quotation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/request-for-quotation.md
index 59bcad4..182c89d 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/request-for-quotation.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/request-for-quotation.md
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
> Buying > Documents > Request for Quotation > New Request for Quotation
-
+
After creation of request for quotation, there are two ways to generate supplier quotation from request for quotation.
@@ -14,41 +14,41 @@
__Step 1:__ Open request for quotation and click on make supplier quotation.
-
+
__Step 2:__ Select supplier and click on make supplier quotation.
-
+
__Step 3:__ System will open the supplier quotation, user has to enter the rate and submit it.
-
+
#### For Supplier
__Step 1:__ User has to create contact or enter Email Address against the supplier on request for quotation.
-
+
__Step 2:__ User has to click on send supplier emails button.
-
+
* If supplier's user not available: system will create supplier's user and send details to the supplier, supplier will need to click on the link(Password Update) present in the email. After password update supplier can access his portal with the request for quotation form.
-
+
* If supplier's user available: system will send request for quotation link to supplier, supplier has to login using his credentials to view request for quotation form on portal.
-
+
__Step 3:__ Supplier has to enter amount and notes(payment terms) on the form and click on submit
-
+
__Step 4:__ On submission, system will create supplier quotation(draft mode) against the supplier. User has to review the supplier quotation
and submit it.
More details:-
-
\ No newline at end of file
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/buying-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/buying-settings.md
index f1adf56..197a18e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/buying-settings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/buying-settings.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
Buying Settings is where you can define properties which will be applied in the Buying module's transactions.
-
+
Let us look at the various options that can be configured:
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
`Setup > Data > Naming Series`
-[Click here to know more about defining a Naming Series.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/naming-series.html)
+[Click here to know more about defining a Naming Series.](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/naming-series.html)
### 2. Default Supplier Type
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/supplier-type.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/supplier-type.md
index 5d80c1a..16d5445 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/supplier-type.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/supplier-type.md
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
> Buying > Setup > Supplier Type > New Supplier Type
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Supplier Type" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/supplier-type.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Supplier Type" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/supplier-type.png">
You can classify your suppliers from a range of choice available in ERPNext.
Choose from a set of given options like Distributor, Electrical,Hardware,
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier-quotation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier-quotation.md
index 4dabeba..5935477 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier-quotation.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier-quotation.md
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
#### Supplier Quotation Flow-Chart
-
+
You can also make a Supplier Quotation directly from:
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
#### Create Supplier Quotation
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Supplier Quotation" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/supplier-quotation.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Supplier Quotation" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/supplier-quotation.png">
If you have multiple Suppliers who supply you with the same Item, you
usually send out a message (Request for Quote) to various Suppliers. In
@@ -37,10 +37,10 @@
You can select relevant tax by going to "Taxes and Charges" section and adding an entry to the table as shown below,
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Supplier Quotation" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/add_taxes_to_doc.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Supplier Quotation" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/add_taxes_to_doc.png">
Besides, in case of multiple items you can keep track of taxes on each by clicking "Show tax break-up"
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Supplier Quotation" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/show_tax_breakup.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Supplier Quotation" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/show_tax_breakup.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier-scorecard.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier-scorecard.md
index ad4ce49..eb33030 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier-scorecard.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier-scorecard.md
@@ -14,24 +14,24 @@
### Create Supplier Scorecard
A supplier scorecard is created for each supplier individually. Only one supplier scorecard can be created for each
supplier.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Order" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/supplier-scorecard.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Order" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/supplier-scorecard.png">
#### Final Score and Standings
The supplier scorecard consists of a set evaluation periods, during which the performance of a supplier is
evaluated. This period can be daily, monthly or yearly. The current score is calculated from the score of each evaluation
period based on the weighting function. The default formula is linearly weight over the previous 12 scoring periods.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Order" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/supplier-scorecard-weighing.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Order" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/supplier-scorecard-weighing.png">
This formula is customizable.
The supplier standing is used to quickly sort suppliers based on their performance. These are customizable for each supplier.
The scorecard standing of a supplier can also be used to restrict suppliers from being included in Request for Quotations or
being issued Purchase Orders.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Order" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/supplier-scorecard-standing.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Order" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/supplier-scorecard-standing.png">
#### Evaluation Criteria and Variables
A supplier can be evaluated on several individual evaluation criteria, including (but not limited to) quotation response time,
delivered item quality, and delivery timeliness. These criteria are weighed to determine the final period score.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Order" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/supplier-scorecard-criteria.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Order" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/supplier-scorecard-criteria.png">
The method for calculating each criteria is determined through the criteria formula field, which can use a number of pre-established variables.
The value of each of these variables is calculated over the scoring period for each supplier. Examples of such variables include:
- The total number of items received from the supplier
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier.md
index 7ff645f..217d8b7 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier.md
@@ -6,13 +6,13 @@
`Explore > Supplier > New Supplier`
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Supplier Master" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/supplier-master.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Supplier Master" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/supplier-master.png">
### Contacts and Addresses
Contacts and Addresses in ERPNext are stored separately so that you can create multiple Contacts and Addresses for a Suppliers. Once Supplier is saved, you will find option to create Contact and Address for that Supplier.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Supplier Master" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/supplier-new-address-contact.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Supplier Master" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/supplier-new-address-contact.png">
> Tip: When you select a Supplier in any transaction, Contact for which "Is Primary" field id checked, it will auto-fetch with the Supplier details.
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
If you want to customize payable account for the Supplier, you should first add a payable Account in the Chart of Account, and then select that Payable Account in the Supplier master.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Supplier Master" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/supplier-payable-account.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Supplier Master" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/supplier-payable-account.png">
If you don't want to customize payable account, and proceed with default payable account "Creditor", then do not update any value in the Default Supplier Account's table.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/customer-orders-invoices-and-shipping-status.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/customer-orders-invoices-and-shipping-status.md
index 7fc9862..6facabf 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/customer-orders-invoices-and-shipping-status.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/customer-orders-invoices-and-shipping-status.md
@@ -2,18 +2,18 @@
ERPNext Web Portal gives your customers quick access to their Orders, Invoices and Shipments Customers can check the status of their orders, invoices, and shipping status by logging on to the web.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Portal" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/portal-menu.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Portal" src="/docs/assets/img/website/portal-menu.png">
Once an order is raised, either using the Shopping Cart or from within ERPNext, your customer can view the order and keep an eye on the billing and shipment status. When the invoice and payment against these orders are submitted, the customer can see the updated status on the portal, at a glance.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Portal" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/website-login.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Portal" src="/docs/assets/img/website/website-login.png">
#### Outstanding Sales Invoice
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Portal" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/invoice-unpaid.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Portal" src="/docs/assets/img/website/invoice-unpaid.png">
#### Paid Sales Invoice
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Portal" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/invoice-paid.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Customer Portal" src="/docs/assets/img/website/invoice-paid.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/issues.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/issues.md
index dc83ff6..17b74e4 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/issues.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/issues.md
@@ -7,18 +7,18 @@
#### Empty Issue List
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Issue List" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/portal-ticket-list-empty.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Issue List" src="/docs/assets/img/website/portal-ticket-list-empty.png">
#### New Issue
-<img class="screenshot" alt="New Issue " src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/portal-new-ticket.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="New Issue " src="/docs/assets/img/website/portal-new-ticket.png">
#### Open Issue
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Issue Raised" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/portal-ticket-1.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Issue Raised" src="/docs/assets/img/website/portal-ticket-1.gif">
#### Reply on Issue
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Issue reply" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/portal-ticket-reply.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Issue reply" src="/docs/assets/img/website/portal-ticket-reply.gif">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/portal-login.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/portal-login.md
index 9065968..efa70a2 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/portal-login.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/portal-login.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
To login into the customer account, the customer has to use his Email Address and
the password sent by ERPNext; generated through the sign-up process.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Website User Signup" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/website-login.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Website User Signup" src="/docs/assets/img/website/website-login.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/sign-up.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/sign-up.md
index aed8057..36e1b2c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/sign-up.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/sign-up.md
@@ -6,11 +6,11 @@
On the Login Page, you will find option to Signup.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Website User Signup" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/website-login.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Website User Signup" src="/docs/assets/img/website/website-login.png">
#### Step 2: Enter Customer Name and ID
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Website User Signup" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/website-signup-details.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Website User Signup" src="/docs/assets/img/website/website-signup-details.png">
After the sign up process, an email will be sent to the customers Email Address with the password details.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/allow-fields-to-be-changed-after-submit.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/allow-fields-to-be-changed-after-submit.md
index 4edecdf..42b0fc6 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/allow-fields-to-be-changed-after-submit.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/allow-fields-to-be-changed-after-submit.md
@@ -14,17 +14,17 @@
In Customize Form, select Document Type (Quotation, Sales Order, Purchase Invoice Item etc.)
-<img alt="select docytpe" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/allow-on-submit-1.png">
+<img alt="select docytpe" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/allow-on-submit-1.png">
#### Step 3: Edit Field Property
In the fields section, click on the Custom field and check the **Allow On Submit**.
-<img alt="Check Allow on Submit" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/allow-on-submit-2.png">
+<img alt="Check Allow on Submit" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/allow-on-submit-2.png">
#### Step 3: Update Customize Form
-<img alt="Update" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/allow-on-submit-3.png">
+<img alt="Update" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/allow-on-submit-3.png">
After updating Customize Form, you should reload your ERPNext account. Then check form, and field to confirm its editable in submitted form as well.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/creating-custom-link-field.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/creating-custom-link-field.md
index d10a160..21cc433 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/creating-custom-link-field.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/creating-custom-link-field.md
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
In Customize Form, select Document Type (Quotation, Sales Order, Purchase Invoice Item etc.). Once field are updated in table, open field before which you wish to insert Custom Field. Then click on "Insert Above" to insert new Custom Field.
-<img alt="Select Docytpe" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/link-field-1.gif">
+<img alt="Select Docytpe" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/link-field-1.gif">
####Step 4: Custom Field Values
@@ -26,6 +26,6 @@
1. Name: Desired name for the field
1. Options: Enter the name of the Doctype to which the field is linked
-<img alt="Enter Values" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/link-field-2.png">
+<img alt="Enter Values" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/link-field-2.png">
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/customizing-sorting-order-in-the-list-view.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/customizing-sorting-order-in-the-list-view.md
index e06a64e..a842085 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/customizing-sorting-order-in-the-list-view.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/customizing-sorting-order-in-the-list-view.md
@@ -14,13 +14,13 @@
Select document type for which Sort Order is to be customized.
-<img alt="Sort Order field" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/sort-order-2.png">
+<img alt="Sort Order field" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/sort-order-2.png">
####Step 3: Update Sort Details
In the Customize Form, you will find these fields.
-<img alt="Sort Order field" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/sort-order-1.png">
+<img alt="Sort Order field" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/sort-order-1.png">
1. Sort Field: Select field based on which sorting will be done. It will be "Item_Code" field in scenario.
2. Sort Order: Sort Order will be two possible options, **Asc** for ascending, and **Desc** for descending.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/deleting-custom-reports.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/deleting-custom-reports.md
index 426fab9..9d3c0e1 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/deleting-custom-reports.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/deleting-custom-reports.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
#Deleting Custom Reports
-ERPNext has several [types of reports]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/making-custom-reports-in-erpnext) which can be customize as per the companies/users requirement.
+ERPNext has several [types of reports](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/making-custom-reports-in-erpnext) which can be customize as per the companies/users requirement.
If there is a report custom report which needs to be deleted, it can be achieved by following steps. Please note that its applicable only for the Custom Reports, and not for the standard reports.
@@ -10,16 +10,16 @@
In the Awesome Bar, type and select "Report List" for an option.
-<img alt="Report Search" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/delete-report-1.png">
+<img alt="Report Search" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/delete-report-1.png">
####Selecting and Deleting Report
The Report List will have all the standard and custom reports of your account. You can select Custom Report to be deleted from the list itself, and click on Delete icon.
-<img alt="Report List" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/delete-report-2.png">
+<img alt="Report List" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/delete-report-2.png">
Or you can open that report, and delete it from File menu option.
-<img alt="Report Delete" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/delete-report-3.png">
+<img alt="Report Delete" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/delete-report-3.png">
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/disable-rounded-total.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/disable-rounded-total.md
index 8fcd902..ffcb376 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/disable-rounded-total.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/disable-rounded-total.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
All the sales transactions like Sales Order, Sales Invoice has Rounded Total in it. It calculated based on the value of Grand Total. Also Rounded Total is also visible in the Standard Print Formats.
-<img alt="Print Preview" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/hide-rounded-total-1.png">
+<img alt="Print Preview" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/hide-rounded-total-1.png">
Follow steps given below to hide rounded total from Standard Print Formats, for all the sales transactions.
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
Check Disable Rounded Total, and Save Global Defaults.
-<img alt="Print Preview" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/hide-rounded-total-2.png">
+<img alt="Print Preview" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/hide-rounded-total-2.png">
For system to take effect of this setting, you should clear cache and refresh your ERPNext account. Then your print formats shall not render value for the Rounded Total in the print formats.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types.md
index 3e2de7b..9d239c4 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types.md
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@
- Dynamic Link
-Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/managing-dynamic-link-fields.html) to learn how Dynamic Link Field function.
+Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/managing-dynamic-link-fields.html) to learn how Dynamic Link Field function.
- Float
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/increase-max-attachments.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/increase-max-attachments.md
index 180fd56..b3f9a98 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/increase-max-attachments.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/increase-max-attachments.md
@@ -12,13 +12,13 @@
#### Step 2: Select Document Type
-<img alt="Select Doctype" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/max-attachment-1.png">
+<img alt="Select Doctype" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/max-attachment-1.png">
#### Step 3: Set Limit
Set Maximum Attachments as five.
-<img alt="Set Max Attachment" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/max-attachment-2.png">
+<img alt="Set Max Attachment" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/max-attachment-2.png">
After update Max Attachments, Update Customization Form. Reload your ERPNext account and then check specific Quotation to confirm if Max Attachment limit is applied.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/make-field-visible-in-print-format.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/make-field-visible-in-print-format.md
index bee9155..5abd291 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/make-field-visible-in-print-format.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/make-field-visible-in-print-format.md
@@ -16,13 +16,13 @@
As per our scenario, Sales Order will be selected as Document Type.
field-visible-2.gif
-<img alt="Document Type" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/print-visible-1.png">
+<img alt="Document Type" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/print-visible-1.png">
#### Step 3: Uncheck Print Hide
click to open field to be made visible in the Standard Print Format. Uncheck **Print Hide** field.
-<img alt="Uncheck Print Hide " class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/print-visible-2.gif">
+<img alt="Uncheck Print Hide " class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/print-visible-2.gif">
#### Step 4: Update
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/managing-dynamic-link-fields.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/managing-dynamic-link-fields.md
index 1bb5424..f3621a5 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/managing-dynamic-link-fields.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/managing-dynamic-link-fields.md
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
Firstly we will create a link field which will be linked to the Doctype.
-<img alt="Custom Link Field" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/dynamic-field-1.gif">
+<img alt="Custom Link Field" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/dynamic-field-1.gif">
By **Doctype** mentioned in the Option field, we mean parent Doctype. So, just like Quotation is one Doctype, which has multiple Quotation under it. Same way, Doctype is also a Doctype which has Sales Order, Purchase Order and other doctypes created as Doctype records.
@@ -29,17 +29,17 @@
So linking this field with parent Doctype will list all the Doctype records.
-<img alt="journal Voucher Link Field" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/dynamic-field-2.png">
+<img alt="journal Voucher Link Field" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/dynamic-field-2.png">
#### Step 2: Insert Dynamic Link Field
This custom field's type will be "Dynamic Link". In the Option field, name of Doctype link field will be mentioned.
-<img alt="Custom Dynamic Field" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/dynamic-field-3.gif">
+<img alt="Custom Dynamic Field" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/dynamic-field-3.gif">
This field will allow selecting document id, based on value selected in the Doctype link field. For example, if we select Sales Order in the prior field, Dynamic Link field will list all the Sales Orders ids.
-<img alt="Custom Dynamic Field" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/dynamic-field-4.gif">
+<img alt="Custom Dynamic Field" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/dynamic-field-4.gif">
<div class="well">
**Customizing options in the Doctype Link field**
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/module-visibility.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/module-visibility.md
index d7ff2cd..41765ab 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/module-visibility.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/module-visibility.md
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
If module is hidden in-spite of assignment of required Role, then you should check if Website is not disabled from All Application.
-<img alt="All Applications" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/module-visibility-1.gif">
+<img alt="All Applications" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/module-visibility-1.gif">
If Website is checked in All Application, but still not visible for the User, check if is hidden by System Manager. In the Setup module, feature called Show/Hide Modules allows System Manager to hide specific module from all the Users.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/perm-level-error-in-permission-manager.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/perm-level-error-in-permission-manager.md
index 84b9e27..8c099cc 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/perm-level-error-in-permission-manager.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/perm-level-error-in-permission-manager.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
#Perm Level Error in Permission Manager
-While customizing rules in the [Permission Manager]({{docs_base_url}}/user/erpnext/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions), you might receive an error message saying:
+While customizing rules in the [Permission Manager](/docs/user/erpnext/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions), you might receive an error message saying:
`For System Manager _(or other role)_ at level 2 _(or other level)_ in Customer _(or other document)_ in row 8: Permission at level 0 must be set before higher levels are set.`
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/search-record-by-specific-field.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/search-record-by-specific-field.md
index 7b6c81b..b5aa07c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/search-record-by-specific-field.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/search-record-by-specific-field.md
@@ -18,12 +18,12 @@
Update Warehouse field name in the Search By field.
-<img alt="Search By in Customize Form" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/search-by-1.png">
+<img alt="Search By in Customize Form" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/search-by-1.png">
#### Searching in Another Record.
While creating transaction, to get filtered result for Customer, you should firstly click on search magnifier.
-<img alt="Search By in Customize Form" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/search-by-2.png">
+<img alt="Search By in Customize Form" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/search-by-2.png">
<!-- markdown -->
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/set-language.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/set-language.md
index 48f5b64..f3204dc 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/set-language.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/set-language.md
@@ -10,13 +10,13 @@
#### 1.1 Go to My Setting
-<img alt="My Setting" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/change-language-1.png">
+<img alt="My Setting" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/change-language-1.png">
#### 1.2 Select Language
-<img alt="Select Language" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/change-language-2.png">
+<img alt="Select Language" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/change-language-2.png">
-<img alt="Select Language" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/set-language-1.gif">
+<img alt="Select Language" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/set-language-1.gif">
#### 1.3 Save User
@@ -32,13 +32,13 @@
#### Set Language
-<img alt="Global Language" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/change-language-3.png">
+<img alt="Global Language" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/change-language-3.png">
#### Save
Save System Settings, and refresh your EPRNext account. On refreshing, you should language in your ERPNext account changed as per your preference.
-<img alt="Select Language" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/set-language-2.gif">
+<img alt="Select Language" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/set-language-2.gif">
Note: For now, we have translation available only for few languages. You can contribute to make translation better, and add new languages from [here](https://translate.erpnext.com).
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/set-precision.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/set-precision.md
index 088f147..67899e0 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/set-precision.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/set-precision.md
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
`Setup > Settings > System Settings`.
-<img alt="Global Precision" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/precision-1.png">
+<img alt="Global Precision" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/precision-1.png">
You can also set field specific precision. To do that go to `Setup > Customize > Customize Form` and select the DocType there. Then go to the specific field row and change precision. Precision field is only visible if field-type is one of the Float, Currency and Percent.
-<img alt="Field-wise Precision" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/precision-2.png">
+<img alt="Field-wise Precision" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/precision-2.png">
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/user-restriction.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/user-restriction.md
index 5868141..29eef88 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/user-restriction.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/user-restriction.md
@@ -10,10 +10,10 @@
Select Document Type for which you want to set user permission. After permissions are loaded for selected document, scroll to role for which you want to set restriction.
-<img alt="Sales Order" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/owner-restriction-1.png">
+<img alt="Sales Order" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/owner-restriction-1.png">
#### Step 3: Apply User Permission
For Role to be restricted (Sales User in this case), check "If Owner".
-<img alt="S" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/owner-restriction-2.png">
+<img alt="S" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/owner-restriction-2.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-doctype.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-doctype.md
index ccdc5f2..33a5857 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-doctype.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-doctype.md
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
not be able to re-produce.
1. Custom?: This field will be checked by default when adding Custom Doctype.
-<img alt="Doctype Basic" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/customize/doctype-basics.png">
+<img alt="Doctype Basic" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/customize/doctype-basics.png">
#### Fields
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
1. Actions (button)
1. Attachments or Images
-<img alt="Doc fields" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/customize/doctype-all-fields.png">
+<img alt="Doc fields" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/customize/doctype-all-fields.png">
When you add fields, you need to enter the **Type**. **Label** is optional for Section Break and Column Break. **Name** (`fieldname`) is the name of the database table column.
@@ -46,19 +46,19 @@
In this section, you can define criteria based on which document for this doctype will be named. There are multiple criterion based on which document can be named, like naming based on the value in the specific field, or based on Naming Series, or based on value provided by the user in the prompt, which will be shown when saving document. In the following example, we are doing naming based on the value in the field **book_name**.
-<img alt="Doctype Naming" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/customize/doctype-field-naming.png">
+<img alt="Doctype Naming" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/customize/doctype-field-naming.png">
#### Permission
In this table, you should select roles and define permission roles for them for this Doctype.
-<img alt="Doctype Permissions" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/customize/doctype-permissions.png">
+<img alt="Doctype Permissions" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/customize/doctype-permissions.png">
#### Save DocType
On saving doctype, you will get pop-up to provide name for this Doctype.
-<img alt="Doctype Save" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/customize/doctype-save.png">
+<img alt="Doctype Save" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/customize/doctype-save.png">
#### DocType in System
@@ -67,12 +67,12 @@
`Human Resource > Document > Book`
-<img alt="Doctype List" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/customize/doctype-list-view.png">
+<img alt="Doctype List" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/customize/doctype-list-view.png">
#### Book master
Using the fields entered, following is the master one book.
-<img alt="Doctype Form" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/customize/doctype-book-added.png">
+<img alt="Doctype Form" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/customize/doctype-book-added.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-field.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-field.md
index 4926717..2c11e0d 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-field.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-field.md
@@ -14,37 +14,37 @@
In the Customize Form, select Document Type in which you want to insert Custom Field. Let's assume we are inserting Custom Field in the Employee master.
-<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/custom-field-1.gif">
+<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/custom-field-1.gif">
#### Insert Row for the Custom Field
In Customize Form, open the field above which you want to insert a Custom Field. Click on Insert Above.
-<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/custom-field-2.gif">
+<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/custom-field-2.gif">
####Set Field Label
Custom Field's name will be set based on its Label. If you want to create Custom Field with specific name, but with different label, then you should first set Label as you want Field Name to be set. After Custom Field is saved, you can edit the Field Label again.
-<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/custom-field-3.png">
+<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/custom-field-3.png">
####Select Field Type
There are various types of Field like Data, Date, Link, Select, Text and so on. Select Field Type for the Custom Field.
-<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/custom-field-4.png">
+<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/custom-field-4.png">
-Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types.html) to learn more about types of field you can set for your Custom Field.
+Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types.html) to learn more about types of field you can set for your Custom Field.
####Set Option
Based on the Field Type, value will be entered in the Options field.
-If you are creating a Link field, then in the Options, enter Doctype name with which this field will be linked. Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/creating-custom-link-field.html) to learn more about creating custom link field.
+If you are creating a Link field, then in the Options, enter Doctype name with which this field will be linked. Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/creating-custom-link-field.html) to learn more about creating custom link field.
If field type is set as Select (drop down field), then all he possible result for this field should be listed in the Options field. Each possible result should be separate by row.
-<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/custom-field-5.png">
+<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/custom-field-5.png">
For Data field, Option can be set to "Email" or "Phone" and the field will be validated accordingly.
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@
After inserting required details for the Custom Field, Update Customize Form. On update, Custom Field will be inserting in the form, Employee master in this case. Before checking Employee form, reload your ERPNext account. After reload, check Employee form to see Custom Field in a form.
-<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/custom-field-6.png">
+<img alt="Select Document Type" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/custom-field-6.png">
####Deleting Custom Field
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.md
index 1e21e4a..f5519c2 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.md
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
`Setup > Customization > Custom Script`
-<img alt="Custom Script" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/custom-script-1.png">
+<img alt="Custom Script" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/custom-script-1.png">
### Topics
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/customize-form.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/customize-form.md
index c91ec39..5f590bb 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/customize-form.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/customize-form.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
<!--markdown-->
Before we venture to learn form customization tool, click [here](https://frappe.io/docs/user/en/tutorial/doctypes.html) to understand the architecture of forms in ERPNext. It shall help you in using Customize Form tool more efficiently.
-Customize Form is the tool which allows user to customize property of the standard fields, and insert [custom fields]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-field.html) as per the requirement. Let's assume we need to set Project Name field as a mandatory field in the Sales Order form. Following are the steps which shall be followed to achieve this.
+Customize Form is the tool which allows user to customize property of the standard fields, and insert [custom fields](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-field.html) as per the requirement. Let's assume we need to set Project Name field as a mandatory field in the Sales Order form. Following are the steps which shall be followed to achieve this.
####Step 1: Go to Customize Form
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
You can also reach the Customize Form tool from the List Views.
-<img alt="Customize Form List" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/customize-form-from-list-view.gif">
+<img alt="Customize Form List" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/customize-form-from-list-view.gif">
####Step 2: Select Document Type
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
If you reach customize form from the Setup module, or from awesome bar, then you will have to manually select Document Type in which customization needs to be made.
-<img alt="Customize Form select doctype" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/customize-form-select-doctype.png">
+<img alt="Customize Form select doctype" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/customize-form-select-doctype.png">
####Step 3: Edit Property
@@ -29,11 +29,11 @@
To customized Project field, click on the respective row, and check "Mandatory". With this, Project field will become mandatory in the Sales Order.
-<img alt="Customize Form select doctype" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/customize-form-edit-property.gif">
+<img alt="Customize Form select doctype" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/customize-form-edit-property.gif">
Like setting setting field Mandatory, following are the other customization options in the Customize Form tool.
-* Change [Field Type]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types.html).
+* Change [Field Type](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types.html).
* Edit Field Labels to suit your industry/language.
* Set field precision for the Currency field.
* To hide field, check Hidden.
@@ -49,9 +49,9 @@
From Customize Form, you can also do following customizations:
-* Max Attachment Limit: Define [maximum no. of files]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/increase-max-attachments.html) which can attached on a document.
+* Max Attachment Limit: Define [maximum no. of files](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/increase-max-attachments.html) which can attached on a document.
* Default Print Format: For one document type, you can have multiple print formats. In the Customize Form, you can also set default Print Format for a document.
-* Set [Title Field]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/document-title.html)
+* Set [Title Field](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/document-title.html)
* Sort Field and Sort Order: Define field based on which documents in the list view will be sorted.
>Note: Though we want you to do everything you can to customize your ERP based on your business needs, we recommend that you do not make “wild” changes to the forms. This is because, these changes may affect certain operations and may mess up your forms. Make small changes and see its effect before doing some more.
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Field Type</td>
- <td>Click <a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types.html">here</a> to learn about of fields types.</td>
+ <td>Click <a href="/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types.html">here</a> to learn about of fields types.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Options</td>
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/document-title.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/document-title.md
index a05158d..64dad31 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/document-title.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/document-title.md
@@ -23,14 +23,14 @@
{customer_name} for {project}
<img class="screenshot" alt = "Customize Title"
- src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/customize-title.gif">
+ src="/docs/assets/img/customize/customize-title.gif">
#### Fixed or Editable Titles
If your title is generated as a default title, it can be edited by the user by clicking on the heading of the document.
<img class="screenshot" alt = "Editable Title"
- src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/editable-title.gif">
+ src="/docs/assets/img/customize/editable-title.gif">
If you want a fixed title, you can set the rule in the **Options** property. In this way, the title will be automatically updated everytime the document is updated.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.md
index ce8a1c3..ad4b00e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.md
@@ -4,9 +4,9 @@
`Setup > Permissions > Show / Hide Modules`
-<img alt="Hide Features" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/show-hide-modules.png">
+<img alt="Hide Features" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/show-hide-modules.png">
-Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/module-visibility.html) to learn about other features from where icons from the desktop can be hidden.
+Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/module-visibility.html) to learn about other features from where icons from the desktop can be hidden.
> Note: Modules are automatically hidden for users that have no permissions on the documents within that module. For example, if a User has no permissions on Purchase Order, Purchase Request, Supplier, the “Buying” module will automatically hidden for that User.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/kanban-board.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/kanban-board.md
index dca61b6..1936c56 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/kanban-board.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/kanban-board.md
@@ -10,35 +10,35 @@
To create a Kanban board in ERPNext click the Kanban dropdown on the sidebar, and select New Kanban Board.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Add New Kanban Board" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/kanban-board-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Add New Kanban Board" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/kanban-board-1.png">
###Add new Card/Document
To add Cards on Kanban Board click Add Tasks. You can Edit a card details by click on the card and it will take you to the Task Doctype where you can further add and edit card details.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Add card in Kanban Board" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/kanban-board-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Add card in Kanban Board" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/kanban-board-2.png">
###Update Cards/Document Status
Based on the Task status you can drag and drop the Cards in the respective column. For example if the task is work in progress you can move the card for the task from the status Open to Working.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Move Cards on Kanban Board" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/kanban-board-3.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Move Cards on Kanban Board" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/kanban-board-3.gif">
###Manage Columns
To add more columns in the Kanban board click Add columns.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Add New column in Kanban Board" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/kanban-board-4.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Add New column in Kanban Board" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/kanban-board-4.gif">
To move columns based on the priority drag and drop the columns as per requirement.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Move columns in Kanban Board" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/kanban-board-5.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Move columns in Kanban Board" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/kanban-board-5.gif">
To set Colors to a Card click drop down menu on the card and assign color to it.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Add color to cards in Kanban Board" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/kanban-board-6.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Add color to cards in Kanban Board" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/kanban-board-6.gif">
You can also Archive and Restore the columns added in a Kanban board. To do so click Archive in drop down menu on the card. Once archived you can restore the column from the list of the archived columns in the Kanban board.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Archive and Restore in Kanban Board" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/kanban-board-7.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Archive and Restore in Kanban Board" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/kanban-board-7.gif">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/print-format.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/print-format.md
index e626e9b..993f92a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/print-format.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/print-format.md
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
`Setup > Printing > Print Formats`
-<img alt="Print Format" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/print-format.png">
+<img alt="Print Format" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/print-format.png">
Select the type of Print Format you want to edit and click on the “Copy”
button on the right column. A new Print Format will open up with “Is Standard”
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
`Setup > Printing and Branding > Print Settings`
-<img alt="Print Format" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/customize/print-settings.png">
+<img alt="Print Format" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/customize/print-settings.png">
#### Example
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/fleet_management/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/fleet_management/index.md
index ed8c302..4582716 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/fleet_management/index.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/fleet_management/index.md
@@ -19,15 +19,15 @@
* Enter License Plate,Make,Model,Odometer Value,Fuel Type and Fuel UOM for a quick entry.
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/fleet-management/vehicle-1.1.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle" src="/docs/assets/img/fleet-management/vehicle-1.1.png">
* Enter details like Insurance,Chassis,Vehicle Value,Location and Employee.
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/fleet-management/vehicle-1.2.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle" src="/docs/assets/img/fleet-management/vehicle-1.2.png">
* Enter Vehicle attributes like color,wheels,doors and last carbon check
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/fleet-management/vehicle-1.3.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle" src="/docs/assets/img/fleet-management/vehicle-1.3.png">
### Vehicle Log
@@ -39,17 +39,17 @@
* Enter License Plate,Employee,Date,Odometer reading for a quick entry.
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle Log" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/fleet-management/vehicle-log-2.1.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle Log" src="/docs/assets/img/fleet-management/vehicle-log-2.1.png">
* Enter Refuelling details,Service details if applicable.
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle Log" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/fleet-management/vehicle-log-2.2.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle Log" src="/docs/assets/img/fleet-management/vehicle-log-2.2.png">
### Make Expense Claim
* Click on Make Expense Claim button .This button appears only in case of Submitted Vehicle Logs.
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle Log" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/fleet-management/expense-claim-3.1.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle Log" src="/docs/assets/img/fleet-management/expense-claim-3.1.png">
When you click on 'Make Expense Claim',
@@ -57,10 +57,10 @@
2. The sum of Fuel Expenses and Service Expenses is copied over to Expense Claim Amount.
3. Employee can submit the Expense Claim for further processing.
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle Log" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/fleet-management/expense-claim-3.2.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle Log" src="/docs/assets/img/fleet-management/expense-claim-3.2.png">
### Vehicle Expenses Report
* To track and monitor Vehicle Expenses you can use the Vehicle Expenses report.This report gives a one stop view of all your vehicle expenses month wise.
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle Log" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/fleet-management/vehicle-expenses.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle Log" src="/docs/assets/img/fleet-management/vehicle-expenses.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/appraisal.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/appraisal.md
index ce534e5..6ecb898 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/appraisal.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/appraisal.md
@@ -8,13 +8,13 @@
#### Step 1: Select an Appraisal Template
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Appraisal" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/appraisal.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Appraisal" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/appraisal.png">
After you select the template, the remaining form appears.
#### Step 2: Enter Employee Details
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Appraisal" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/appraisal-employee.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Appraisal" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/appraisal-employee.png">
Once the Appraisal Template is completed, you can create Appraisal records for
each period where you track performance. You can give points out of 5 for each
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/employees-loan-management.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/employees-loan-management.md
index d5c4d00..a24ca93 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/employees-loan-management.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/employees-loan-management.md
@@ -10,15 +10,15 @@
#### 1.1 Employee Loan Account
-Create Group as 'Employees Loans' under Current Assets and create employee loan A/C (Ledger) under it. [Check this link for new account creation]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters)
+Create Group as 'Employees Loans' under Current Assets and create employee loan A/C (Ledger) under it. [Check this link for new account creation](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters)
-
+
#### 1.2 Salaries Account
Create Group as 'Salaries' under Current Liabilities and create employee salary loan A/C (Ledger) under it.
-
+
#### 1.3 Interest Account
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
Once loan amount is finalized, make journal voucher to book loan payment entry. You should Credit Loan amount to Bank/Cash account and Debit Loan amount employee loan account.
-
+
### 3. Book Loan Recovery and Interest
@@ -36,13 +36,13 @@
If your employee pays separately for his/her loan installment and loan interest, then create journal voucher.
-
+
#### 3.2 Loan Adjustment in Salary
And if you deduct loan installment and interest from employees salary, then book journal entry for the same.
-
+
In the Salary Slip of an employee, then create two Deduction Types in Salary Structure. One as 'Loan Installment' and other one as 'Loan Interest'. So that you can update those values under this deduction heads.
@@ -50,6 +50,6 @@
After recovering loan and loan interest, General Ledger report will show the loan account details as follows.
-
+
<!-- markdown -->
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/leave-calculation-in-salary-slip.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/leave-calculation-in-salary-slip.md
index 7153708..7fb045c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/leave-calculation-in-salary-slip.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/leave-calculation-in-salary-slip.md
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
<li>Create Holiday List (if any), and link it with Employee master.</li>
</ol>
<p>When creating Salary Slip for an Employee, following is what you will see:</p>
-<img src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/SGrab_282.png">
+<img src="/docs/assets/img/articles/SGrab_282.png">
<br>
<br><b>Working Days:</b> Working Days in Salary Slip are calculated based on number of days selected above. If you don't wish to consider holiday in Working Days, then you should do following setting.
<br>
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
<br>As indicated above, if you have LWP checked for components in the earning and deducted table, you will notice a reduction in Amount based on no. of LWP of an Employee for that month.
<br>
<br>
-<img src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/SGrab_283.png" width="760"><br>
+<img src="/docs/assets/img/articles/SGrab_283.png" width="760"><br>
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/attendance.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/attendance.md
index 8875178..1cd5ad3 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/attendance.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/attendance.md
@@ -5,13 +5,13 @@
> Human Resources > Documents > Attendance > New Attendance
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Attendence" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/attendence.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Attendence" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/attendence.png">
You can get a monthly report of your Attendance data by going to the “Monthly
Attendance Details” report.
-You can easily set attendance for Employees using the [Employee Attendance Tool]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/employee-attendance-tool.html)
+You can easily set attendance for Employees using the [Employee Attendance Tool](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/employee-attendance-tool.html)
-You can also bulk upload attendence using the [Upload Attendence Tool]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.html)
+You can also bulk upload attendence using the [Upload Attendence Tool](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.html)
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/daily-work-summary.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/daily-work-summary.md
index d3ba22a..6ae15e0 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/daily-work-summary.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/daily-work-summary.md
@@ -12,4 +12,4 @@
You can also choose to Customize the Message you send to your employees:
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Department" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/department.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Department" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/department.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee-loan-management.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee-loan-management.md
index b76a226..28d28b5 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee-loan-management.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee-loan-management.md
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
Configure Loan limit and Rate of interest.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Loan Type" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/loan-type.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Loan Type" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/loan-type.png">
### Employee Loan Application
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
> Human Resources > Employee Loan Management > Employee Loan Application > New Employee Loan Application
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Employee Loan Application" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/employee-loan-application.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Employee Loan Application" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/employee-loan-application.png">
#### In the Employee Loan Application,
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
On save, Employee can see Repayment Information and make changes if required before submitting.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Employee Loan Application" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/repayment-info.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Employee Loan Application" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/repayment-info.png">
### Employee Loan
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
> Human Resources > Employee Loan Management > Employee Loan > New Employee Loan
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Employee Loan Application" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/employee-loan.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Employee Loan Application" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/employee-loan.png">
#### In the Employee Loan,
@@ -44,13 +44,13 @@
* Enter Disbursement Date and Account Info
* As soon as you hit save, the repayment schedule is generated.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="repayment Schedule" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/repayment-schedule.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="repayment Schedule" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/repayment-schedule.png">
#### Loan repayment deduction from Salary
To auto deduct the Loan repayment from Salary, check "Repay from Salary" in Employee Loan. It will appear as Loan repayment in Salary Slip.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Salary Slip" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/loan-repayment-salary-slip.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Salary Slip" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/loan-repayment-salary-slip.png">
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee.md
index 32e332a..99cc687 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee.md
@@ -6,6 +6,6 @@
> Human Resources > Employee > New
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Employee" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/employee.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Employee" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/employee.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/expense-claim.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/expense-claim.md
index b2cc74b..718e7fd 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/expense-claim.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/expense-claim.md
@@ -6,20 +6,20 @@
> HR > Expense Claim > New Expense Claim
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Expense Claim" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/expense_claim.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Expense Claim" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/expense_claim.png">
Set the Employee ID, date and the list of expenses that are to be claimed and
“Submit” the record.
### Set Account for Employee
Set employee's expense account on the employee form, system books an expense amount of an employee under this account.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Expense Claim" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/employee_account.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Expense Claim" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/employee_account.png">
### Approving Expenses
Approver for the Expense Claim is selected by an Employee himself. Users to whom `Expense Approver` role is assigned will shown in the Expense Claim Approver field.
-After saving Expense Claim, Employee should [Assign document to Approver]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/using-eprnext/assignment.html). On assignment, approving user will also receive email notification. To automate email notification, you can also setup [Email Alert]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-alerts.html).
+After saving Expense Claim, Employee should [Assign document to Approver](/docs/user/manual/en/using-eprnext/assignment.html). On assignment, approving user will also receive email notification. To automate email notification, you can also setup [Email Alert](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-alerts.html).
Expense Claim Approver can update the “Sanctioned Amounts” against Claimed Amount of an Employee. If submitting, Approval Status should be submitted to Approved or Rejected. If Approved, then Expense Claim gets submitted. If rejected, then Expen
Comments can be added in the Comments section explaining why the claim was approved or rejected.
@@ -27,19 +27,19 @@
### Booking the Expense
On submission of Expense Claim, system books an expense against the expense account and the employee account
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Expense Claim" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/expense_claim_book.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Expense Claim" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/expense_claim_book.png">
User can view unpaid expense claim using report "Unclaimed Expense Claims"
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Expense Claim" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/unclaimed_expense_claims.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Expense Claim" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/unclaimed_expense_claims.png">
### Payment for Expense Claim
To make payment against the expense claim, user has to click on Make > Bank Entry
#### Expense Claim
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Expense Claim" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/payment.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Expense Claim" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/payment.png">
#### Payment Entry
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Expense Claim" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/payment_entry.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Expense Claim" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/payment_entry.png">
Note: This amount should not be clubbed with Salary because the amount will then be taxable to the Employee.
@@ -48,6 +48,6 @@
* To Link Expense Claim with Task or Project specify the Task or the Project while making an Expense Claim
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Expense Claim - Project Link" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_expense_claim_link.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Expense Claim - Project Link" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_expense_claim_link.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/fleet-management.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/fleet-management.md
index 9e79d04..d7c4564 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/fleet-management.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/fleet-management.md
@@ -19,15 +19,15 @@
* Enter License Plate, Make, Model, Odometer Value, Fuel Type and Fuel UOM for a quick entry.
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/vehicle-1.1.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/vehicle-1.1.png">
* Enter details like Insurance, Chassis, Vehicle Value, Location and Employee.
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/vehicle-1.2.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/vehicle-1.2.png">
* Enter Vehicle attributes like color, wheels, doors and last carbon check
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/vehicle-1.3.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/vehicle-1.3.png">
### Vehicle Log
@@ -39,17 +39,17 @@
* Enter License Plate, Employee, Date, Odometer reading for a quick entry.
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle Log" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/vehicle-log-2.1.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle Log" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/vehicle-log-2.1.png">
* Enter Refueling details, Service details if applicable.
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle Log" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/vehicle-log-2.2.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle Log" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/vehicle-log-2.2.png">
### Make Expense Claim
* Click on Make Expense Claim button. This button appears only in case of Submitted Vehicle Logs.
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle Log" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/expense-claim-3.1.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle Log" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/expense-claim-3.1.png">
When you click on 'Make Expense Claim',
@@ -57,10 +57,10 @@
2. The sum of Fuel Expenses and Service Expenses is copied over to Expense Claim Amount.
3. Employee can submit the Expense Claim for further processing.
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle Log" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/expense-claim-3.2.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle Log" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/expense-claim-3.2.png">
### Vehicle Expenses Report
* To track and monitor Vehicle Expenses you can use the Vehicle Expenses report.This report gives a one stop view of all your vehicle expenses month wise.
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle Log" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/vehicle-expenses.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Vehicle Log" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/vehicle-expenses.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/holiday-list.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/holiday-list.md
index ace3b8e..0c0463d 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/holiday-list.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/holiday-list.md
@@ -16,22 +16,22 @@
Give a name to Holiday List. It can be based in Fiscal Year or location or department as application. Also select From and To Date for the Holiday List.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Holiday List" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/holiday-list-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Holiday List" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/holiday-list-1.png">
You can quickly add Weekly Off in the Holiday List as following.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Holiday List" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/holiday-list-2.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Holiday List" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/holiday-list-2.gif">
After that, you can also add specific days (like festival holidays) manually.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Holiday List" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/holiday-list-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Holiday List" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/holiday-list-3.png">
### Holiday List in Employee
If you have created multiple Holiday List, then select specific Holiday List for an Employee in the respective master.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Holiday List" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/holiday-list-4.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Holiday List" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/holiday-list-4.png">
When an Employee applies for the Leave, then days mentioned in the Holiday List will not be counted, as they are holiday already. For more configuration option in Holiday List, check `HR > HR Settings`.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md
index 248a49a..406dbda 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md
@@ -4,37 +4,37 @@
Employee Leave Balance Report shows employees and their respective balance leaves under various leave types. Report is generated as per the number of allowed leaves.
-<img alt="Employee Leave Balance" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/employee-leave-balance-report.png">
+<img alt="Employee Leave Balance" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/employee-leave-balance-report.png">
### Employee Birthday
Employee Birthday Report shows Birthdays of your employees.
-<img alt="Employee Birthday" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/employee-birthday-report.png">
+<img alt="Employee Birthday" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/employee-birthday-report.png">
### Employee Information
Employee Information Report shows Report View of important information recorded in Employee master.
-<img alt="Employee Information" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/employee-information-report.png">
+<img alt="Employee Information" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/employee-information-report.png">
### Employee Holiday Attendance
Employee Holiday Attendance shows the list of Employees who attended on Holidays.
-<img alt="Employee Information" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/employee-holiday-report.png">
+<img alt="Employee Information" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/employee-holiday-report.png">
### Monthly Salary Register
Monthly Salary Register shows net pay and its components of employee(s) at a glance.
-<img alt="Monthly Salary Register" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/monthly-salary-register-report.png">
+<img alt="Monthly Salary Register" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/monthly-salary-register-report.png">
### Monthly Attendance Sheet
Monthly Attendance Sheet shows monthly attendance of selected employee at a glance.
-<img alt="Monthly Attendance Sheet" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/monthly-attendance-sheet-report.png">
+<img alt="Monthly Attendance Sheet" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/monthly-attendance-sheet-report.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-applicant.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-applicant.md
index e05881d..d13cf19 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-applicant.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-applicant.md
@@ -1,12 +1,12 @@
# Job Applicant
-You can mantain a list of People who have applied for a [Job Opening]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-opening.html).
+You can mantain a list of People who have applied for a [Job Opening](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-opening.html).
To create a new Job Applicant go to
> Human Resource > Job Applicant > New
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Job Applicant" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/job-applicant.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Job Applicant" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/job-applicant.png">
### Linking with an Email Account
@@ -22,6 +22,6 @@
* In 'Append To' select 'Job Applicant'
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Email Account" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/email-account.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Email Account" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/email-account.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-opening.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-opening.md
index cb58858..e198caf 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-opening.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-opening.md
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
> Human Resource > Job Opening > New
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Job Opening" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/job-opening.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Job Opening" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/job-opening.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-application.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-application.md
index bbf70eb..438dbba 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-application.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-application.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
> Human Resources > Leave Application > New Leave Application
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Leave Application" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/leave-application.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Leave Application" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/leave-application.png">
###Setting Leave Approver
@@ -15,12 +15,12 @@
* You need to mention a list of Leave Approvers against an Employee in the Employee Master.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Leave Approver" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/employee-leave-approver.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Leave Approver" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/employee-leave-approver.png">
> Tip : If you want all users to create their own Leave Applications, you can set
their “Employee ID” as a match rule in the Leave Application Permission
-settings. See the earlier discussion on [Setting Up Permissions]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.html)
+settings. See the earlier discussion on [Setting Up Permissions](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.html)
for more info.
-You assign Leaves aginast an Employee check [Leave Allocation]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave.html)
+You assign Leaves aginast an Employee check [Leave Allocation](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave.html)
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave.md
index e189455..cd81269 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave.md
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
requirement.
<img class="screenshot" alt="New Leave Type"
- src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/new-leave-type.png">
+ src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/new-leave-type.png">
**Max Days Leave Allowed:** It refers to maximum number of days this particular Leave Type can be availed at a stretch. If an employee exceeds the maximum number of days under a particular Leave Type, his/her extended leave may be considered as ‘Leave Without Pay’ and this may affect his/her salary calculation.
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
To allocate leaves to an Employee, select the period and the number of leaves you want to allocate. You can also add unused leaves from previous allocation period.
<img class="screenshot" alt="Manual Leave Allocation"
- src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/manual-leave-allocation.png">
+ src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/manual-leave-allocation.png">
###Via Leave Allocation Tool
> Human Resources > Tools > Leave Allocation Tool
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
This tool enables you to allocate leaves for a category of employees, instead of individual ones. You can allocate leaves based on Employee Type, Branch, Department and Designation. Leave Allocation Tool is also known as Leave Control Panel.
<img class="screenshot" alt="Leave Allocation Tool"
- src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/leave-allocation-tool.png">
+ src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/leave-allocation-tool.png">
---
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@
- Employee gets notification on the status of his/her Leave Application
<img class="screenshot" alt="Leave Allocation Tool"
- src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/new-leave-application.png">
+ src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/new-leave-application.png">
**Notes:**
@@ -91,4 +91,4 @@
Leave Block List is a list of dates in a year, on which employees can not apply for leave. You can define a list of users who can approve Leave Application on blocked days, in case of urgency. You can also define whether the list will applied on entire company or any specific departments.
<img class="screenshot" alt="Leave Allocation Tool"
- src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/leave-block-list.png">
\ No newline at end of file
+ src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/leave-block-list.png">
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/offer-letter.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/offer-letter.md
index d1ce8ce..1df1a38 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/offer-letter.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/offer-letter.md
@@ -7,12 +7,12 @@
> Human Resource > Offer Letter > New
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Offer Letter" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/offer-letter.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Offer Letter" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/offer-letter.png">
-> Note: An offer letter can be made only against a [Job Applicant]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-applicant.html)
+> Note: An offer letter can be made only against a [Job Applicant](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-applicant.html)
There is a pre-designed print format to print you offer letter.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Offer Letter" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/offer-letter-print.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Offer Letter" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/offer-letter-print.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.md
index 46daf55..e902617 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.md
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
#### Figure 1.1:Salary Structure
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Salary Structure" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/salary-structure.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Salary Structure" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/salary-structure.png">
### In the Salary Structure,
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
#### Figure 1.2:Salary Structure for Salary Slip based on Timesheet
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Salary Structure" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/salary-timesheet.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Salary Structure" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/salary-timesheet.png">
### Salary Slip Based on Timesheet
@@ -72,20 +72,20 @@
#### Figure 1.3:Condition and Formula
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Salary Structure" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/condition-formula.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Salary Structure" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/condition-formula.png">
* Condition and Amount
#### Figure 1.4:Condition and Amount
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Salary Structure" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/condition-amount.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Salary Structure" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/condition-amount.png">
* Only Formula
* Only Amount
#### Figure 1.5:Account Details
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Salary Structure" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/salary-structure-account.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Salary Structure" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/salary-structure-account.png">
* Select Mode of Payment and Payment Account for the Salary Slips which will be generated using this Salary Structure
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@
#### Figure 2: Salary Slip
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Salary Slip" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/salary-slip.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Salary Slip" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/salary-slip.png">
You can also create salary slip for multiple employees using Process Payroll:
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@
#### Figure 3: Process Payroll
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Process Payroll" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/process-payroll.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Process Payroll" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/process-payroll.png">
In Process Payroll,
@@ -166,7 +166,7 @@
#### Figure 3.1: Make Bank Entry
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Process Payroll" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/bank-entry.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Process Payroll" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/bank-entry.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/branch.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/branch.md
index 33135e8..75c0c43 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/branch.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/branch.md
@@ -2,6 +2,6 @@
Branches of your organization
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Branch" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/branch.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Branch" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/branch.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/deduction-type.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/deduction-type.md
index 032d249..39e7e2a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/deduction-type.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/deduction-type.md
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
> Human Resource > Setup > Deduction Type > New
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Deduction Type" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/deduction-type.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Deduction Type" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/deduction-type.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/department.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/department.md
index 78567dc..9eb4245 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/department.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/department.md
@@ -2,6 +2,6 @@
Departments in your organization
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Department" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/department.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Department" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/department.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/designation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/designation.md
index c88e085..5ac771f 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/designation.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/designation.md
@@ -2,6 +2,6 @@
Designations in your organization
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Designation" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/designation.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Designation" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/designation.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/earning-type.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/earning-type.md
index 4e9f685..1758663 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/earning-type.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/earning-type.md
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
> Human Resource > Setup > Earning Type > New
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Earning Type" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/earning-type.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Earning Type" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/earning-type.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md
index c3843b9..de07ac9 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md
@@ -2,6 +2,6 @@
Various employment contracts you have with your employees.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Employment Type" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/employment-type.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Employment Type" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/employment-type.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md
index 1741df4..a12bcdb 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md
@@ -2,6 +2,6 @@
GLobal settings for HR related documents
-<img class="screenshot" alt="HR Settings" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/hr-settings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="HR Settings" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/hr-settings.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/employee-attendance-tool.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/employee-attendance-tool.md
index e17dddd..dfc350e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/employee-attendance-tool.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/employee-attendance-tool.md
@@ -6,6 +6,6 @@
This tool allows you to add attendance records for multiple employees quickly.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Attendence upload" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/employee-attendance-tool.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Attendence upload" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/employee-attendance-tool.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.md
index 4b67c11..7a45002 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.md
@@ -6,6 +6,6 @@
> Human Resources > Upload Attendance
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Attendence upload" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/attendence-upload.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Attendence upload" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/attendence-upload.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/training.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/training.md
index 33e731c..39b9790 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/training.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/training.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
Schedule seminars, workshops, conferences etc using Training Event. You can also invite your employees to attend the event using this feature.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Employee" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/training_event.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Employee" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/training_event.png">
### Inviting Employees for Event
@@ -14,17 +14,17 @@
The status is changed to 'Invited' when an invitation email is sent to the employee by the system.
When an Employee confirms his/her presence for the event you can change the status to 'Confirmed'.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Employee" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/training_event_employee.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Employee" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/training_event_employee.png">
### Training Result
After compleation of the training Employee Wise training results can be stored based on the Feedback received from the Trainer.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Employee" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/training_result.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Employee" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/training_result.png">
### Trainig Feedback
Collect feedback regarding the event from your Employees using Training Feedback.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Employee" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/human-resources/training_feedback.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Employee" src="/docs/assets/img/human-resources/training_feedback.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/key-workflows.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/key-workflows.md
index bb03269..9196014 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/key-workflows.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/key-workflows.md
@@ -3,10 +3,10 @@
This diagram covers how ERPNext tracks your company information across key
functions. This diagram does not cover all the features of ERPNext.
-
+
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/overview.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/overview.png">
_Note: Not all of the steps are mandatory. ERPNext allows you to freely skip
steps if you want to simplify the process._
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/the-champion.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/the-champion.md
index bd90518..57086cb 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/the-champion.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/the-champion.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
<h1 class="white">The Champion</h1>
-<img alt="Champion" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/implementation-image.png">
+<img alt="Champion" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/implementation-image.png">
We have seen dozens of ERP implementations over the past few years and we
realize that successful implementation is a lot about intangibles and
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/nested-bom-structure.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/nested-bom-structure.md
index d96dff8..1e8b2bd 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/nested-bom-structure.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/nested-bom-structure.md
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
BOM of PC will have all the raw-material items selected in it. Hard Disk and DVD Drive (sub-assemblies) will also be selected as raw-material items. For the sib-assembly items, respective BOM no. will be fetched as well.
-<img alt="Nested BOM" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/nested-bom-1.png">
+<img alt="Nested BOM" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/nested-bom-1.png">
Following is how the structure of nested BOM will look:
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/valuation-based-on-field-in-bom.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/valuation-based-on-field-in-bom.md
index 84f9084..b07366c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/valuation-based-on-field-in-bom.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/valuation-based-on-field-in-bom.md
@@ -6,13 +6,13 @@
**Answer:** There are 3 available options in the <i>Valuation Based On</i> field:
-<img alt="Nested BOM" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/valuation-based-on-1.png">
+<img alt="Nested BOM" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/valuation-based-on-1.png">
**Valuation Rate:** Item valuation rate is defined based on it's purchase or manufacture value.
For Purchase Item, it is defined based on charges entered in the Purchase Receipt. If you don't have any Purchase Receipt
made for an item or a Stock Reconciliation, then there won't be any Valuation Rate for that item.
-**Price List Rate:** This option allows to pull item rates from [Price List.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-price.html)
+**Price List Rate:** This option allows to pull item rates from [Price List.](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-price.html)
**Last Purchase Rate:** It will be the last Purchase (Order) Rate of an item.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md
index 11a7cac..112efab 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
> Manufacturing > Bill of Materials > New BOM
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Task" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/bom.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Task" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/bom.png">
* To add Operations select 'With Operation'. The Operations table shall appear.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Task" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/bom-operations.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Task" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/bom-operations.png">
* Select the Item for which you want to make the BOM.
* Add the operations that you have to go through to make that particular Item in the “Operations” table. For each operation, you will be asked to enter a Workstation. You must create new Workstations as and when necessary.
@@ -27,22 +27,22 @@
* Add the list of Items you require for each operation, with its quantity. This Item could be a purchased Item or a sub-assembly with its own BOM. If the row Item is a manufactured Item and has multiple BOMs, select the appropriate BOM. You can also define if a part of the Item goes into scrap.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Costing" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/bom-costing.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Costing" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/bom-costing.png">
* This cost can be updated on by using the 'Update Cost' button.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Update Cost" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/bom-update-cost.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Update Cost" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/bom-update-cost.png">
* User can select the currency in the BOM
* System calculates the costing based on the price list currency
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Update Cost" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/price-list-based-currency-bom.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Update Cost" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/price-list-based-currency-bom.png">
### Materials Required(exploded)
This table lists down all the Material required for the Item to be Manufactured.
It also fetches sub-assemblies along with the quantity.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Exploded Section" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/bom-exploded.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Exploded Section" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/bom-exploded.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/introduction.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/introduction.md
index 2a947b2..b7f0a99 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/introduction.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/introduction.md
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
# Introduction
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Task" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/manufacturing.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Task" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/manufacturing.png">
### Types of Production Planning
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/operation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/operation.md
index 75066aa..8d495f1 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/operation.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/operation.md
@@ -8,6 +8,6 @@
> Manufacturing > Documents > Operation > New
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Operation" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/operation.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Operation" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/operation.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/production-order.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/production-order.md
index 99a0e0d..430ef8a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/production-order.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/production-order.md
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
# Production Order
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Production Order" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/manufacturing-flow.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Production Order" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/manufacturing-flow.png">
A Production Order (also known as a Work Order) is a document that is given to
the manufacturing shop floor by the Production Planner as a signal to produce
a certain quantity of a certain Item. The Production Order also helps to generate
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
> Manufacturing > Documents > Production Order > New
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Production Order" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/production-order.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Production Order" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/production-order.png">
### Creating Production Orders
@@ -35,11 +35,11 @@
* By default the system fetchs workstation and duration for Production Order Operations from the selected BOM.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="PO Opeartions" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-operations.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="PO Opeartions" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-operations.png">
* If you wish to reassign the workstation for a particular opeeration in the Production Order, you can do so before submitting the Production Order.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="PO reassigning Operations" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-reassigning-operations.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="PO reassigning Operations" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-reassigning-operations.png">
* Select the respective operation, and change its workstation.
* You can also change the Operating Time for that operation
@@ -56,19 +56,19 @@
* Click on 'Start'.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Transfer Materials" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-material-transfer.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Transfer Materials" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-material-transfer.png">
* Mention the quantity of materials to be transfered.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Material Transfer Qty" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-material-transfer-qty.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Material Transfer Qty" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-material-transfer-qty.png">
* Submit the Stock Entry
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Entry for PO" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-SE-for-material-transfer.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Entry for PO" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-SE-for-material-transfer.png">
* Material Transfered for Manufacturing will be updated in the Production Order based on the Stock Entry.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Entry for PO" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-material-transfer-updated.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Entry for PO" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-material-transfer-updated.png">
#### Material Transfer through Stock Entry
Use cases for this option are:
@@ -79,12 +79,12 @@
### Making Time Logs
-* Progress in the Production Order can be tracked using [Timesheet]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-production-order.html)
+* Progress in the Production Order can be tracked using [Timesheet](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-production-order.html)
* Timesheet's time slots are created against Production Order Operations.
* Drafts of Timesheet are created based on the scheduled operations when an Production Order is Submitted.
* To create more Timesheets against an operation click 'Make Timesheet' button.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Make timesheet against PO" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-operations-make-ts.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Make timesheet against PO" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-operations-make-ts.png">
###Updating Finished Goods
@@ -92,11 +92,11 @@
* This will create a Stock Entry that will deduct all the sub-Items from the WIP Warehouse and add them to the Finished Goods Warehouse.
* Click on 'Finish'.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Update Finished Goods" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-FG-update.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Update Finished Goods" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-FG-update.png">
* Mention the quantity of materials to be transfered.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Update Finished Goods Qty" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-FG-update-qty.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Update Finished Goods Qty" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-FG-update-qty.png">
> Tip : You can also partially complete a Production Order by updating the Finished Goods stock creating a Stock Entry.
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@
4. Update Finished Goods: This will create a Stock Entry that will deduct all the sub-Items from the WIP Warehouse and add them to the Finished Goods Warehouse.
5. To check all Time Logs made against the Production Order click on 'Show Time Logs'
-<img class="screenshot" alt="PO - stop" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-stop.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="PO - stop" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/PO-stop.png">
* You can also re-start a stopped Production Order.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md
index 68ff831..2c09f52 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
`Manufacturing > Setup > Manufacturing Settings`
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Manufacturing Settings" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/manufacturing-settings-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Manufacturing Settings" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/manufacturing-settings-1.png">
####Disable Capacity Planning and Time Tracking
@@ -18,15 +18,15 @@
In the Workstation master, actual working hours are defined (say 101m to 6pm). As per the Capacity Planning, Time Logs are created against Workstation, for tracking actual operations hour. It also considers working hours of a Workstation when scheduling job (via Time Log).
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Manufacturing Settings" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/manufacturing-settings-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Manufacturing Settings" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/manufacturing-settings-2.png">
As per the standard validation, if Operation cannot be completed within working hours of Workstation, then user is asked to divide an Operation into multiple and smaller Operations. However, if `Allow Overtime` field is checked, while creating Time Logs for Operation, working hours of Workstation will not be validated. In this case, Time Logs for Operation will be created beyond working hours of Workstation as well.
####Allow Production on Holidays
-Holiday of a company can be recorded in the [Holiday List]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/human-resources/) master. While scheduling production job on workstation, system doesn't consider a day listed in the Holiday list. If you want production job to be scheduled on holidays as well, `Allow Production on Holidays` field should be checked.
+Holiday of a company can be recorded in the [Holiday List](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/) master. While scheduling production job on workstation, system doesn't consider a day listed in the Holiday list. If you want production job to be scheduled on holidays as well, `Allow Production on Holidays` field should be checked.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Manufacturing Settings" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/manufacturing-settings-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Manufacturing Settings" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/manufacturing-settings-3.png">
####Over Production Allowance Percentage
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
When creating Manufacture Entry, raw-material items are back-flush based on BOM of production item. If you want raw-material items to be back-flushed based on Material Transfer entry made against that Production Order instead, then you should set Back-flush Raw Materials Based On "Material Transferred for Manufacture".
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Manufacturing Settings" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/manufacturing-settings-4.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Manufacturing Settings" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/manufacturing-settings-4.png">
####Capacity Planning For (Days)
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/subcontracting.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/subcontracting.md
index aa0c674..925afe3 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/subcontracting.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/subcontracting.md
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
2. Create a Warehouse for your Supplier so that you can keep track of Items supplied. (you may supply a months worth of Items in one go).
3. For the processed Item, in the Item master, set “Is Sub Contracted Item” to “Yes”.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sub-Contracting" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/subcontract.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sub-Contracting" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/subcontract.png">
__Step 1:__ Make a Bill of Materials for the processed Item, with the unprocessed
@@ -25,20 +25,20 @@
pen will be named under Bill of Materials(BOM), whereas, the refill, knob, and
other items which go into the making of pen, will be categorized as sub-items.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sub-Contracting" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/subcontract2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sub-Contracting" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/subcontract2.png">
__Step 2:__ Make a Purchase Order for the processed Item. When you “Save”, in the “Raw Materials Supplied”, all your un-processed Items will be updated based on your Bill of Materials.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sub-Contracting" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/subcontract3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sub-Contracting" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/subcontract3.png">
__Step 3:__ Make a Stock Entry to deliver the raw material Items to your Supplier.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sub-Contracting" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/subcontract4.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sub-Contracting" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/subcontract4.png">
__Step 4:__ Receive the Items from your Supplier via Purchase Receipt. Make sure to check the “Consumed Quantity” in the “Raw Materials” table so that the
correct stock is maintained at the Supplier’s end.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sub-Contracting" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/subcontract5.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sub-Contracting" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/subcontract5.png">
> Note 1: Make sure that the “Rate” of processed Item is the processing rate
(excluding the raw material rate).
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/bom-replace-tool.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/bom-replace-tool.md
index 794d982..98d1f3b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/bom-replace-tool.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/bom-replace-tool.md
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
To update new BOM updated in the BOM of finished item, where CPU is selected as raw-material, you can use BOM Replace tool.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="BOM replace Tool" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/bom-replace-tool.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="BOM replace Tool" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/bom-replace-tool.png">
In this tool, you should select Current BOM, and New BOM. On clicking Replace button, current BOM of CPU will be replaced with New BOM in the BOM of finished Item (Computer).
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/production-planning-tool.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/production-planning-tool.md
index 9f253d6..e9ba2a5 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/production-planning-tool.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/production-planning-tool.md
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
> Manufacturing > Tools > Production Planning Tool
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Production Planing Tool" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/ppt.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Production Planing Tool" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/ppt.png">
#### Step 1: Specify source to get Production Items
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
* Use filters to get the Sales Order / Material Request
* Click on Get Sales Order / Get Material Requests to generate a list.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Production Planing Tool" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/ppt-get-sales-orders.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Production Planing Tool" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/ppt-get-sales-orders.png">
@@ -36,11 +36,11 @@
* Get the items for the Sales Order / Material request list
* You can add/remove or change quantity of these Items.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Production Planing Tool" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/ppt-get-item.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Production Planing Tool" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/ppt-get-item.png">
#### Step 4: Create Production Orders
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Production Planing Tool" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/ppt-create-production-order.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Production Planing Tool" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/ppt-create-production-order.png">
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
Create Material Request for Items with projected shortfall.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Production Planing Tool" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/ppt-create-material-request.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Production Planing Tool" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/ppt-create-material-request.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/workstation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/workstation.md
index 98135a1..5670893 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/workstation.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/workstation.md
@@ -10,12 +10,12 @@
> Manufacturing > Documents > Workstation > New
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Workstation" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/manufacturing/workstation.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Workstation" src="/docs/assets/img/manufacturing/workstation.png">
In workstation specify the workstation working hours under the 'working hour' section.
You can also specify the working hours based on shifts.
While scheduling Production Order, system will check for the availability of the workstation based on the working hours specified.
-> Note : You can enable overtime for your workstation in [Manufacturing Settings]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.html)
+> Note : You can enable overtime for your workstation in [Manufacturing Settings](/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.html)
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-cost.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-cost.md
index 565686f..88d4f0a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-cost.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-cost.md
@@ -3,4 +3,4 @@
Activity Cost records the per-hour billing rate and costing rate of an Employee against an Activity Type.
This rate is pulled by the system while making Time Logs. It is used for Project Costing.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Activity Cost" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/activity_cost.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Activity Cost" src="/docs/assets/img/project/activity_cost.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-type.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-type.md
index 54b455e..4e968a6 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-type.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-type.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
Activity Type makes a list of the different types of activities against which a Time Log can be made.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Activity Type" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/activity_type.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Activity Type" src="/docs/assets/img/project/activity_type.png">
By default the following Activity Types are created.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing.md
index e5c5940..dad849e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing.md
@@ -12,17 +12,17 @@
Activity Cost is a master where you can track billing and costing rate for each Employee, and for each Activity Type.
-
+
#### Time Log
Based on Actual Time spent on the Project-Task, Employee will create a time log.
-
+
On selection of Activity Type in the Time Log, Billing and Costing Rate will fetched for that Employee from respective Activity Cost master.
-
+
Multiplying these rates with total no. of Hours in the Time Log gives Costing Amount and Billing Amount for the specific Time Log.
@@ -30,10 +30,10 @@
Based on total Time Logs created for a specific Task, its costing will be updated in the respective Task master.
-
+
Same way, Project master will have cost updated based on Time Log created against that Projects, and tasks associated with that Project.
-
+
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project.md
index a2bbf44..d835295 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
Project management in ERPNext is Task driven. You can create Project and assign multiple Tasks against it.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project.png">
You can also track % Completion of a Project using different methods.
@@ -10,80 +10,80 @@
2. Task Progress
3. Task Weight
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project-percent-complete.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project-percent-complete.png">
Some examples of how the % Completion is calculated based on Tasks.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/percent-complete-calc.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project" src="/docs/assets/img/project/percent-complete-calc.png">
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/percent-complete-formula.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project" src="/docs/assets/img/project/percent-complete-formula.png">
### Managing tasks
Project can be divided into multiple Tasks.
-Task can be created via Project document itself or can be created via [Task]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/projects/tasks.html)
+Task can be created via Project document itself or can be created via [Task](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/tasks.html)
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_task.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_task.png">
* To view Task made against a Project click on 'Tasks'
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - View Task" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_view_task.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - View Task" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_view_task.png">
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Task List" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_task_list.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Task List" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_task_list.png">
* You can also view the Tasks from the Project document itself
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Task Grid" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_task_grid.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Task Grid" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_task_grid.png">
* To add Weights to Tasks you can follow the below steps
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Task Grid" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/tasks.png">
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Task Grid" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/task-weights.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Task Grid" src="/docs/assets/img/project/tasks.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Task Grid" src="/docs/assets/img/project/task-weights.png">
### Managing time
-ERPNext uses [Time Log]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/projects/time-log.html) to track the progress of a Project.
+ERPNext uses [Time Log](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/time-log.html) to track the progress of a Project.
You can create Time Logs against each task.
The Actual Start and End Time along with the costing shall then be updated based on the Time Log.
* To view Time Log made against a Project click on 'Time Logs'
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - View Time Log" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_view_time_log.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - View Time Log" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_view_time_log.png">
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Time Log List" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_time_log_list.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Time Log List" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_time_log_list.png">
* You can also create a Time Log directlly and link it to the Project.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Link Time Log" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_time_log_link.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Link Time Log" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_time_log_link.png">
### Managing expenses
-You can book [Expense Claim]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/human-resources/expense-claim.html) against a project task.
+You can book [Expense Claim](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/expense-claim.html) against a project task.
The system shall update the total amount from expense claims in the project costing section.
* To view Expense Claims made against a Project click on 'Expense Claims'
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - View Expense Claim" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_view_expense_claim.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - View Expense Claim" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_view_expense_claim.png">
* You can also create a Expense Claims directlly and link it to the Project.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Link Expense Claim" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_expense_claim_link.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Link Expense Claim" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_expense_claim_link.png">
* Total amount of Expense Claims booked against a project is shown under 'Total Expense Claim' in the Project Costing Section
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Total Expense Claim" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_total_expense_claim.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Total Expense Claim" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_total_expense_claim.png">
### Cost Center
-You can make a [Cost Center]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/cost-center.html) against a Project or use an existing cost center to track all expenses made against that project.
+You can make a [Cost Center](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/cost-center.html) against a Project or use an existing cost center to track all expenses made against that project.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Cost Center" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_cost_center.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Cost Center" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_cost_center.png">
###Project Costing
The Project Costing section helps you track the time and expenses incurred against the project.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Costing" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_costing.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Costing" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_costing.png">
* The Costing Section is updated based on Time Logs made.
@@ -91,9 +91,9 @@
###Billing
-You can make/link a [Sales Order]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/selling/sales-order.html) against a project. Once linked you can use the standard sales module to bill your customer against the Project.
+You can make/link a [Sales Order](/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-order.html) against a project. Once linked you can use the standard sales module to bill your customer against the Project.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Sales Order" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_sales_order.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Sales Order" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_sales_order.png">
###Gantt Chart
@@ -102,8 +102,8 @@
* To view gantt chart against a project, go to that project and click on 'Gantt Chart'
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - View Gantt Chart" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_view_gantt_chart.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - View Gantt Chart" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_view_gantt_chart.png">
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Gantt Chart" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/project_gantt_chart.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Project - Gantt Chart" src="/docs/assets/img/project/project_gantt_chart.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/tasks.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/tasks.md
index 599068e..9447a2e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/tasks.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/tasks.md
@@ -3,13 +3,13 @@
Project is divided into Tasks.
In ERPNext, you can also create a Task independently.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Task" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/task.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Task" src="/docs/assets/img/project/task.png">
### Status of the Task
A Task can have one of the following statuses - Open, Working, Pending Review, Closed, or Cancelled.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Task - Status" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/task_status.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Task - Status" src="/docs/assets/img/project/task_status.png">
* By default each new Task created has the status set to 'Open'.
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@
You can specify a list of dependent tasks under the 'Depends On' section.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Depends On" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/task_depends_on.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Depends On" src="/docs/assets/img/project/task_depends_on.png">
* You cannot close the parent task until all dependent tasks are closed.
@@ -27,35 +27,35 @@
### Managing Time
-ERPNext uses [Time Log]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/projects/time-log.html) to track the progress of a Task.
+ERPNext uses [Time Log](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/time-log.html) to track the progress of a Task.
You can create multiple Time Logs against each task.
The Actual Start and End Time along with the costing is updated based on the Time Log.
* To view Time Log made against a Task click on 'Time Logs'
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Task - View Time Log" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/task_view_time_log.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Task - View Time Log" src="/docs/assets/img/project/task_view_time_log.png">
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Task - Time Log List" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/task_time_log_list.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Task - Time Log List" src="/docs/assets/img/project/task_time_log_list.png">
* You can also create a Time Log directly and link it to the Task.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Task - Link Time Log" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/task_time_log_link.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Task - Link Time Log" src="/docs/assets/img/project/task_time_log_link.png">
### Managing Expenses
-You can book [Expense Claim]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/human-resources/expense-claim.html) against a task.
+You can book [Expense Claim](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/expense-claim.html) against a task.
The system shall update the total amount from expense claims in the costing section.
* To view Expense Claims made against a Task click on 'Expense Claims'
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Task - View Expense Claim" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/task_view_expense_claim.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Task - View Expense Claim" src="/docs/assets/img/project/task_view_expense_claim.png">
* You can also create a Expense Claims directly and link it to the Task.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Task - Link Expense Claim" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/task_expense_claim_link.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Task - Link Expense Claim" src="/docs/assets/img/project/task_expense_claim_link.png">
* Total amount of Expense Claims booked against a task is shown under 'Total Expense Claim' in the Task Costing Section
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Task - Total Expense Claim" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/task_total_expense_claim.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Task - Total Expense Claim" src="/docs/assets/img/project/task_total_expense_claim.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/time-log-batch.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/time-log-batch.md
index 6904f4e..b307f6a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/time-log-batch.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/time-log-batch.md
@@ -8,17 +8,17 @@
Just open your Time Log list and check the Items to you want to add to the Time Log. Then click on "Make Time Sheet" button and these Time Logs will be selected.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Time Log - Drag Calender" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/time_sheet.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Time Log - Drag Calender" src="/docs/assets/img/project/time_sheet.gif">
###Making Sales Invoice
* After submitting the Time Sheet, "Make Invoice" button shall appear.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Time Log - Drag Calender" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/time_sheet_make_invoice.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Time Log - Drag Calender" src="/docs/assets/img/project/time_sheet_make_invoice.png">
* Click on that button to raise a Sales Invoice against the Time Sheet.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Time Log - Drag Calender" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/time_sheet_sales_invoice.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Time Log - Drag Calender" src="/docs/assets/img/project/time_sheet_sales_invoice.png">
* When you "Submit" the Sales Invoice, the Sales Invoice number will get updated in the Time Logs and Time Sheet and their status will change to "Billed".
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/salary-slip-from-timesheet.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/salary-slip-from-timesheet.md
index 8aa7006..5069247 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/salary-slip-from-timesheet.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/salary-slip-from-timesheet.md
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
To track actual hours employee has worked for, create Timesheet for each Employee. We suggest you to create Timesheet based on a payment period. For example, if you paying employee on a weekly bases, create one Timesheet for an Employee for one week. However, you can create multiple Timesheets, and create one Salary Slip for the multiple Timesheets.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-salary-slip-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-salary-slip-1.png">
####Salary Structure for the Employee
@@ -18,17 +18,17 @@
Amount directly for other Salary Components (eg: House Rent Allowance, Phone Allowance) can be define directly. When creating Salary Slip, Amount for these Salary Component will be fetched as it is.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-salary-slip-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-salary-slip-2.png">
####Create Salary Slip from Timesheet
To create Salary Slip against Timesheet, open Timesheet and click on "Salary Slip".
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-salary-slip-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-salary-slip-3.png">
In the Salary Slip, Timesheet ID will be updated. You can select more Timesheet to be paid via this Salary Slip. Based on the Timesheets selected, Total Working Hours will be calculated.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-salary-slip-4.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-salary-slip-4.gif">
Hour Rate will be fetched from the Salary Structure of an Employee. Based on Total Working Hours and Hour Rate, Amount will be calculated for the Salary Component is to be calculated based on actual hours worked.
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
On Submission of Salary Slip, Timesheet's status will be updated to "Payslip".
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-salary-slip-5.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-salary-slip-5.png">
<div class=well>
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/sales-invoice-from-timesheet.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/sales-invoice-from-timesheet.md
index 3ded275..0d03bd3 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/sales-invoice-from-timesheet.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/sales-invoice-from-timesheet.md
@@ -16,15 +16,15 @@
In the Employee field, only ones having ative Salary Structure will be selectable. Further in the Salary Structure , is created for the E on the actual hours worked, Employee can create Timesheet. To be able to create Sales Invoice against this Timesheet, ensure `Billable` field is checked.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-salary-structure.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-salary-structure.png">
#### Step 3:Activity Type
Employee will have to select an Activity Type (like planning, site visit, repairing etc. ). Costing and Billing Rate for each Activity can be different for each Employee. These cost can be tracked in the Activity Cost. On selection of Activity Type, Activity Cost is fetched from that Employee. Based on total Activity Cost and total no. of hours, Total Billing Amount (to the Customer) is calculated.
-To learn more on how to setup Activity Type and Activity Cost, click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing).
+To learn more on how to setup Activity Type and Activity Cost, click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing).
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-cost.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-cost.png">
#### Step 4: Enter Actual Time
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
To be able to create Sales Invoice from the Time Sheet, ensure 'Is Billable' field is checked.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project//timesheet/timesheet-billable.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/project//timesheet/timesheet-billable.png">
Based on the actual hours worked and Activity Cost of an Employee, Total Billing Amount will be calculated for Timesheet.
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
After submitting Timesheet, you will find buttons to create Sales Invoice and Salary Slip against this Timesheet.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets//img/project/timesheet/timesheet-total.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets//img/project/timesheet/timesheet-total.png">
###Create Sales Invoice from Timesheet
@@ -48,13 +48,13 @@
In the Timesheet, if "Is Billable" is checked, you will find option to create Sales Invoice against it.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-invoice-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-invoice-1.png">
####Sales Invoice
Sales Invoice has dedicated table for the Timesheet table where Timesheet details will be updated. You can select more Timesheets in this table.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-to-invoice.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-to-invoice.gif">
####Select Customer and Item
@@ -67,4 +67,4 @@
On submitting Sales Invoice, status of the Timesheets linked to the Sales Invoice will be updated as Billed.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-billed.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-billed.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-production-order.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-production-order.md
index e19f754..da7bf2f 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-production-order.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-production-order.md
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
When a Production Order is submitted, based on the Planned Start Date and the availability of the Workstations, system schedules all operations by creating Timesheet.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-capacity-planning.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-capacity-planning.png">
Let's assume we are manufacturing a mobile phone. As per the Bill of Material, time required for the assembly of components could be one hour. However the actual time taken for it's completion could be more than planned. The actual time tracking provides actual operation cost, hence helps in determining accurate valuation of the manufacturing item.
@@ -14,28 +14,28 @@
As per the Bill of Materials of manufacturing item, following are the Operations and Workstation through which raw-material items are processed.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-production-order-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-production-order-1.png">
On submission on Production Order, Timesheet will be created automatically.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-production-order-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-production-order-2.png">
####Time Sheet created from Production Order
In the Timesheet, unique row will be added for each Operation - Workstation. This allows operator/supervisor at the workstation to enter actual From Time and To Time taken for each Operation.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-production-order-3.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-production-order-3.gif">
After enter From Time and To Time for all the Operations, Total Hours will be calculated.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-production-order-6.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-production-order-6.png">
With updating actual time, you can also enter "Completed Qty". If all the items are not processed in the same Timesheet, you can create another Timesheet from the Production Order.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-production-order-4.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-production-order-4.png">
####Save and Submit Timesheet
On the submission of Timesheet, Total Hours is calculated. Also, in the Production Order, for each Operation, actual Start and End Time is updated.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-production-order-5.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-production-order-5.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-project.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-project.md
index e713854..0a9f32f 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-project.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-project.md
@@ -4,11 +4,11 @@
Timesheets can be tracked against Project and Tasks so that you can get reports on how much time was spent on each Task or Project.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-project.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/project/timesheet/timesheet-project.gif">
####Billable Timesheet
-To bill Customer based on Timesheet, check "Is Billable" in the Timesheet created against Project and Task. To learn more about billing Customer from Timesheet, click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/sales-invoice-from-timesheet.html).
+To bill Customer based on Timesheet, check "Is Billable" in the Timesheet created against Project and Task. To learn more about billing Customer from Timesheet, click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/sales-invoice-from-timesheet.html).
User can also make invoice against timesheet by selecting the project on the invoice. System will fetch the records from the timesheet based on selected project, for mode detail check below video
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/hVAjtOFFhDI" frameborder="0" allowfullscreen></iframe>
@@ -19,4 +19,4 @@
In the Timesheet, costing will be done based on Activity Cost multiplied with number of hours. Based the Timesheet Cost, total costing will be doen for the Task and Project as well.
-To learn about setup of Activity Type and Activity Cost, click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing).
\ No newline at end of file
+To learn about setup of Activity Type and Activity Cost, click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing).
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-remimders.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-remimders.md
index 97f016d..b1061e4 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-remimders.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-remimders.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
To send GSTIN Reminders, you can either open the Customer / Supplier record or **GST Settings**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="GST Settings" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/regional/india/gst-settings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="GST Settings" src="/docs/assets/img/regional/india/gst-settings.png">
Here you can click on the "Send GSTIN Update Reminders" button to send email reminders to all your customers
@@ -12,10 +12,10 @@
Your customers will receive an email asking them to update their GSTIN and that email will link them to a portal page:
-<img class="screenshot" alt="GST Portal Page" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/regional/india/gstin-portal-update.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="GST Portal Page" src="/docs/assets/img/regional/india/gstin-portal-update.png">
Here they can update their GSTIN and it will automatically be added to your customer GSTIN record.
#### Sample GSTIN Reminder Email
-<img class="screenshot" alt="GST Reminder Email" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/regional/india/gstin-reminder-email.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="GST Reminder Email" src="/docs/assets/img/regional/india/gstin-reminder-email.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-setup.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-setup.md
index 49d75b1..b89be53 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-setup.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-setup.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
GST Law requires that you maintain the GSTIN number for all your suppliers and vendors. In ERPNext, GSTIN is linked to the **Address**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="GST in Customer" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/regional/india/gstin-customer.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="GST in Customer" src="/docs/assets/img/regional/india/gstin-customer.gif">
**GST for your Company Address**
@@ -12,20 +12,20 @@
Go to the Company master and add the GSTIN to your default address.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="GST in Company" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/regional/india/gstin-company.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="GST in Company" src="/docs/assets/img/regional/india/gstin-company.gif">
**Include GSTIN number in the Address Template**
Open Address Template record for India, add GSTIN number and State Code there if not exists.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="GST in Company" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/regional/india/address-template-gstin.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="GST in Company" src="/docs/assets/img/regional/india/address-template-gstin.png">
### 2. Setting up HSN Codes
According to the GST Law, your itemised invoices must contain the HSN Code related to that Item. ERPNext comes pre-installed with all 12,000+ HSN Codes so that you can easily select the relevant HSN Code in your Item
-<img class="screenshot" alt="HSN in Item" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/regional/india/hsn-item.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="HSN in Item" src="/docs/assets/img/regional/india/hsn-item.gif">
### 3. Making Tax Masters
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
**Note:** Usually the rate in CGST and SGST is half of IGST. For example if most of your items are billed at 18%, then create IGST at 18%, CGST and SGST at 9% each.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="GST in Customer" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/regional/india/gst-in-coa.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="GST in Customer" src="/docs/assets/img/regional/india/gst-in-coa.png">
### 4. Make Tax Templates
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
In your **In State GST** template, select 2 accounts, SGST and CGST
-<img class="screenshot" alt="GST in Customer" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/regional/india/gst-template-in-state.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="GST in Customer" src="/docs/assets/img/regional/india/gst-template-in-state.png">
In your **Out of State GST** template, select IGST
@@ -59,22 +59,22 @@
4. Select the the **In State GST** or **Out of State GST** template that you have created based on the type of transaction
5. Save and Submit the Invoice
-<img class="screenshot" alt="GST Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/regional/india/gst-invoice.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="GST Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/regional/india/gst-invoice.gif">
### 6. Print GST Tax Invoice
To print Tax Invoice as per GSTN guidelines, please select **GST Tax Invoice** print format. This print format includes company address, GSTIN numbers, HSN/SAC Code and item-wise tax breakup. And while printing select correct value of Invoice Copy field, to mention whether it is for the Customer, Supplier or Transporter.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sample GST Tax Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/regional/india/sample-gst-tax-invoice.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sample GST Tax Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/regional/india/sample-gst-tax-invoice.png">
### Reports
ERPNext comes with most of your reports you need to prepare your GST Returns. Go to Accounts > GST India head for the list.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="GST Menus" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/regional/india/gst-menu.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="GST Menus" src="/docs/assets/img/regional/india/gst-menu.png">
You can check the impact of your invoice in the **GST Sales Register** and **GST Itemised Sales Register**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="GST Itemised Sales Register" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/regional/india/gst-itemised.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="GST Itemised Sales Register" src="/docs/assets/img/regional/india/gst-itemised.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_criteria.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_criteria.md
index 161f23f..fbaa70f 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_criteria.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_criteria.md
@@ -4,12 +4,12 @@
Assessment Criteria is the parameter based on which you assess the Student.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Assessment Criteria" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/assessment/assessment-criteria.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Assessment Criteria" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/assessment/assessment-criteria.png">
After assessment is conducted for a Course, marks earned are entered based on the Assessment Criteria. For example, if assessment was conducted for science subject, then you can evaluate Student in Science on various criteria like Writing, Practicals, Presentation etc.
Assessment Criteria is be used when scheduling Assessment Plan for Student Group and Course.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Assessment Plan Criteria" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/assessment/assessment-plan-criteria.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Assessment Plan Criteria" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/assessment/assessment-plan-criteria.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_group.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_group.md
index aaa385d..53e95a9 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_group.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_group.md
@@ -6,10 +6,10 @@
For example, if you conduct two assessment in a academic year, then setup Assessment Group as following.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Assessment Group Term" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/assessment/assessment-group-term.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Assessment Group Term" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/assessment/assessment-group-term.png">
On the same lines, you can also define multiple Assessment Group bases on assessment conducted in your institute.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Assessment Group Term" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/assessment/assessment-group-details.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Assessment Group Term" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/assessment/assessment-group-details.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_plan.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_plan.md
index bd01a3c..8a3d427 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_plan.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_plan.md
@@ -12,10 +12,10 @@
4. Examiner and Supervisor
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Assessment Plan Details" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/assessment/assessment-plan-details.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Assessment Plan Details" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/assessment/assessment-plan-details.png">
5. Assessment Criteria is list of criteria based which each student in will be evaluated and grades will be assigned.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Assessment Plan Criteria" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/assessment/assessment-plan-criteria.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Assessment Plan Criteria" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/assessment/assessment-plan-criteria.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_result.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_result.md
index c77ea3c..766f5d8 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_result.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_result.md
@@ -2,8 +2,8 @@
#Assessment Result
-Assessment Result is a log of marks/grades earned by the student for specific Assessment. Assessment Result is created in the backend based on the marks entered in the [Assessment Result Tool]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/schools/assessment/assessment_result_tool.html).
+Assessment Result is a log of marks/grades earned by the student for specific Assessment. Assessment Result is created in the backend based on the marks entered in the [Assessment Result Tool](/docs/user/manual/en/schools/assessment/assessment_result_tool.html).
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Assessment Result" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/assessment/assessment-result.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Assessment Result" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/assessment/assessment-result.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_result_tool.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_result_tool.md
index 827a625..3e60835 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_result_tool.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_result_tool.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
Assessment Result Tool help you entering marks earned by the Students for specific course. In this tool, based on the Assessment Plan, all the Student will be fetched into Assessment Result Tool. Also, Columns for Assessment Criteria will be where marks earned can be entered for each Student.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Assessment Result Tool" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/assessment/assessment-result-tool.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Assessment Result Tool" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/assessment/assessment-result-tool.png">
As you go on entering marks for a Student, and switch to next student, in the backend, Student Result record will be auto-created for that Student.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/grading_scale.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/grading_scale.md
index a3c40bb..11858dd 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/grading_scale.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/grading_scale.md
@@ -4,6 +4,6 @@
In the Grading Scale, you can define various grades and threshold for them. Based on the score earned by an Student for an Assessment, Grade will be assigned.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Grading Scale" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/assessment/grading-scale.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Grading Scale" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/assessment/grading-scale.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/program-enrollment.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/program-enrollment.md
index 3c9c2b4..2dcc6cb 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/program-enrollment.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/program-enrollment.md
@@ -2,6 +2,6 @@
This form allows you to enroll a student to a program. A student can be enrolled to multiple programs.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Student Applicant Enrollment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/admission/program-enrollment.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Student Applicant Enrollment" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/admission/program-enrollment.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/student-applicant.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/student-applicant.md
index 0a08f11..e67c1dc 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/student-applicant.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/student-applicant.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
A Student Applicant record needs to be created when a student applies for a program at your institute.
You can Approve or Reject a student applicant. By accepting a student applicant you can add them to the student master.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Student Applicant" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/admission/student-applicant.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Student Applicant" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/admission/student-applicant.png">
### Application Status
@@ -21,8 +21,8 @@
Once you approve a Student Applicant you can enroll them to a program. When you click the 'Enroll' buttom,
-the system shall create a student against that applicant and redirect you to the [Program Enrollment form]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/schools/student/program-enrollment.html).
+the system shall create a student against that applicant and redirect you to the [Program Enrollment form](/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/program-enrollment.html).
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Student Applicant Enrollment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/admission/student-applicant-enroll.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Student Applicant Enrollment" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/admission/student-applicant-enroll.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fee-category.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fee-category.md
index b333ffe..fbf43e6 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fee-category.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fee-category.md
@@ -2,6 +2,6 @@
List of all different type of fees collected.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Fees Category" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/fees/fee-category.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Fees Category" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/fees/fee-category.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fee-structure.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fee-structure.md
index a796b0c..a1dd9be 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fee-structure.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fee-structure.md
@@ -2,6 +2,6 @@
A Fee Structure is a template that can be used while making fee records.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Fees Structure" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/fees/fee-structure.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Fees Structure" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/fees/fee-structure.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fees.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fees.md
index 5745ec1..f17720c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fees.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fees.md
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
# Fees
Maintain a record of fees collected from students.
-The [Fee Structure]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fee-structure.html) is fetched based on the selected Program and Academic Term.
+The [Fee Structure](/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fee-structure.html) is fetched based on the selected Program and Academic Term.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Fees" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/fees/fees.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Fees" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/fees/fees.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/index.md
index ab07182..c5be5f6 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/index.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/index.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
This section contains 'Fee' related documents.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Fees Section" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/fees/fees-section.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Fees Section" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/fees/fees-section.png">
### Topics
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/index.md
index 80d7d7b..8c766d6 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/index.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/index.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
The School Modules is designed to meet requirements of Schools, Colleges & Educational Institutes.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Fees Section" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/module.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Fees Section" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/module.png">
{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/course-schedule.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/course-schedule.md
index d766f66..9f7d980 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/course-schedule.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/course-schedule.md
@@ -3,13 +3,13 @@
Course Schedule is the schedule of a session conducted by an Instructor for a particular Course.
You can see the overall course schedule in the Calendar view.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Course Schedule" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/schedule/course-schedule.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Course Schedule" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/schedule/course-schedule.png">
### Marking Attendance
You can mark attendance for a Student Group against a Course Schedule.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Course Schedule Attendance" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/schedule/course-schedule-att.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Course Schedule Attendance" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/schedule/course-schedule-att.png">
- To make attendance, expand the attendance section.
- Check the students who were present for that session.
@@ -20,6 +20,6 @@
Once you have marked Attendance against a Course Schedule the Attendance section in the Course Schedule shall be hidden.
A View Attendance button shall appear. Click on that button to view all attendance records created against that Course Schedule.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Course Schedule Attendance" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/schedule/course-schedule-att-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Course Schedule Attendance" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/schedule/course-schedule-att-1.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/examination.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/examination.md
index 14bc182..d167e9c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/examination.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/examination.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
The Examination record can be used to track the exam schedule and the results of that exam.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Examination" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/schedule/examination.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Examination" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/schedule/examination.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/index.md
index 8d343bf..57e578b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/index.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/index.md
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
# Schedule
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Schedule Section" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/schedule/schedule-section.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Schedule Section" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/schedule/schedule-section.png">
### Topics
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/scheduling-tool.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/scheduling-tool.md
index a5eb9f2..9e13d6d 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/scheduling-tool.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/scheduling-tool.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
This tool can be used to create 'Course Schedules'.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Scheduling Tool" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/schedule/scheduling-tool.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Scheduling Tool" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/schedule/scheduling-tool.png">
### Creating Course Schedules
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/student-attendance.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/student-attendance.md
index ef89e5d..84e1ea8 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/student-attendance.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/student-attendance.md
@@ -2,6 +2,6 @@
Maintains attendance record of the student. Attendance Records can be created against Course Schedules.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Student Attendance" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/schedule/student-attendance.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Student Attendance" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/schedule/student-attendance.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/academic-term.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/academic-term.md
index f268fd0..6306444 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/academic-term.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/academic-term.md
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
# Academic Term
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Academic Term" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/setup/academic-term.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Academic Term" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/setup/academic-term.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/academic-year.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/academic-year.md
index 1d836f8..3913eb6 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/academic-year.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/academic-year.md
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
# Academic Year
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Academic Year" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/setup/academic-year.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Academic Year" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/setup/academic-year.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/course.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/course.md
index b6c1aca..140131d 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/course.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/course.md
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
# Course
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Course" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/setup/course.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Course" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/setup/course.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/index.md
index 23054ad..9de7536 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/index.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/index.md
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
# Setup
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Setup Section" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/setup/setup-section.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Setup Section" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/setup/setup-section.png">
### Topics
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/instructor.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/instructor.md
index 7bfd348..1a4d351 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/instructor.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/instructor.md
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
# Instructor
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Instructor" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/setup/instructor.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Instructor" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/setup/instructor.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/program.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/program.md
index 2f1c207..64513e2 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/program.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/program.md
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
# Program
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Program" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/setup/program.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Program" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/setup/program.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/room.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/room.md
index 9ec39e8..bb265e3 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/room.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/room.md
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
# Room
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Room" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/setup/room.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Room" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/setup/room.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-batch.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-batch.md
index 3a6c82f..4987c03 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-batch.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-batch.md
@@ -2,6 +2,6 @@
Student batch is a collection of students from Student Groups.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Student" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/student/student-batch.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Student" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/student/student-batch.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-group-creation-tool.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-group-creation-tool.md
index 63c45c9..130c944 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-group-creation-tool.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-group-creation-tool.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
This tool allows you to create student groups in bulk. You can specify multiple parameters to create them.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Student Group Creation Tool" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/student/student-group-creation-tool.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Student Group Creation Tool" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/student/student-group-creation-tool.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-group.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-group.md
index 91118c7..191e917 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-group.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-group.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
A student group is a collection of students taking a same course. You can create Course Schedules and Examinations against a Student Group.
A student group needs to be created for every course in a particular academic term and academic year.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Student Group" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/student/student-group.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Student Group" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/student/student-group.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-log.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-log.md
index 028d136..a037a23 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-log.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-log.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
You can make a note of student activities using student log.
Logs can be categorised as 'General', 'Academic', 'Medical' or 'Achievement'
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Student" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/student/student-log.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Student" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/student/student-log.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student.md
index 2caaf06..dd99a80 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student.md
@@ -5,6 +5,6 @@
You can view everything related to a particular student on this page. Eg : Fees, Student Group, etc
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Student" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/schools/student/student.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Student" src="/docs/assets/img/schools/student/student.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/Selling-in-different-UOM.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/Selling-in-different-UOM.md
index bffbc17..2589133 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/Selling-in-different-UOM.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/Selling-in-different-UOM.md
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
###Step 1: In the Item master, under Unit of Measure section, you can list all the possible UoM of an item, with its UoM Conversion Factor. Update UoM Conversion Factors
In one Box, if you get 10 Nos. of Pen, UoM Conversion Factor would be 10.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Item Unit of Measure" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/Item-UOM.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Item Unit of Measure" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/Item-UOM.png">
###Setp 2: In the Sale Order, you will find two UoM fields
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@
In both the fields, default UoM of an item will be fetched by default. You should edit UoM field, and select Sale UoM (Box in this case). Updating Sales UoM is mainly for the reference of the Customer. In the print format, you will see item quantity in the Sales UoM.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sale order Unit of Measure" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/Sale-Order-UOM.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sale order Unit of Measure" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/Sale-Order-UOM.png">
Based on the Qty and Conversion Factor, qty will be calculated in the Stock UoM of an item. If you sell just one Box, then Qty as per stock UoM will be set as 10.
@@ -28,4 +28,4 @@
Irrespective of the Sales UoM selected in the Sale Order, stock ledger posting will be done in the Default UoM of an item. Hence you should ensure that conversion factor is entered correctly while selling item in different UoM.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock report in UOM" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/stock ledger for as STOCK-UOM.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock report in UOM" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/stock ledger for as STOCK-UOM.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/adding-margin.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/adding-margin.md
index 2b5ef9b..fd96d46 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/adding-margin.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/adding-margin.md
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
####Adding Margin in Pricing Rule
-<img alt="Adding Margin in Pricing Rule" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/margin-pricing-rule.png">
+<img alt="Adding Margin in Pricing Rule" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/margin-pricing-rule.png">
Total Margin is calculated as follows:
`Rate = Price List Rate + Margin Rate`
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
####Adding Item Price
-<img alt="Adding Margin in Pricing Rule" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/margin-item-price-list.png">
+<img alt="Adding Margin in Pricing Rule" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/margin-item-price-list.png">
2) Apply margin direct on Item: If user wants to apply the margin without pricing rule, they can use this option. In Quotation Item and Sales Order Item, user can select the margin type and rate or amount. The system will calculate the margin and apply it on price list rate to calculate the rate of the product.
@@ -36,4 +36,4 @@
####Adding Margin in Quotation
-<img alt="Adding Margin in Quotation" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/margin-quotation-item.png">
+<img alt="Adding Margin in Quotation" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/margin-quotation-item.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/applying-discount.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/applying-discount.md
index 887e94f..a2a62a4 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/applying-discount.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/applying-discount.md
@@ -8,28 +8,28 @@
You can find the Discount (%) field in the Item table. Discount (%) is applied on the Price List Rate to get the selling Rate of the Item.
-<img alt="Discount Percentage" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/discount-1.png">
+<img alt="Discount Percentage" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/discount-1.png">
The feature of Discount (%) is available in all sales and purchase transactions.
-You can use Pricing Rule for auto-application of Discount (%). [Click here to learn how Pricing Rule functions.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/pricing-rule.html)
+You can use Pricing Rule for auto-application of Discount (%). [Click here to learn how Pricing Rule functions.](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/pricing-rule.html)
#### 2. Discount on Net Total and Grand Total
In the "Additional Discount" section, you can apply discount as amount or as percentage.
-<img alt="Discount Percentage" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/discount-2.png">
+<img alt="Discount Percentage" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/discount-2.png">
##### Discount on Net Total
If Discount Amount is applied on **Net Total**, then item's Net Rate and Net Amount is calculated as per the Discount Amount. Net Rate and Amount field will be visible only if Discount is applied using this feature.
-<img alt="Discount Percentage" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/discount-on-net-total.png">
+<img alt="Discount Percentage" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/discount-on-net-total.png">
##### Discount on Grand Total
If Discount Amount is applied based on the **Grand Total**, then with item's Net Rate, Net Amount as well as taxes are also re-calculated as per Discount Amount.
-<img alt="Discount Percentage" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/discount-on-grand-total.png">
+<img alt="Discount Percentage" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/discount-on-grand-total.png">
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/close-sales-order.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/close-sales-order.md
index 1ffc934..0b41a64 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/close-sales-order.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/close-sales-order.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
In the submitted Sales Orders, you will find **Stop** option. Stopping Sales Order will restrict user from creating Delivery Note and Sales Invoice against it.
-<img alt="Close SO" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/close-1.png">
+<img alt="Close SO" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/close-1.png">
####Scenario
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
In this case, create Delivery Note and Sales Invoice will be created only for the seven units. And the Sales Order should be set as stopped.
-<img alt="Closed SO" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/close-2.png">
+<img alt="Closed SO" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/close-2.png">
Once Sales Order is set as stopped, you will not have pending quantities (three in this case) reflecting in Pending to Deliver and Pending to Invoice reports. To make further transactions against Stopped Sales Order, you should first Unstop it.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/drop-shipping.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/drop-shipping.md
index dfe1898..fd39d48 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/drop-shipping.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/drop-shipping.md
@@ -12,19 +12,19 @@
Set **_Delivered by Supplier (Drop Ship)_** and **_Default Supplier_** in Item Master.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Setup Item Master" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/setup-drop-ship-on-item-master.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Setup Item Master" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/setup-drop-ship-on-item-master.png">
#### Setup on Sales Order
If Drop Shipping has set on Item master, it will automatically set **Supplier delivers to Customer** and **Supplier** on Sales Order Item.
You can setup Drop Shipping, on Sales Order Item. Under **Drop Ship** section, set **Supplier delivers to Customer** and select **Supplier** agaist which Purchase Order will get created.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Setup Drop Shipping on Sales Order Item" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/setup-drop-ship-on-sales-order-item.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Setup Drop Shipping on Sales Order Item" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/setup-drop-ship-on-sales-order-item.png">
#### Create Purchase Order
After submitting a Sales Order, create Puchase Order.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Setup Drop Shipping on Sales Order Item" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/drop-ship-sales-order.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Setup Drop Shipping on Sales Order Item" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/drop-ship-sales-order.png">
From Sales Order, all items, having **Supplier delivers to Customer** checked or **Supplier**(matching with supplier selected on For Supplier popup) mentioned, will get mapped onto Purchase Order.
@@ -32,16 +32,16 @@
After submitting Purchase Order, to update delivery status, use **Mark as Delivered** button on Purchase Order. It will update delivery percetage and delivered quantity on Sales Order.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Order for Drop Shipping" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/drop-ship-purchase-order.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Order for Drop Shipping" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/drop-ship-purchase-order.png">
<span style="color:#18B52D">**_Close_**</span>, is a new feature introduced on **Purchase Order** and **Sales Order**, to close or to mark fulfillment.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Close Sales Order" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/close-sales-order.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Close Sales Order" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/close-sales-order.png">
###Drop Shipping Print Format
You can notify, Suppliers by sending a email after submitting Purchase Order by attaching Drop Shipping print format.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Drop Dhip Print Format" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/drop-ship-print-format.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Drop Dhip Print Format" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/drop-ship-print-format.png">
###Video Help on Drop Ship
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/erpnext-for-services-organization.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/erpnext-for-services-organization.md
index e842b1c..09d071f 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/erpnext-for-services-organization.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/erpnext-for-services-organization.md
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
To create a Service (non-stock) Item, in the item master, uncheck "Maintain Stock" field.
-<img alt="Service Item" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/services-1.png">
+<img alt="Service Item" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/services-1.png">
When creating Sales Order for the services, select Order Type as **Maintenance**. Sales Order of Maintenance Type needs lesser details compared to stock item's order like Delivery Note, item warehouse etc.
@@ -34,11 +34,11 @@
Within the form, there are many fields only needed for companies into trading and manufacturing businesses. These fields can be hidden for the service company. Feature Setup is a tool where you can enable/disable specific feature. If a feature is disabled, then fields relevant to that feature is hidden from all the forms. For example, if Serial No. feature is disabled, then Serial. No. field from Item as well as from all the sales and purchase transaction will be hidden.
-[To learn more about Feature Setup, click here.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.html).
+[To learn more about Feature Setup, click here.](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.html).
####Permissions
-ERPNext is the permission controlled system. Users access system based on permissions assigned to them. So, if user is not assigned Role related to Stock and Manufacturing module, it will be hidden from that User. [Click here to learn more about permission management.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions.html).
+ERPNext is the permission controlled system. Users access system based on permissions assigned to them. So, if user is not assigned Role related to Stock and Manufacturing module, it will be hidden from that User. [Click here to learn more about permission management.](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions.html).
You can also refer to help video on User and Permissions setting in ERPNext.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions.md
index decaa7f..8cbfd1f 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions.md
@@ -2,17 +2,17 @@
#Sales Persons in the Sales Transactions
-In ERPNext, Sales Person master is maintained in [tree structure]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters.html). Sales Person is selectable in all the sales transactions.
+In ERPNext, Sales Person master is maintained in [tree structure](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters.html). Sales Person is selectable in all the sales transactions.
Sales Persons can be updated in the Customer master as well. On selection of Customer in the transactions, Sales Persons as updated in the Customer will fetch into sales transaction.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Person Customer" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/sales-person-transaction-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Person Customer" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/sales-person-transaction-1.png">
####Sales Person Contribution
If more than one sales persons are working together on an order, then contribution (%) should be set for each Sales Person.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Person Order" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/sales-person-transaction-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Person Order" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/sales-person-transaction-2.png">
On saving transaction, based on the Net Total and Contriution (%), `Contribution to Net Total` will be calculated for each Sales Person.
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
This report can be generated based on Sales Order, Delivery Note and Sales Invoice. It will give you total amount of sale made by an employe.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Person Report" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/sales-person-transaction-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Person Report" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/sales-person-transaction-3.png">
####Sales Person wise Commission
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/shipping-rule.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/shipping-rule.md
index 6bdf406..fc82ba4 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/shipping-rule.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/shipping-rule.md
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
####Shipping Rule Conditions
-<img alt="Shipping Rule Prices" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/shipping-charges-1.png">
+<img alt="Shipping Rule Prices" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/shipping-charges-1.png">
Referring above, you will notice that shipping charges are reducing as valye is increasing. This shipping charge will only be applied if transaction total falls under one of the above range.
@@ -20,16 +20,16 @@
You can set Shipping Charges valid for all the countries, or specify specific Country. If specific countries mentioned, then Shipping Charges will be applied only if Customer's country matches Country mentioned in the Shipping Rule.
-<img alt="Shipping Rule " class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/shipping-charges-2.gif">
+<img alt="Shipping Rule " class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/shipping-charges-2.gif">
####Shipping Account
If shipping charges are applied based on Shipping Rule, then more values like Shipping Account, Cost Center will be needed as well to add row in the Taxes and Other Charges table of transaction. Hence these details are tracked as well in the Shipping Rule.
-<img alt="Shipping Account" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/shipping-charges-3.png">
+<img alt="Shipping Account" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/shipping-charges-3.png">
####Shipping Rule Application
Following is an example of how shipping charges is auto-applied on Sales Order based on Shipping Rule.
-<img alt="Shipping Rule Application" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/shipping-charges-4.gif">
\ No newline at end of file
+<img alt="Shipping Rule Application" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/shipping-charges-4.gif">
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/quotation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/quotation.md
index 0c8525b..80af009 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/quotation.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/quotation.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
A typical Selling flow looks like:
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Make Quotation from Opportunity" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/selling-flow.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Make Quotation from Opportunity" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/selling-flow.png">
To create a new Quotation navigate to:
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
You can also create a Quotation from an Opportunity.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Make Quotation from Opportunity" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/make-quote-from-opp.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Make Quotation from Opportunity" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/make-quote-from-opp.png">
A Quotation contains details about:
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
The rates you quote may depend on two things.
- * The Price List: If you have multiple Price Lists, you can select a Price List or tag it to the Customer (so that it is auto-selected). Your Item prices will automatically be updated from the Price List. For details refer [Price List]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/price-lists.html)
+ * The Price List: If you have multiple Price Lists, you can select a Price List or tag it to the Customer (so that it is auto-selected). Your Item prices will automatically be updated from the Price List. For details refer [Price List](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/price-lists.html)
* The Currency: If you are quoting to a Customer in a different currency, you will have to update the conversion rates to enable ERPNext to save the information in your standard Currency. This will help you to analyze the value of your Quotations in standard Currency.
@@ -46,9 +46,9 @@
For e.g
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Taxes and Charges" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/taxes-and-charges.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Taxes and Charges" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/taxes-and-charges.gif">
-To understand taxes in detail visit [Taxes]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html).
+To understand taxes in detail visit [Taxes](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html).
### Terms and Conditions
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-order.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-order.md
index b103038..05f178b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-order.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-order.md
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
### Sales Order Flow-Chart
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Order flow" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/sales-order-f.jpg">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Order flow" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/sales-order-f.jpg">
To create a new Sales Order go to:
@@ -21,11 +21,11 @@
You can also create a Sales Order from a submitted Quotation.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Make Sales Order from Quotation" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/make-SO-from-quote.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Make Sales Order from Quotation" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/make-SO-from-quote.png">
Or you can create a new Sales Order and pull details from an Quotation.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Make Sales Order from Quotation" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/make-so.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Make Sales Order from Quotation" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/make-so.gif">
Most of the information in your Sales Order is the same as the Quotation.
There are a few amongst other things that a Sales Order will ask you to
@@ -56,9 +56,9 @@
For e.g
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Taxes and Charges" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/taxes-and-charges.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Taxes and Charges" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/taxes-and-charges.gif">
-To understand taxes in detail visit [Taxes]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html).
+To understand taxes in detail visit [Taxes](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html).
### Sales Team
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@
ERPNext will automatically create new Order and mail a notification to the Email Addresses you set in the 'Notification Email Address'field.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Reccuring Sales Order" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/recurring-sales-order.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Reccuring Sales Order" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/recurring-sales-order.png">
### Next Steps
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/item-price.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/item-price.md
index adeeee4..7e352b9 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/item-price.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/item-price.md
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
You can create multiple Price List in ERPNext to track Selling and Buying Price List of an item separtely. Also if item's selling prices id changing based on territory, or due to other criteria, you can create multiple selling Price List for it.
-+<img class="screenshot" alt="Item Price list" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-price-1.png">
++<img class="screenshot" alt="Item Price list" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-price-1.png">
On selection of Price List, its currency and for selling or buying property will be fetched as well.
@@ -26,13 +26,13 @@
Select item for which Item Price record is to be created. On selection of Item Code, Item Name and Description will be fetched as well.
-+<img class="screenshot" alt="Item Price list" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-price-2.png">
++<img class="screenshot" alt="Item Price list" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-price-2.png">
Step 3: Enter Rate
Enter selling/buying rate of an item in Price List currency.
-+<img class="screenshot" alt="Item Price list" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-price-3.png">
++<img class="screenshot" alt="Item Price list" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-price-3.png">
Step 4: Save Item Price
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/product-bundle.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/product-bundle.md
index ffee76c..b587374 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/product-bundle.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/product-bundle.md
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
Selling > Setup > Product Bundle > New
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Product Bundle" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/product-bundle.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Product Bundle" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/product-bundle.png">
###Select Parent Item
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
When making Sales transactions (Sales Invoice, Sales Order, Delivery Note)
the Parent Item will be selected in the main item table.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Product Bundle" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/product-bundle.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Product Bundle" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/product-bundle.gif">
On selection of a Parent Item in the main item table, its child items will be fetched in Packing List
table of the transaction. If child item is the serialized item, you will be able to specify its Serial Mo.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-partner.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-partner.md
index 0eee169..d8bf0d0 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-partner.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-partner.md
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
Sales Partners are saved with Sales Partner name provided by user.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Partner" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/sales-partner.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Partner" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/sales-partner.png">
You can track their address and contact details and also allocate Sales Partner for each Item Group, based on Qty and Amount.
@@ -21,13 +21,13 @@
To include the name of your Partner on your website, check the "Show in
Website" box. When click on "Show in Website", you will see field where you can attach logo of partner's company and enter brief and introduction of partner.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Partner" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/sales-partner-website.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Partner" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/sales-partner-website.png">
To see listing of partner, you should go to:
https://example.erpnext.com/partners
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Partner" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/sales-partner-listing.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Partner" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/sales-partner-listing.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-person-target-allocation.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-person-target-allocation.md
index 86d4cab..874a95e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-person-target-allocation.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-person-target-allocation.md
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
In the Sales Person master, you will find table called Sales Person Target.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales person target " src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/sales-person-target-item-group.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales person target " src="/docs/assets/img/selling/sales-person-target-item-group.png">
In this table, you should select Item Group, Fiscal Year, Target Qty and Amount.
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
If you wish to spread allocated target across months, then you should setup Monthly Distribution master, and select it in the Sales Person master. Considering our example, target for the month of December will be set as 5 qty (10% of total allocation).
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Target Distribution" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/im/selling/sales-person-target-distribution.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Target Distribution" src="/docs/assets/im/selling/sales-person-target-distribution.gif">
####Report - Sales Person Target Variance Item Groupwise
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
This report will provide you variance between target and actual performance of Sales Person. This report is based on Sales Order report.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Target Item Group" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/sales-person-item-group-report.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Target Item Group" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/sales-person-item-group-report.png">
As per the report, allocated target to Sales Person for the month of December was 5 qty. However, Sales Order was made for this employee and Item Group for only 3 qty. Hence, variance of 2 qty is shown in the report.
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@
In the Territory master, you will find field to select Territory Manager. This field is linked to "Sales Person" master.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Person Territory Manager" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/sales-person-territory-manager.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Person Territory Manager" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/sales-person-territory-manager.png">
####2.2 Allocating Target
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@
This report will provide you variance between target and actual performance of Sales in particular territory. This report is based on Sales Order report. Though Sales Person is defined in the Territory master, its details are not pulled in the report.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Person Territory Report" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/sales-person-territory-report.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Person Territory Report" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/sales-person-territory-report.png">
---
@@ -78,13 +78,13 @@
`Accounts > Monthly Distributon`
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Target Distribution" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img.selling/erpnext/target-distribution.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Target Distribution" src="/docs/assets/img.selling/erpnext/target-distribution.png">
You can link Monthly Distribution while allocating targets in Sales Person as well as in Territory master.
###See Also
-1. [Sales Person Target Allocation]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-person-target-allocation)
-2. [Using Sales Person in transactions]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions)
+1. [Sales Person Target Allocation](/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-person-target-allocation)
+2. [Using Sales Person in transactions](/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions)
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/selling-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/selling-settings.md
index 840abe5..96dbc29 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/selling-settings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/selling-settings.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
Selling Setting is where you can define propertiese which will be applied in your selling transactions.
Let's check into each property one by one.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Selling Settings" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/selling-settings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Selling Settings" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/selling-settings.png">
####1. Customer Naming By
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/shipping-rule.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/shipping-rule.md
index b9de2cf..0d8c269 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/shipping-rule.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/shipping-rule.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
Using Shipping Rule you can define the cost for delivering the product to the customer.
You can define different shipping rules for the same item across different territories.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Shipping Rule" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/selling/shipping-rule.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Shipping Rule" src="/docs/assets/img/selling/shipping-rule.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/change-password.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/change-password.md
index fe2a996..1a36d8a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/change-password.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/change-password.md
@@ -7,11 +7,11 @@
####Step 1: Go to My Setting
-<img alt="Change Password" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/change-password-1.png">
+<img alt="Change Password" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/change-password-1.png">
####Step 2: Set New Password
-<img alt="Change Password" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/change-password-2.png">
+<img alt="Change Password" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/change-password-2.png">
Enter the new password and save the form to save changes.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/delete-a-company-and-all-related-transactions.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/delete-a-company-and-all-related-transactions.md
index f2879fa..66db2ec 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/delete-a-company-and-all-related-transactions.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/delete-a-company-and-all-related-transactions.md
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
This action will wipe out all the data related to that company like Quotation, Invoices, Purchase Orders etc. So be careful
-<img alt="Delete Transactions" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/delete-transactions.gif">
+<img alt="Delete Transactions" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/delete-transactions.gif">
**Note:** If you want to delete the company record itself, use the normal "Delete" button from Menu options. It will also delete Chart of Accounts, Chart of Cost Centers and Warehouse records for that company.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/edit-submitted-document.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/edit-submitted-document.md
index b3d9472..09f1f6b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/edit-submitted-document.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/edit-submitted-document.md
@@ -8,19 +8,19 @@
You will find Cancel button on upper right corner of submitted document.
-<img alt="Cancel Doc" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/edit-submitted-doc-1.png">
+<img alt="Cancel Doc" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/edit-submitted-doc-1.png">
####Step 2: Amend the document
On cancellation of submitted document, Amend button will be became visible.
-<img alt="Amend Doc" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/edit-submitted-doc-2.png">
+<img alt="Amend Doc" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/edit-submitted-doc-2.png">
####Step 3: Save and Submit the document
On clicking Amend button, same document will become editable again. After Making required changes, save and submit the document.
-<img alt="Resave and Submit Doc" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/edit-submitted-doc-3.png">
+<img alt="Resave and Submit Doc" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/edit-submitted-doc-3.png">
<div class="well">Note: If your document linked with other documents, then you will need to cancel last document you made on top of this document.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/manage-header-and-footer.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/manage-header-and-footer.md
index b86033e..679f0c8 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/manage-header-and-footer.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/manage-header-and-footer.md
@@ -4,8 +4,8 @@
Check following to learn how to setup Letter Head in ERPNext.
-[Managing Letter head]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-5-letterhead-and-logo.html)
+[Managing Letter head](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-5-letterhead-and-logo.html)
ERPNext doesn't have option to define standard Footer. As a work around, you can use Terms and Condition master for footer. Content of Terms and Condition is already the last to appear in the standard print formats on transactions. Check following link to learn how to manage Terms and Conditions in ERPNext.
-[Terms and Condition]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.html)
+[Terms and Condition](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.html)
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-multiple-companies.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-multiple-companies.md
index ac2b9c1..8957408 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-multiple-companies.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-multiple-companies.md
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
In one account has multiple companies, you will find option to select Company in each transactions. While most of the records (mostly transactions) will be separated based on Company, there are few masters like Item, Item Group, Customer Group, Territory etc. which are common among all the companies.
-If you have separate teams working on each company, you can restrict access of the User to the data of specific Company. Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/) to know how to set permission rules for giving restricted access to the User.
+If you have separate teams working on each company, you can restrict access of the User to the data of specific Company. Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/) to know how to set permission rules for giving restricted access to the User.
Following are the steps to add new Company.
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
Company will be saved with Company Name provided.
-<img alt="New Company" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/new-company-1.png">
+<img alt="New Company" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/new-company-1.png">
Also, you can define other properties for new company like:
@@ -30,13 +30,13 @@
Value will be auto-filled in most of these field to define company-wise defaults. You can edit/customize it as per your requirement.
-<img alt="New Company" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/new-company-2.png">
+<img alt="New Company" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/new-company-2.png">
####Chart of Account for New Company
A separate Chart of Account master will be set for each company in the ERPNext. This allows you managing Accounts/Ledger master separately for each company. Also it allows you avail financial statement and reports like Balance Sheet and Profit and Loss Statement separately for each company.
-<img alt="New Company" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/new-company-3.png">
+<img alt="New Company" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/new-company-3.png">
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-perm-level.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-perm-level.md
index 9f19530..9923645 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-perm-level.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-perm-level.md
@@ -4,9 +4,9 @@
In each document, you can group fields by "levels". Each group of field is denoted by a unique number (0, 1, 2, 3 etc.). A separate set of permission rules can be applied to each field group. By default all fields are of level 0.
-Perm Level for a field can be defined in the [Customize Form]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/customize-form.html).
+Perm Level for a field can be defined in the [Customize Form](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/customize-form.html).
-<img alt="Perm Level Field" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/perm-level-1.gif">
+<img alt="Perm Level Field" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/perm-level-1.gif">
If you need to assign different permission of particular field to different users, you can achieve it via Perm Level. Let's consider an example for better understanding.
@@ -16,11 +16,11 @@
For Stock Manager, they will have permission on fields on Delivery Note as Perm Level 2 whereas a Stock User will not have any permission on Perm Level 2 for Delivery Note.
-<img alt="Perm Level Rule" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/perm-level-2.png">
+<img alt="Perm Level Rule" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/perm-level-2.png">
Considering the same scenario, if you want a Stock User to access a field at Perm Level 2, but not edit it, the Stock User will be assigned permission on Perm Level 2, but only for read, and not for write/edit.
-<img alt="Perm Level Rule 2" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/perm-level-3.png">
+<img alt="Perm Level Rule 2" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/perm-level-3.png">
Perm Level (1, 2, 3) not need be in order. Perm Level is primarily for grouping number of fields together, and then assigning permission to Roles for that group. Hence, you can set any perm level for an item, and then do permission setting for it.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters.md
index 89d4433..021f36a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters.md
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
####Step 2 : Parent Territory
-<img alt="Default Territories" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/territory-2.png">
+<img alt="Default Territories" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/territory-2.png">
When click on Parent territory, you will see option to add child territory under it. All default Territory groups will be listed under Parent group called "All Territories". You can add further Parent or child Territory Groups under it.
@@ -44,11 +44,11 @@
<div class="well">Only child Territory Groups are selectable in another masters and transactions.</div>
-<img alt="Default Territories" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/territory-1.gif">
+<img alt="Default Territories" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/territory-1.gif">
Following is how Child Territories will be listed under a Parent Territory.
-<img alt="Adding new Territories" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/territory-3.png">
+<img alt="Adding new Territories" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/territory-3.png">
Following this steps, you can manage other tree masters as well in ERPNext.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/naming-series-current-value.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/naming-series-current-value.md
index 9d9e84c..c6b6abe 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/naming-series-current-value.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/naming-series-current-value.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
#Setting the Current Value for Naming Series
-Naming Series feature allows you to define prefix for naming of a documents. For example, if a Sales Order has prefix "SO", then the series will be generated as SO-00001, SO-00002... and so on. Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/naming-series.html) to learn how you can customize Number Series for a transaction/master in ERPNext.
+Naming Series feature allows you to define prefix for naming of a documents. For example, if a Sales Order has prefix "SO", then the series will be generated as SO-00001, SO-00002... and so on. Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/naming-series.html) to learn how you can customize Number Series for a transaction/master in ERPNext.
### 1. Setting the Current Value
@@ -16,19 +16,19 @@
#### Update Series Section
-<img alt="Update Series Section" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/current-no-1.png">
+<img alt="Update Series Section" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/current-no-1.png">
#### Select Prefix
Considering our scenario, prefix for Sales Order will be "SO".
-<img alt="Series Prefix" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/current-no-2.png">
+<img alt="Series Prefix" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/current-no-2.png">
#### Current Value
If you have currently 12 Sales Orders created in your account, then current value updated will be 12. You can edit Current Value to 322, and then click on Update Series Number.
-<img alt="Series Current Value" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/current-no-3.png">
+<img alt="Series Current Value" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/current-no-3.png">
With this setting, you will have numbering for the New Sales Orders starting with #323.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/overwriting-data-from-data-import-tool.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/overwriting-data-from-data-import-tool.md
index 740faa6..4632af4 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/overwriting-data-from-data-import-tool.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/overwriting-data-from-data-import-tool.md
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
Since items to be over-written will be already available in the system, while downloading template, click on "Download with data" to get all the existing items in the template.
-<img alt="Download Template" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/overwrite-1.gif">
+<img alt="Download Template" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/overwrite-1.gif">
####Step 2: Prepare Data
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
Enter new value in the Item Group column for an item. Since Item Group is a master in itself, ensure Item Group entered in the spreadsheet file is already added in the Item Group master.
-<img alt="Update Values" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/overwrite-2.png">
+<img alt="Update Values" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/overwrite-2.png">
Since we are overwriting only Item Group, only following columns will be mandatory.
@@ -38,13 +38,13 @@
After updating Item Groups in spreadheet, come back to Data Import Tool in ERPNext. Browse and select the File/template which has data to be overwritten.
-<img alt="Browse template" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/overwrite-3.gif">
+<img alt="Browse template" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/overwrite-3.gif">
####Step 4: Upload
On clicking Import, Item Group will be over-written.
-<img alt="Upload" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/overwrite-4.png">
+<img alt="Upload" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/overwrite-4.png">
If validation of values fails, then it will indicate row no. of spreadsheet for which validation failed and needs correction. In that case, you should corrected value in that row of spreadsheet, and then import same file again. If validation fails even for one row, none of the records are imported/overwritten.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/rename-user.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/rename-user.md
index 0a89824..71f7b8b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/rename-user.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/rename-user.md
@@ -16,13 +16,13 @@
From Menu, select Rename.
-<img alt="Rename" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/rename-user-1.png">
+<img alt="Rename" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/rename-user-1.png">
#### Step 3: Update
Enter valid Email Address and click on Rename.
-<img alt="Update" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/rename-user-2.png">
+<img alt="Update" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/rename-user-2.png">
After successful renaming, User will be able login using updated user id.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/authorization-rule.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/authorization-rule.md
index 8b99894..8221366 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/authorization-rule.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/authorization-rule.md
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
Set Above Value. Given the exmaple, Above Value will be set as 10000.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Authorization Rule" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/auth-rule.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Authorization Rule" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/auth-rule.png">
If Sales User tries submitting Sales Order of value higher than 10000, then he will get error message.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/bar-code.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/bar-code.md
index 4e378b5..e317628 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/bar-code.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/bar-code.md
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
#### Figure 1: Check the box 'Item Barcode'
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Barcode" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/barcode-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Barcode" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/barcode-1.png">
To start scanning with a bar-code, go to
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
#### Figure 2: Check the box 'Is POS'
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Barcode" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/barcode-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Barcode" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/barcode-2.png">
Go to Item and click on Add new row.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/bulk-rename.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/bulk-rename.md
index e1c8b13..57db1a5 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/bulk-rename.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/bulk-rename.md
@@ -12,4 +12,4 @@
To rename multiple records, upload a **.csv** file with the old name in the first column and the new name in the second column and click on **Upload**.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Bulk Rename" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/data/rename.png">
\ No newline at end of file
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Bulk Rename" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/data/rename.png">
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.md
index 6678223..b9c6ccc 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
To Open the data import tool, you either go to Setup or go to the Transaction you want to Import. If Data Import is allowed, you will see an Import Button:
-<img alt="Start Import" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/data-import/data-import-1.png">
+<img alt="Start Import" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/data-import/data-import-1.png">
The tool has two sections, one to download a template and the second to upload
the data.
@@ -25,33 +25,33 @@
* Click on "Download Blank Template".
* For bulk editing, you can click on "Download With Data".
-<img alt="Download Template" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/data-import/data-import-tool-template.gif">
+<img alt="Download Template" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/data-import/data-import-tool-template.gif">
### 2\. Fill in the Template
After downloading the template, open it in a spreadsheet application and fill
in the data below the column headings.
-<img alt="Download Template" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/data-import/import-file.png">
+<img alt="Download Template" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/data-import/import-file.png">
Then export your template or save it as a Excel or Comma Separated Values (CSV)
file. To export the document in Excel tick the checkbox for Download in Excel File Format
-<img alt="Download Template" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/data-import/import-csv.png">
+<img alt="Download Template" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/data-import/import-csv.png">
### Download in Excel
-<img alt="Download Template" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/data-import/data-import-excel.png">
+<img alt="Download Template" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/data-import/data-import-excel.png">
### 3\. Upload the File ethier in .xlsx or .csv
Finally attach the file in the section. Click on the "Upload". Once the upload is successfull click Import"
button.
-<img alt="Upload" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/data-import/data-import-3.png">
+<img alt="Upload" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/data-import/data-import-3.png">
-<img alt="Upload" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/data-import/data-import-4.png">
+<img alt="Upload" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/data-import/data-import-4.png">
#### Notes:
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-account.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-account.md
index d5aca1a..7e9b8a7 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-account.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-account.md
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
There are 2 types of email accounts, outgoing and incoming. Outgoing email accounts use an SMTP service to send emails and emails are retrived from your inbox using a IMAP or POP service. Most email providers such as GMail, Outlook or Yahoo provide these services.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Defining Criteria" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-account-list.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Defining Criteria" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-account-list.png">
### Outgoing Email Accounts
@@ -18,19 +18,19 @@
To setup an outgoing Email Account, check on **Enable Outgoing** and set your SMTP server settings, if you are using a popular email service, these will be preset for you.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Outgoing EMail" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-account-sending.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Outgoing EMail" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-account-sending.png">
### Incoming Email Accounts
To setup an incoming Email Account, check on **Enable Incoming** and set your POP3 settings, if you are using a popular email service, these will be preset for you.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Incoming EMail" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-account-incoming.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Incoming EMail" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-account-incoming.png">
### Setting Import Conditions for Email Import
Email Accounts allows you to set conditions according to the data of the incoming emails. The email will be imported to ERPNext only if the all conditions are true. For example if you want to import an email if the subject is "Some important email", you put doc.subject == "Some important email" in the conditions textbox. You can also set more complex conditions by combining them, as shown on the following screenshot.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Incoming EMail Conditions" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-account-incoming-conditions.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Incoming EMail Conditions" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-account-incoming-conditions.png">
### How ERPNext handles replies
@@ -40,6 +40,6 @@
If you would like ERPNext to notify you if an email is unreplied for a certain amount of time, then you can set **Notify if Unreplied**. Here you can set the number of minutes to wait before notifications are sent and whom the notifications must go to.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Incoming EMail" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-account-unreplied.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Incoming EMail" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-account-unreplied.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-alerts.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-alerts.md
index 8d239ea..2b89d7d 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-alerts.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-alerts.md
@@ -32,13 +32,13 @@
### Setting a Subject
You can retrieve the data for a particular field by using `doc.[field_name]`. To use it in your subject / message, you have to surround it with `{% raw %}{{ }}{% endraw %}`. These are called [Jinja](http://jinja.pocoo.org/) tags. So, for example to get the name of a document, you use `{% raw %}{{ doc.name }}{% endraw %}`. The below example sends an email on saving a Task with the Subject, "TASK##### has been created"
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Subject" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-alert-subject.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Subject" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-alert-subject.png">
### Setting Conditions
Email alerts allow you to set conditions according to the field data in your documents. For example, if you want to recieve an Email if a Lead has been saved as "Interested" as it's status, you put `doc.status == "Interested"` in the conditions textbox. You can also set more complex conditions by combining them.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Condition" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-alert-condition.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Condition" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-alert-condition.png">
The above example will send an Email Alert when a Task is saved with the status "Open" and the Expected End Date for the Task is the date on or before the date on which it was saved on.
@@ -74,14 +74,14 @@
Then you can use that as a condition in the **Condition** rules to ensure emails are not sent multiple times
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Property in Email Alert" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-alert-subject.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Property in Email Alert" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-alert-subject.png">
### Example
1. Defining the Criteria
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Defining Criteria" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-alert-1.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Defining Criteria" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-alert-1.png">
1. Setting the Recipients and Message
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Set Message" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-alert-2.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Set Message" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-alert-2.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-digest.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-digest.md
index 5fa836e..bceba37 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-digest.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-digest.md
@@ -12,6 +12,6 @@
Set your frequency, check all the items you want to receive in your weekly update and select the user ids whom you want to send the Digest to.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Email Digest" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-digest.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Email Digest" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-digest.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-inbox.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-inbox.md
index d098d0c..14dad78 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-inbox.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-inbox.md
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
`Setup > User > New User`
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Email User" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-user.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Email User" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-user.png">
#### Step 2: Create Email Domain
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
`Setup > Emails > Email Domain > New`
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Email Domain" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-domain.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Email Domain" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-domain.png">
Once you have configured an Email Domain for your Email Service, it will be used for creating Email Accounts for all the Users in your ERPNext account.
@@ -43,44 +43,44 @@
If you are creating an Email Account for your colleague who's Email Password is unknown to you, then check field "Awaiting Password". As per this setting, a User (for whom Email Account is created) will get a prompt to enter email password when accessing his/her ERPNext Account.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Email Password" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-password.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Email Password" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-password.png">
In the Email Account, select Email Domain only if you are using Email Service other than Email Services listed above. Else, you can just select Email Service, leave Email Domain blank and proceed forward.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Email Service" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-service.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Email Service" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-service.png">
>If you are creating an Email Account for Email Inbox of a User, then leave Append To field as blank.
-For more details on how to setup Email Account, [click here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-account.html").
+For more details on how to setup Email Account, [click here](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-account.html").
#### Step 4: Linking Email Account in User master
Once an Email Account is created for an User, select that Email Account in the User. This will ensure that emails pulled from the said Email ID will accessible only to this User in your ERPNext account.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Email User Link" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-user-link.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Email User Link" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-user-link.png">
## Email Inbox
If you have correctly configured Email Inbox as instructed above, then on the login of a User, Email Inbox icon will be visible. This will navigate user to Email Inbox view within the ERPNext account. All the Emails received on that email will be fetch and listed in the Email Inbox view. User will be able to open emails and take various actions against it.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Email Inbox" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-inbox.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Email Inbox" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-inbox.png">
#### Folders
In ERPNext, you can link multiple Email Accounts with the single User. To switch to Inbox of different email account and access other folders like Sent Emails, Spam, Trash, check Email Inbox option in the left bar.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Email Folders" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-folders.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Email Folders" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-folders.png">
#### Actions
On the emails in your inbox, you can take various actions like Reply, Forward, Mark as Spam or Trash.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Email Actions" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/email-actions.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Email Actions" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/email-actions.png">
#### Make Options
The Email Inbox within ERPNext also allow you to quickly create ERPNext transaction based on email received. From an Email itself, you can a Issue, Lead or Opportunity based on the context of the email.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Make from Email" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/make-from-email.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Make from Email" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/make-from-email.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-reports.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-reports.md
index a27a2dc..95db8ba 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-reports.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-reports.md
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
Select the Report, the user for which you want to create this report (permissions will apply for this user), the Email Addresses where you want this report emailed and the frequency of the report.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Make Auto Email Report" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/auto-email-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Make Auto Email Report" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/auto-email-1.png">
#### Step 2
@@ -22,11 +22,11 @@
Step 1. Select the Report, the user for which you want to create this report. Permissions will apply for this user
-<img class="screenshot" alt="With Filters" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/auto-email-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="With Filters" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/auto-email-2.png">
Click on the table to edit the table
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Edit Filters" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/auto-email-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Edit Filters" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/auto-email-3.png">
#### Test
@@ -34,4 +34,4 @@
Here is an example of the email you will receive for a report
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Report by Email" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/auto-email-4.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Report by Email" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/auto-email-4.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/sending-email.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/sending-email.md
index 504c76d..b4566de 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/sending-email.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/sending-email.md
@@ -2,8 +2,8 @@
In ERPNext you can send any document as email (with a PDF attachment) by clicking on `Menu > Email` from any open document.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Send Email" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/email/send-email.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Send Email" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/email/send-email.gif">
-**Note:** You must have outgoing [email accounts]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-account.html) setup for this.
+**Note:** You must have outgoing [email accounts](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-account.html) setup for this.
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/manual-feedback-request.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/manual-feedback-request.md
index 4afaee1..7f873ce 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/manual-feedback-request.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/manual-feedback-request.md
@@ -6,12 +6,12 @@
To request a feedback manually go to respective document e.g. Sales Order, Issue etc.
and click on Ask a Feedback option in Menu.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Condition" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/feedback/manual-feedback-request-option.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Condition" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/feedback/manual-feedback-request-option.png">
Then, user can enter the feedback request details like email id, message and send the
feedback request mail.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Condition" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/feedback/manual-feedback-request.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Condition" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/feedback/manual-feedback-request.png">
Note. If Feedback Trigger is already configured for the document then system will fetch
Feedback Request details (email id, message)
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/resend-feedback-request.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/resend-feedback-request.md
index 0dbb3b7..641d0a0 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/resend-feedback-request.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/resend-feedback-request.md
@@ -2,15 +2,15 @@
We can also Resend the Feedback Request to the Customer/User.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Condition" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/feedback/timeline-rating-and-feedback.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Condition" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/feedback/timeline-rating-and-feedback.png">
To resend the Feedback Request we will need to navigate the Communication by clicking the `Details` link on Timeline Feedback.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Condition" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/feedback/resend-feedback-request-button.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Condition" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/feedback/resend-feedback-request-button.png">
On Resend Button click a dialog with the Feedback Request message will appear user can either send the
Feedback Request with same message or he/she can make the changes in the Feedback Request message.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Condition" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/feedback/resend-feedback-request-custom-message.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Condition" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/feedback/resend-feedback-request-custom-message.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/setting-up-feedback.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/setting-up-feedback.md
index 373d703..441e78e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/setting-up-feedback.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/setting-up-feedback.md
@@ -19,13 +19,13 @@
### Setting a Subject
You can retrieve the data for a particular field by using `doc.[field_name]`. To use it in your subject/message, you have to surround it with `{% raw %}{{ }}{% endraw %}`. These are called [Jinja](http://jinja.pocoo.org/) tags. So, for example, to get the name of a document, you use `{% raw %}{{ doc.name }}{% endraw %}`. The below example sends an feedback request whenever Issue is Closed with the Subject, "ISS-##### Issue is Resolved"
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Subject" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/feedback/feedback-trigger-subject.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Subject" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/feedback/feedback-trigger-subject.png">
### Setting Conditions
Feedback Trigger allows you to set conditions according to the field data in your documents. The feedback request email will be sent on document save only if the all conditions are true For example if you want to trigger the feedback request mail to a customer if an Issue is has been saved as "Closed" as it's status, you put `doc.status == "Closed"` in the conditions textbox. You can also set more complex conditions by combining them.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Condition" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/feedback/feedback-trigger-condition.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Condition" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/feedback/feedback-trigger-condition.png">
### Setting a Message
@@ -45,9 +45,9 @@
### Example
1. Setting up Feedback Trigger
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Defining Criteria" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/feedback/setting-up-feedback-trigger.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Defining Criteria" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/feedback/setting-up-feedback-trigger.png">
1. Setting the Recipients and Message
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Set Message" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/feedback/setting-up-feedback-trigger-message.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Set Message" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/feedback/setting-up-feedback-trigger-message.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/submit-feedback.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/submit-feedback.md
index 9069f37..663aae1 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/submit-feedback.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/submit-feedback.md
@@ -3,17 +3,17 @@
Once feedback request mail is sent the user/customer. He/She can visit the URL to submit the feedback
as well as rating for the document.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Condition" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/feedback/submit-feedback.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Condition" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/feedback/submit-feedback.png">
Once Feedback is submitted the feedback details message and ratings will be recorded and will be shown on Document sidebar and timeline. Also once the Feedback is successfully submitted by the user the link shared to the user will be expired and can not be used to submit the Feedback again.
On Document sidebar the latest feedback ratings will displayed.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Condition" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/feedback/sidebar-ratings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Condition" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/feedback/sidebar-ratings.png">
Also, The Feedback details such as Feedback message and ratings will be shown in the Document's Timeline along
with Comment, Email.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Condition" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/feedback/timeline-rating-and-feedback.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Condition" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/feedback/timeline-rating-and-feedback.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/dropbox-backup.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/dropbox-backup.md
index 34c17e0..37f74a2 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/dropbox-backup.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/dropbox-backup.md
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
Set Frequency to download backup in your Dropbox account.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="set frequency" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/integrations/setup-backup-frequency.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="set frequency" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/setup-backup-frequency.png">
####Step 2: Allow Dropbox Access
@@ -23,13 +23,13 @@
Login to your Dropbox account by entering login credentials.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Login" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/integrations/dropbox-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Login" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/dropbox-2.png">
####Step 4: Allow
On successful login, you will find a confirmation message as following. Click on "Allow" to let your ERPNext account have access to your Dropbox account.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Allow" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/integrations/dropbox-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Allow" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/dropbox-3.png">
With this, a folder called "ERPNext" will be created in your Dropbox account, and database backup will start to auto-download in it.
@@ -41,18 +41,18 @@
####Step 2:Create a new app
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Create new" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/integrations/dropbox-open-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Create new" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/dropbox-open-3.png">
####Step 3: Fill in details for the app
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Choose Dropbox API and type as APP Folder" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/integrations/dropbox-open-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Choose Dropbox API and type as APP Folder" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/dropbox-open-1.png">
-
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Setup APP Name" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/integrations/dropbox-open-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Setup APP Name" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/dropbox-open-2.png">
####Step 4: Setup Redirect URL in app
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Set Redirect URL" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/integrations/dropbox_redirect_uri.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Set Redirect URL" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/dropbox_redirect_uri.png">
####Step 5: Settings in Site Config
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/ldap-integration.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/ldap-integration.md
index c89cd5d..759077a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/ldap-integration.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/ldap-integration.md
@@ -13,9 +13,9 @@
To enable ldap service, you need to configure parameters like LDAP Server Url, Organizational Unit, UID, Base Distinguished Name (DN) and Password for Base DN
-<img class="screenshot" alt="LDAP Settings" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/integrations/ldap_settings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="LDAP Settings" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/ldap_settings.png">
After setting up LDAP parameters, on login screen, the system enables **Login Via LDAP** option.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="LOGIN via LDAP" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/integrations/login_via_ldap.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="LOGIN via LDAP" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/login_via_ldap.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/paypal-integration.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/paypal-integration.md
index c74f113..8b309e8 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/paypal-integration.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/paypal-integration.md
@@ -13,17 +13,17 @@
To enable PayPal payment service, you need to configure parameters like API Username, API Password and Signature.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="PayPal Settings" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/integrations/paypal_settings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="PayPal Settings" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/paypal_settings.png">
You also can set test payment environment, by settings `Use Sandbox`
On enabling service, the system will create Payment Gateway record and Account head in chart of accounts having account type as Bank.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="PayPal COA" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/integrations/paypal_coa.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="PayPal COA" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/paypal_coa.png">
Also it will create Payment Gateway Account entry. Payment Gateway Account is configuration hub from this you can set account head from existing COA, default Payment Request email body template.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Gateway Account" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/integrations/payment_gateway_account_paypal.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Gateway Account" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/payment_gateway_account_paypal.png">
After enabling service and configuring Payment Gateway Account your system is able to accept online payments.
@@ -35,20 +35,20 @@
#### Paypal Sanbox API Signature
- Login to paypal developer account, <a href="https://developer.paypal.com/">PayPal Developer Account</a>
- From **Accounts** tab. create a new business account.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Request" src="{{ docs_base_url }}/assets/img/setup/integrations/setup-sanbox-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Request" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/setup-sanbox-1.png">
- From this account profile you will get your sandbox api credentials
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Request" src="{{ docs_base_url }}/assets/img/setup/integrations/sanbox-credentials.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Request" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/sanbox-credentials.png">
---
#### PayPal Account API Signature
- Login to PayPal Account and go to profile
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Request" src="{{ docs_base_url }}/assets/img/setup/integrations/api-step-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Request" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/api-step-1.png">
- From **My Selling Tools** go to **api Access**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Request" src="{{ docs_base_url }}/assets/img/setup/integrations/api-step-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Request" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/api-step-2.png">
- On API Access Page, choose option 2 to generate API credentials
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Request" src="{{ docs_base_url }}/assets/img/setup/integrations/api-step-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Request" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/api-step-3.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/razorpay-integration.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/razorpay-integration.md
index a396116..ac8bfd7 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/razorpay-integration.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/razorpay-integration.md
@@ -12,15 +12,15 @@
#### Setup Razorpay
To enable Razorpay payment service, you need to configure parameters like API Key, API Secret
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Razorpay Settings" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/integrations/razorpay_settings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Razorpay Settings" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/razorpay_settings.png">
On enabling service, the system will create Payment Gateway record and Account head in chart of account with account type as Bank.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Razorpay COA" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/integrations/razorpay_coa.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Razorpay COA" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/razorpay_coa.png">
Also it will create Payment Gateway Account entry. Payment Gateway Account is configuration hub from this you can set account head from existing COA, default Payment Request email body template.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Gateway Account" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/integrations/payment_gateway_account_razorpay.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Gateway Account" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/payment_gateway_account_razorpay.png">
After enabling service and configuring Payment Gateway Account your system is able to accept online payments.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/stripe-integration.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/stripe-integration.md
index 138f547..6915a9c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/stripe-integration.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/stripe-integration.md
@@ -8,15 +8,15 @@
#### Setup Stripe
To enable Stripe payment service, you need to configure parameters like Publishable Key, Secret Key
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Razorpay Settings" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/integrations/stripe_setting.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Razorpay Settings" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/stripe_setting.png">
On enabling service, the system will create Payment Gateway record and Account head in chart of account with account type as Bank.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Stripe COA" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/integrations/stripe_coa.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Stripe COA" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/stripe_coa.png">
Also it will create Payment Gateway Account entry. Payment Gateway Account is configuration hub from this you can set account head from existing COA, default Payment Request email body template.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Gateway Account" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/integrations/payment_gateway_account_stripe.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Payment Gateway Account" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/integrations/payment_gateway_account_stripe.png">
After configuring Payment Gateway Account your system is able to accept online payments.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/pos-setting.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/pos-setting.md
index 01e353b..375c251 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/pos-setting.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/pos-setting.md
@@ -14,16 +14,16 @@
Set default values as defined.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Setting" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/pos-setting/pos_profile.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Setting" src="/docs/assets/img/pos-setting/pos_profile.png">
To set the default mode of payment, enabled the option default in the mode of payments table
-<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Setting" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/pos-setting/default_mop.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Setting" src="/docs/assets/img/pos-setting/default_mop.png">
User can sale the particular products to the particular customers from the POS by adding item groups, customer groups in the POS Profile.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Setting" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/pos-setting/item_customer_group.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="POS Setting" src="/docs/assets/img/pos-setting/item_customer_group.png">
> Important : If you specify a particular User, the POS setting will be
applied only to that User. If the User option is left blank, the setting will
-be set for all users. To understand POS in detail visit [Point of Sale]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/point-of-sale-pos-invoice.html)
+be set for all users. To understand POS in detail visit [Point of Sale](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/point-of-sale-pos-invoice.html)
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/price-lists.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/price-lists.md
index 4710b6c..a965581 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/price-lists.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/price-lists.md
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
> Selling/Buying/Stock > Setup > Price List >> New
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Price List" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/price-list/price-list.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Price List" src="/docs/assets/img/price-list/price-list.png">
* These Price List will be used when creating Item Price record to track selling or buying price of an item. Click here to learn more about Item Price.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/address-template.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/address-template.md
index 53dfef1..34df11c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/address-template.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/address-template.md
@@ -26,6 +26,6 @@
### Example
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Print Heading" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/address-format.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Print Heading" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/address-format.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/cheque-print-template.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/cheque-print-template.md
index b830a20..3a4566a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/cheque-print-template.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/cheque-print-template.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
Business involves making payment to various parties like suppliers and employees. Payment can be made in various modes like cash, NEFT or cheque. If you are making a payment via cheque, you can also create a Print Format for printing Cheque from ERPNext based on the Payment Entry.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sample Cheque" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/sample-cheque.jpg">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sample Cheque" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/sample-cheque.jpg">
Using the Cheque Print Template you can generate a new Print Format based. It will be created based the cheque format provided by your bank.
@@ -16,13 +16,13 @@
In the Cheque Print Template, for each value (say Payee, Date), exact co-ordinates are provided based on where that value should be printed on a cheque. Co-ordinates are provided in centi-meter.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sample Cheque" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/cheque-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sample Cheque" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/cheque-1.png">
####New Format via Scanning
To speed up creation of a new cheque printing format, you can upload scanned image of the cheque. Considering the scanned image for the cheque, system automatically updates co-ordinates for each value like party name, amount, date, amount in words etc.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sample Cheque" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/cheque-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sample Cheque" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/cheque-2.png">
####New format by manual entry
You can manually provide the co-ordinate for each value based on where you want to to be printed on the cheque.
@@ -30,18 +30,18 @@
####Preview
Based on co-ordinates provided for all the values, a preview be shown as to how the values will be printed on the cheque.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sample Cheque" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/cheque-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sample Cheque" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/cheque-3.png">
####New Print Format
If the preview looks promising, click on the button to create a new Print Format for printing cheque. Based on the values provided in the Cheque Print Template, the system will auto-generate an HTML script for the cheque’s Print Format.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sample Cheque" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/cheque-4.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sample Cheque" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/cheque-4.png">
####Printing Cheque
New print format generated for the cheque will be visible in the Payment Entry form. After creating the payment entry, you will be able to print transaction details on the cheque.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sample Cheque" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/cheque-5.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sample Cheque" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/cheque-5.gif">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/custom-translations.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/custom-translations.md
index bb4a9d7..fe5a0d1 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/custom-translations.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/custom-translations.md
@@ -8,11 +8,11 @@
In the Customer master, select default Language. Say default language for the Customer is <b>deutsch</b>.
-<img src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/multilingual_print_format/set_customer_default_lang.png" class="screenshot">
+<img src="/docs/assets/img/multilingual_print_format/set_customer_default_lang.png" class="screenshot">
Same way, you can also set default language in the Supplier master.
-<img src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/multilingual_print_format/set_supplier_default_lang.png" class="screenshot">
+<img src="/docs/assets/img/multilingual_print_format/set_supplier_default_lang.png" class="screenshot">
####Print Preview in the Party's Language
@@ -20,17 +20,17 @@
Customer Quotation print preview in customer's default language.
-<img src="{{ docs_base_url }}/assets/img/multilingual_print_format/customer_quotation.png" class="screenshot">
+<img src="/docs/assets/img/multilingual_print_format/customer_quotation.png" class="screenshot">
Supplier Quotation print preview in supplier's default language.
-<img src="{{ docs_base_url }}/assets/img/multilingual_print_format/supplier_quotation.png" class="screenshot">
+<img src="/docs/assets/img/multilingual_print_format/supplier_quotation.png" class="screenshot">
####What to do if want to print with another language?
User can have option to select alternate language on print view.
-<img src="{{ docs_base_url }}/assets/img/multilingual_print_format/alternate_language.png" class="screenshot">
+<img src="/docs/assets/img/multilingual_print_format/alternate_language.png" class="screenshot">
####Custom Translation
@@ -38,11 +38,11 @@
`Setup > Settings > Translation List > New`
-<img src="{{ docs_base_url }}/assets/img/multilingual_print_format/translation.png" class="screenshot">
+<img src="/docs/assets/img/multilingual_print_format/translation.png" class="screenshot">
The translation is applied when user select language as Italiano on supplier quotation's print preview.
-<img src="{{ docs_base_url }}/assets/img/multilingual_print_format/custom_translation.png" class="screenshot">
+<img src="/docs/assets/img/multilingual_print_format/custom_translation.png" class="screenshot">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/letter-head.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/letter-head.md
index 6ec391a..1243903 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/letter-head.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/letter-head.md
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
* Logo Image: You can insert the image in your Letter Head record by clicking on image icon. Once image is inserted, HTML for it will be generated automatically.
* Other information (like Address, tax ID etc.) that you want to put on your letter head.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Print Heading" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/letter-head.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Print Heading" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/letter-head.png">
> If you want to make this the default letter head, click on “Is Default”.
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
This is how the letter head looks in a document's print.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Print Heading" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/letter-head-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Print Heading" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/letter-head-1.png">
> Please note that Footer will be visible only when document's print is seen in the PDF. Footer will not be visible in the HTML based print preview.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.md
index f979927..4e94045 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.md
@@ -10,19 +10,19 @@
### Step 1: Make a new Format
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Send Email" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/print-format-builder-1.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Send Email" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/print-format-builder-1.gif">
### Step 2: Add a new Field
To add a field, just drag it from the left sidebar and add it in your layout. You can edit the layout by clicking on the settings <i class="octicon octicon-gear"></i> icon.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Send Email" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/print-format-builder-2.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Send Email" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/print-format-builder-2.gif">
### Step 3
To remove a field, just drag it back into the fields sidebar.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Send Email" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/print-format-builder-3.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Send Email" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/print-format-builder-3.gif">
### Step 4
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
Then click on **Edit HTML** to edit your content.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Send Email" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/print-format-builder-4.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Send Email" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/print-format-builder-4.gif">
To save your format, just click on the **Save** button on the top.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-headings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-headings.md
index 7cf9b54..de3395b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-headings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-headings.md
@@ -10,10 +10,10 @@
#### Figure 1: Save Print Heading
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Print Heading" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/print-heading.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Print Heading" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/print-heading.png">
Example of a change in print heading is shown below:
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Print Heading" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/print-heading-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Print Heading" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/print-heading-1.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-settings.md
index cdf3c54..220b467 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-settings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-settings.md
@@ -6,6 +6,6 @@
> Setup > Printing and Branding > Print Settings
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Print Settings" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/print-settings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Print Settings" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/print-settings.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.md
index 8314ae1..28e803d 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.md
@@ -8,13 +8,13 @@
`Selling > Terms and Condition > New`
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Terms and Conditions" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/terms-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Terms and Conditions" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/terms-1.png">
### 2. Editing in HTML
Content of Terms and Condition can be formatted as per your preference, and also insert images where needed. If you have expertise in HTML, you will also find option to edit the content of Terms and Condition in HTML.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Terms and Conditions, Edit HTML" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/terms-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Terms and Conditions, Edit HTML" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/terms-2.png">
This also allows you to use Terms and Condition master for footer, which otherwise is not available in ERPNext as dedicated functionality. Since contents of Terms and Condition is always the last to appear in the print format, details of footer should be inserted at the end of the content, so that it actually appears as footer in the print format.
@@ -22,6 +22,6 @@
In transactions, you will find section of Terms and Condition where you will be able to search and fetched required Terms and Condition master.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Terms and Conditions, Select in document" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/print/terms-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Terms and Conditions, Select in document" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/print/terms-3.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-company-sales-goal.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-company-sales-goal.md
index e18ad05..ca0c32a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-company-sales-goal.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-company-sales-goal.md
@@ -2,14 +2,14 @@
Monthly sales targets can be set for a company via the Company master. By default, the Company master dashboard features past sales stats.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Graph" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/sales_goal/sales_history_graph.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Graph" src="/docs/assets/img/sales_goal/sales_history_graph.png">
You can set the **Sales Target** field to track progress to track progress with respect to it.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Sales Goal" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/sales_goal/setting_sales_goal.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Setting Sales Goal" src="/docs/assets/img/sales_goal/setting_sales_goal.gif">
The target progress is also shown in notifications:
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Notification" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/sales_goal/sales_goal_notification.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Notification" src="/docs/assets/img/sales_goal/sales_goal_notification.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.md
index 5a8b2d2..18f2f01 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.md
@@ -24,11 +24,11 @@
Item Tax table can be found as a section within the Item Master document.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Item Tax" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/taxes/item-tax.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Item Tax" src="/docs/assets/img/taxes/item-tax.png">
* **Inclusive and Exclusive Tax**: ERPNext allows you to enter Item rates which are tax inclusive.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Inclusive Tax" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/taxes/inclusive-tax.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Inclusive Tax" src="/docs/assets/img/taxes/inclusive-tax.png">
* **Exception to the rule**: Item tax settings are required only if a particular Item has a different tax rate than the rate defined in the standard tax Account
* **Item tax is overwrite-able**: You can overwrite or change the item tax rate by going to the Item master in the Item tax table.
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@
> Setup > Accounts > Sales Taxes and Charge Master
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Tax Master" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/taxes/sales-tax-master.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales Tax Master" src="/docs/assets/img/taxes/sales-tax-master.png">
When you create a new master, you will have to add a row for each tax type.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/global-defaults.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/global-defaults.md
index 412572a..87ebcba 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/global-defaults.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/global-defaults.md
@@ -6,6 +6,6 @@
Whenever a new document is created, these values will be set as default.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Global Defaults" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/settings/global-defaults.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Global Defaults" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/settings/global-defaults.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/module-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/module-settings.md
index 3e2a109..f6ede50 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/module-settings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/module-settings.md
@@ -10,6 +10,6 @@
Check / uncheck the items to show / hide.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Module Settings" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/settings/show-hide-modules.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Module Settings" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/settings/show-hide-modules.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/naming-series.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/naming-series.md
index 086a272..71029bc 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/naming-series.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/naming-series.md
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@
See how to set the naming series
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Naming Series" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/settings/naming-series.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Naming Series" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/settings/naming-series.gif">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/system-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/system-settings.md
index b436b46..43f47f1 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/system-settings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/system-settings.md
@@ -8,6 +8,6 @@
> Setup > Settings > System Settings
-<img class="screenshot" alt="System Settings" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/settings/system-settings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="System Settings" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/settings/system-settings.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-1-language.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-1-language.md
index 00219fd..c8fba43 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-1-language.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-1-language.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
Select your language. ERPNext is available in more than 20 languages.
-<img alt="Language" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-1.png">
+<img alt="Language" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-1.png">
---
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-10-item.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-10-item.md
index bc71b98..837c333 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-10-item.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-10-item.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
In this final step, please enter the names of the Items you buy or sell.
<img alt="Add Items" class="screenshot"
-src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-10.png">
+src="/docs/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-10.png">
Please set the group of the item (Product / Service) and unit of measure. Don't worry you will be able to edit all of this later.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-2-currency-and-timezone.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-2-currency-and-timezone.md
index 5dc1648..6809f40 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-2-currency-and-timezone.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-2-currency-and-timezone.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
Set your country name, currency and timezone.
-<img alt="Currency" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-2.png">
+<img alt="Currency" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-2.png">
---
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-3-user-details.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-3-user-details.md
index b9eff18..5d6002a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-3-user-details.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-3-user-details.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
Enter Users Profile Details like Name, User ID and preferred password.
<img alt="User" class="screenshot"
-src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-3.png">
+src="/docs/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-3.png">
---
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-4-company-details.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-4-company-details.md
index f88d31c..2558f16 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-4-company-details.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-4-company-details.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
Enter Company Details like Name, Abbreviation and Financial Year Details.
<img alt="Company Details" class="screenshot"
-src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-4.png">
+src="/docs/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-4.png">
---
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-5-letterhead-and-logo.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-5-letterhead-and-logo.md
index 8694960..9f45642 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-5-letterhead-and-logo.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-5-letterhead-and-logo.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
Attach Company Letterhead and Company Logo.
<img alt="Company Logo and Letterhead" class="screenshot"
-src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-5.png">
+src="/docs/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-5.png">
---
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
You may choose to skip this step if your letterhead is not ready.
-To select letterhead later through the setup module, read [Letter-head]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/letter-head.html)
+To select letterhead later through the setup module, read [Letter-head](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/letter-head.html)
#### To "attach as web-link"
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-6-add-users.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-6-add-users.md
index 7e8f083..0a0cd00 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-6-add-users.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-6-add-users.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
Add other users and assign them roles based on their job responsibilities.
<img alt="Users" class="screenshot"
-src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-6.png">
+src="/docs/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-6.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-7-tax-details.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-7-tax-details.md
index 1d353b6..3b42ebe 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-7-tax-details.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-7-tax-details.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
Enter any three types of taxes which you regularly pay. This wizard will create a tax master which will calculate the taxes as per the tax-type.
<img alt="Tax Details" class="screenshot"
-src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-7.png">
+src="/docs/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-7.png">
Just set the tax name and the standard percentage levied.
@@ -17,6 +17,6 @@
The purpose of VAT is to generate tax revenues to the government similar to the corporate income tax or the personal income tax. For Example: When you shop at a departmental store and avail discount on the products, the store charges you 5% extra on the total bill as the VAT.
-To setup VAT in the setup wizard , simply enter the percentage amount levied by your government. To setup VAT at a later stage read [setting-up-taxes]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html)
+To setup VAT in the setup wizard , simply enter the percentage amount levied by your government. To setup VAT at a later stage read [setting-up-taxes](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html)
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-8-customer-names.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-8-customer-names.md
index 8143f0b..2b6ae0c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-8-customer-names.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-8-customer-names.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
<img alt="Customers" class="screenshot"
-src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-8.png">
+src="/docs/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-8.png">
---
@@ -18,6 +18,6 @@
Contact Name: Shiv Agarwal
-To understand Customer in detail visit [Customer Details]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/CRM/customer.html)
+To understand Customer in detail visit [Customer Details](/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/customer.html)
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-9-suppliers.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-9-suppliers.md
index 762c984..46bcfba 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-9-suppliers.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-9-suppliers.md
@@ -3,10 +3,10 @@
Enter a few of your Suppliers' names.
<img alt="Suppliers" class="screenshot"
-src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-9.png">
+src="/docs/assets/img/setup-wizard/step-9.png">
---
-To understand Suppliers in detail visit [Supplier Master]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/buying/supplier.html)
+To understand Suppliers in detail visit [Supplier Master](/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier.html)
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/sms-setting.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/sms-setting.md
index 7c66692..1cb7c36 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/sms-setting.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/sms-setting.md
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
http://instant.smses.com/web2sms.php?username=<USERNAME>&password;=<PASSWORD>&to;=<MOBILENUMBER>&sender;=<SENDERID>&message;=<MESSAGE>
-<img class="screenshot" alt="SMS Setting 2" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/sms-settings2.jpg">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="SMS Setting 2" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/sms-settings2.jpg">
> Note: the string up to the "?" is the SMS Gateway URL
@@ -36,6 +36,6 @@
from your SMS Provider like username, password etc. These static values should
be entered in the Static Parameters table.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="SMS Setting" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/sms-settings1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="SMS Setting" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/sms-settings1.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.md
index c309903..36ad65a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.md
@@ -29,17 +29,17 @@
A predefined template of an spreadsheet file should be followed for importing item's stock levels and valuations. Open new Stock Reconciliation form to see download option.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Reconciliation" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/stock-recon-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Reconciliation" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/stock-recon-1.png">
#### Step 2: Enter Data in csv file.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Reconciliation" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/stock-reco-data.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Reconciliation" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/stock-reco-data.png">
The csv format is case-sensitive. Do not edit the headers which are preset in the template. In the Item Code and Warehouse column, enter exact Item Code and Warehouse as created in your ERPNext account. For quatity, enter stock level you wish to set for that item, in a specific warehouse.
#### Step 3: Upload file and Enter Values in Stock Reconciliation Form
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Reconciliation" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/stock-recon-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Reconciliation" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/stock-recon-2.png">
**Posting Date**
@@ -61,11 +61,11 @@
#### Step 4: Review the reconciliation data
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Reconciliation" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/stock-reco-upload.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Reconciliation" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/stock-reco-upload.gif">
### Stock Ledger Report
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Reconciliation" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup//stock-reco-ledger.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Reconciliation" src="/docs/assets/img/setup//stock-reco-ledger.png">
**How Stock Reconciliation Works**
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/territory.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/territory.md
index e892489..c82bfe4 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/territory.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/territory.md
@@ -7,6 +7,6 @@
territory v/s what you had planned.
You can also set different pricing for the same product sold across different territories.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Territory Tree" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/crm/territory-tree.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Territory Tree" src="/docs/assets/img/crm/territory-tree.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md
index 6fb64df..16bf19e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
### 1. List of Users
-<img class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/users/user-1.png" alt="User List">
+<img class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/users/user-1.png" alt="User List">
To add a new user, click on "New"
@@ -22,8 +22,8 @@
The user's Email will become the user id. Mobile No can also be used to log in if you check the Allow Login using Mobile No checkbox under the Security section in System Settings. While Mobile No will be unique, it will not be treated as a user id.
-<img class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/users/user-login-email.png" alt="Email Login">
-<img class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/users/user-login-mobile.png" alt="Mobile No Login">
+<img class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/users/user-login-email.png" alt="Email Login">
+<img class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/users/user-login-mobile.png" alt="Mobile No Login">
After adding these details, save the user.
@@ -32,19 +32,19 @@
After saving, you will see a list of roles and a checkbox next to it. Just check the roles you want the user to have and save the document. To click on what permissions translate into roles, click on the role
name.
-<img class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/users/user-2.png" alt="User Roles">
+<img class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/users/user-2.png" alt="User Roles">
### 4. Setting Module Access
Users will have access to all modules for which they have role based access. If you want to block certain modules for certain users, un-check the module from the list.
-<img class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/users/user-3.png" alt="User Block Module">
+<img class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/users/user-3.png" alt="User Block Module">
### 5. Security Settings
If you wish to give the user access to the system only between office hours,
or during weekends, mention it under security settings.
-<img class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/users/user-4.png" alt="User Security">
+<img class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/users/user-4.png" alt="User Security">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md
index 0c4042c..6f11ecb 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
To start with, go to:
> Setup > Permissions > Role Permissions Manager
-<img alt="Manage Read, Write, Create, Submit, Amend access using the Role Permissions Manager" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-leave-application.png">
+<img alt="Manage Read, Write, Create, Submit, Amend access using the Role Permissions Manager" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-leave-application.png">
Permissions are applied on a combination of:
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
If enabled, a user with that role will be able to access only specific Documents for that Document Type. Such specific Document access is defined in the list of User Permissions. Additionally, User Permissions defined for other Document Types also get applied if they are related to the current Document Type through Link Fields.
To set, User Permissions go to:
- > Setup > Permissions > [User Permissions Manager]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.html)
+ > Setup > Permissions > [User Permissions Manager](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.html)
---
@@ -38,37 +38,37 @@
Leave Application is a good **example** that encompasses all areas of Permission System.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Leave Application Form should be created by an Employee, and approved by Leave Approver or HR User" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-leave-application-form.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Leave Application Form should be created by an Employee, and approved by Leave Approver or HR User" src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-leave-application-form.png">
1. **It should be created by an Employee.**
For this, Employee Role should be given Read, Write, Create permissions.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Giving Read, Write and Create Permissions to Employee for Leave Application" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-employee-role.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Giving Read, Write and Create Permissions to Employee for Leave Application" src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-employee-role.png">
1. **An Employee should only be able to access his/her Leave Application.**
Hence, Apply User Permissions should be enabled for Employee Role, and a User Permission record should be created for each User Employee combination. (This effort is reduced for Employee Document Type, by programmatically creating User Permission records.)
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Limiting access to Leave Applications for a user with Employee Role via User Permissions Manager" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/old_images/erpnext/setting-up-permissions-employee-user-permissions.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Limiting access to Leave Applications for a user with Employee Role via User Permissions Manager" src="/docs/assets/old_images/erpnext/setting-up-permissions-employee-user-permissions.png">
1. **HR Manager should be able to see all Leave Applications.**
Create a Permission Rule for HR Manager at Level 0, with Read permissions. Apply User Permissions should be disabled.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Giving Submit and Cancel permissions to HR Manager for Leave Applications. 'Apply User Permissions' is unchecked to give full access." src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-hr-manager-role.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Giving Submit and Cancel permissions to HR Manager for Leave Applications. 'Apply User Permissions' is unchecked to give full access." src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-hr-manager-role.png">
2. **Leave Approver should be able to see and update Leave Applications applicable to him/her.**
Leave Approver is given Read and Write access at Level 0, with Apply User Permissions enabled. Relevant Employee Documents should be enlisted in the User Permissions of Leave Approvers. (This effort is reduced for Leave Approvers mentioned in Employee Documents, by programmatically creating User Permission records.)
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Giving Read, Write and Submit permissions to Leave Approver for Leave Applications.'Apply User Permissions' is checked to limit access based on Employee." src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-leave-approver-role.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Giving Read, Write and Submit permissions to Leave Approver for Leave Applications.'Apply User Permissions' is checked to limit access based on Employee." src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-leave-approver-role.png">
3. **It should be Approved / Rejected only by HR User or Leave Approver.**
The Status field of Leave Application is set at Level 1. HR User and Leave Approver are given Read and Write permissions for Level 1, while everyone else (All) are given Read permission for Level 1.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Limiting read access for a set of fields to certain Roles" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/old_images/erpnext/setting-up-permissions-level-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Limiting read access for a set of fields to certain Roles" src="/docs/assets/old_images/erpnext/setting-up-permissions-level-1.png">
4. **HR User should be able to delegate Leave Applications to his/her subordinates**
HR User is given the right to Set User Permissions. A User with HR User role would be able to defined User Permissions on Leave Application for other users.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Let HR User delegate access to Leave Applications by checking 'Set User Permissions'. This will allow HR User to access User Permissions Manager for 'Leave Application'" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-hr-user-role.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Let HR User delegate access to Leave Applications by checking 'Set User Permissions'. This will allow HR User to access User Permissions Manager for 'Leave Application'" src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/setting-up-permissions-hr-user-role.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-permisison-for-page-and-report.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-permisison-for-page-and-report.md
index 3a26a32..5483af7 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-permisison-for-page-and-report.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-permisison-for-page-and-report.md
@@ -5,10 +5,10 @@
If user has enabled the developer mode, then they can add the roles directly in the page and report record. But in that case, the permissions will also be reflected in the json file for the page / report.
### For Page
-<img alt="Assign roles to the page" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/roles-for-page.png">
+<img alt="Assign roles to the page" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/roles-for-page.png">
### For Report
-<img alt="Assign roles to the report" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/roles-for-report.png">
+<img alt="Assign roles to the report" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/roles-for-report.png">
## Tool for custom roles assignment
@@ -16,10 +16,10 @@
To access, goto Setup > Permissions > Role Permission for Page and Report
-<img alt="Tools to assign custom roles to the page" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/role-permission-for-page-and-report.png">
+<img alt="Tools to assign custom roles to the page" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/role-permission-for-page-and-report.png">
### Reset to defaults
Using "Reset to Default" button, user can remove the custom permissions applied on a page or report. Then default permissions will be applicable on that page or report.
-<img alt="Reset the default roles" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/reset-roles-permisison-for-page-report.png">
+<img alt="Reset the default roles" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/reset-roles-permisison-for-page-report.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md
index a939e65..23e5b32 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md
@@ -4,6 +4,6 @@
To share a document, open the document, click on the "+" icon under sharing and select the user
-<img class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/users/share.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/users/share.gif">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md
index f90cf44..896fd85 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
1. The type of document which will be allowed (for example "Company")
1. The specific item that you want to allow (the name of the "Company)
-<img src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/user-perms/new-user-permission.png" class="screenshot" alt="Creating a new user permission">
+<img src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/user-perms/new-user-permission.png" class="screenshot" alt="Creating a new user permission">
If you want to apply the permissions to all Roles for that user, keep the "Apply Permissions for all Roles of this User" checked. If you check this, it will automatically setup the rules for Roles to check for User Permissions.
@@ -25,11 +25,11 @@
Note that the "Apply User Permissions" is already checked for this role. Then click on "Select Document Types"
-<img src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/user-perms/select-document-types.png" class="screenshot" alt="Select Document Types to Edit the Setting">
+<img src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/user-perms/select-document-types.png" class="screenshot" alt="Select Document Types to Edit the Setting">
Here you will see that Company has already been checked. If you want user permissions not be applied for that particular rule, you can un check it.
-<img src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/user-perms/view-selected-documents.png" class="screenshot" alt="Select Document Types to Edit the Setting">
+<img src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/user-perms/view-selected-documents.png" class="screenshot" alt="Select Document Types to Edit the Setting">
### Ignoring User Permissions on Certain Fields
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
For example you don't want Assets to be restricited for any user, then select **Asset** in **Customize Form** and in the Company field, check on "Ignore User Permissions"
-<img src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/user-perms/ignore-user-user-permissions.png" class="screenshot" alt="Ignore User Permissions on specific properties">
+<img src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/user-perms/ignore-user-user-permissions.png" class="screenshot" alt="Ignore User Permissions on specific properties">
### Strict Permisssions
@@ -49,4 +49,4 @@
Finally once you have created your air-tight permission model, and you want to check how it applies to various users, you can see it via the **Permitted Documents for User** report. Using this report, you can select the **User** and document type and check how user permissions get applied.
-<img src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/users-and-permissions/user-perms/permitted-documents.png" class="screenshot" alt="Permitted Documents for User report">
+<img src="/docs/assets/img/users-and-permissions/user-perms/permitted-documents.png" class="screenshot" alt="Permitted Documents for User report">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/workflows.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/workflows.md
index 06c47d7..4b2cabb 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/workflows.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/workflows.md
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
Manager, who is the approving authority, will either Approve or Reject this
request. Accordingly,the user will get his Approved or Rejected status.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/workflow-leave-fl.jpg">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/workflow-leave-fl.jpg">
To make this Workflow and transition rules go to :
@@ -21,11 +21,11 @@
#### Step 1: Enter the different states of Leave Approval Process.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/workflow-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/workflow-1.png">
#### Step 2: Enter Transition Rules.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/workflow-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/workflow-2.png">
#### Notes:
@@ -48,15 +48,15 @@
When a Leave Application is saved by Employee, the status of the document changes to "Applied"
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/workflow-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/workflow-3.png">
When the HR User logs in, he can either Approve or Reject. If approved the
status of the document changes to "Approved by HR". However, it is yet to be approved by Leave Approver.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/workflow-4.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/workflow-4.png">
When the Leave Approver opens the Leave Application page, he can finally "Approve" or "Reject" the Leave Application.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/workflow-5.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/workflow-5.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md
index 27000ff..96b792d 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
statement.
To check accounting entries for a particular stock transaction, please check
-[examples]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.html)
+[examples](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.html)
#### **Advantages**
@@ -66,6 +66,6 @@
If you are an existing user using Periodic Inventory and want to use Perpetual
Inventory, you have to follow some steps to migrate. For details, check
-[Migration From Periodic Inventory]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.html).
+[Migration From Periodic Inventory](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.html).
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md
index 847c807..0e4d2d7 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
`Explore > Accounts > Accounts Settings`
- <img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-1.png">
+ <img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-1.png">
* Create Stock Entry (Material Transfer) to transfer available stock from existing warehouse to new warehouse. As stock will be available in the new warehouse, you should select the new warehouse for all the future transactions.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md
index a3102ae..90bdbbf 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
> Setup > Company > Stock Settings > "Enable Perpetual Inventory"
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-1.png">
* Setup the following default accounts for each Company. These accounts are created automatically in the new ERPNext accounts.
@@ -133,11 +133,11 @@
**Stock Ledger**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-receipt-sl-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-receipt-sl-1.png">
**General Ledger**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-receipt-gl-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-receipt-gl-2.png">
As stock balance increases through Purchase Receipt, "Store" accounts are debited and a temporary account "Stock Receipt But Not Billed" account is credited, to maintain double entry accounting system. At the same time, negative expense is booked in account "Expense included in Valuation" for the amount added for valuation purpose, to avoid double expense booking.
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@
**General Ledger**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-pinv-gl-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-pinv-gl-3.png">
Here "Stock Received But Not Billed" account is debited and nullified the
effect of Purchase Receipt.
@@ -207,11 +207,11 @@
**Stock Ledger**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-dn-sl-4.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-dn-sl-4.png">
**General Ledger**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-dn-gl-5.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-dn-gl-5.png">
As item is delivered from "Stores" warehouse, "Stores" account is credited and
equal amount is debited to the expense account "Cost of Goods Sold". The
@@ -240,11 +240,11 @@
**Stock Ledger**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-inv-sl-6.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-inv-sl-6.png">
**General Ledger**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-inv-gl-7.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-inv-gl-7.png">
Here, apart from normal account entries for invoice, "Stores" and "Cost of
Goods Sold" accounts are also affected based on the valuation amount.
@@ -278,11 +278,11 @@
**Stock Ledger**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-receipt-sl.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-receipt-sl.png">
**General Ledger**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-receipt-gl.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-receipt-gl.png">
* * *
@@ -313,11 +313,11 @@
**Stock Ledger**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-issue-sl.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-issue-sl.png">
**General Ledger**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-issue-gl.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-issue-gl.png">
* * *
@@ -350,10 +350,10 @@
**Stock Ledger**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-transfer-sl.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-transfer-sl.png">
**General Ledger**
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-transfer-gl.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Perpetual Inventory" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/perpetual-st-transfer-gl.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/allow-over-delivery-billing-against-sales-order-upto-certain-limit.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/allow-over-delivery-billing-against-sales-order-upto-certain-limit.md
index 485c5c2..5838432 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/allow-over-delivery-billing-against-sales-order-upto-certain-limit.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/allow-over-delivery-billing-against-sales-order-upto-certain-limit.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
While creating Delivery Note, system validates if item's Qty mentined is same as in the Sales Order. If Item Qty has been increased, you will get over-delivery validation. If you want to be able to deliver more items than mentioned in the Sales Order, you should update "Allow over delivery or receipt upto this percent" in the Item master.
-<img alt="Item wise Allowance percentage" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/allowance-percentage-1.png">
+<img alt="Item wise Allowance percentage" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/allowance-percentage-1.png">
Item's and Rate is also validated when creating Sales Invoice from Sales Order. Also when creating Purchase Receipt and Purchaes Invoice from Purchase Order. Updating "Allow over delivery or receipt upto this percent" will be affective in all sales and purchase transactions.
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
3. Save Stock Settings.
-<img alt="Item wise Allowance percentage" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/allowance-percentage-2.png">
+<img alt="Item wise Allowance percentage" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/allowance-percentage-2.png">
<!-- markdown -->
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/auto-creation-of-material-request.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/auto-creation-of-material-request.md
index d1f3cee..2d5e935 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/auto-creation-of-material-request.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/auto-creation-of-material-request.md
@@ -6,17 +6,17 @@
In ERPNext, you can update item's Reorder Level and Reorder Qty in the Item master. If same item has different reorder level, you can also update warehouse-wise reorder level and reorder qty.
-<img alt="reorder level" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/reorder-request-1.png">
+<img alt="reorder level" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/reorder-request-1.png">
With reorder level, you can also define what should be the next action. Either new purchase or transfer from another warehouse. Based on setting in Item master, purpose will be updated in the Material Request as well.
-<img alt="reorder level next action" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/reorder-request-2.png">
+<img alt="reorder level next action" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/reorder-request-2.png">
When item's stock reaches reorder level, Material Request is auto-created automatically. You can enable this feature from:
`Stock > Setup > Stock Settings`
-<img alt="active auto-material request" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/reorder-request-3.png">
+<img alt="active auto-material request" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/reorder-request-3.png">
A separate Material Request will be created for each item. User with Purchase Manager's role will receive email alert about these Material Requests.
@@ -25,5 +25,5 @@
**An error occurred for certain Items while creating Material Requests based on Re-order level.**
**Date 01-04-2016 not in any Fiscal Year.**
-One of the reason of error could be Fiscal Year as well. Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/fiscal-year-error.html) to learn more about it.
+One of the reason of error could be Fiscal Year as well. Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/fiscal-year-error.html) to learn more about it.
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/creating-depreciation-for-item.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/creating-depreciation-for-item.md
index 801c089..fbe00cb 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/creating-depreciation-for-item.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/creating-depreciation-for-item.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
**Question:** A Fixed Asset Item has been purchased and stored in a warehouse. How to create a depreciation for a Fixed Asset Item?
-**Answer:**You can post asset depreciation entry for the fixed asset item via [Stock Reconciliation]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/opening-stock.html) Entry.
+**Answer:**You can post asset depreciation entry for the fixed asset item via [Stock Reconciliation](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/opening-stock.html) Entry.
####Step 1:
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
- **Qty (Quantity)** Leave this column blank.
- **Valuation Rate** will be item's value after depreciation.
-<img alt="reorder level" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/fixed-asset-dep-1.gif">
+<img alt="reorder level" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/fixed-asset-dep-1.gif">
After updating Valuation Rate for an item, come back to Stock Reconciliation and upload save .csv file.
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@
Select Expense account for depreciation in **Difference Account**. Value booked in the depreciation account will be the difference of old and next valuation rate of the fixed asset item, which will be actually the depreciation amount.
-<img alt="reorder level" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/fixed-asset-dep-2.png">
+<img alt="reorder level" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/fixed-asset-dep-2.png">
####Stock Reconciliation Help Video
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/maintain-stock-field-frozen-in-item-master.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/maintain-stock-field-frozen-in-item-master.md
index 0ef298d..e1fe295 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/maintain-stock-field-frozen-in-item-master.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/maintain-stock-field-frozen-in-item-master.md
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
1. Has Batch No.
1. Has Serial No.
-<img alt="Item Field Frozen" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/maintain-stock-1.png">
+<img alt="Item Field Frozen" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/maintain-stock-1.png">
For an item, once stock ledger entry is created, values in these fields will be froze. This is to prevent user from changing value which can lead to mis-match of actual stock, and stock level in the system of an item.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-batch-wise-inventory.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-batch-wise-inventory.md
index 0a6886b..85fc00f 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-batch-wise-inventory.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-batch-wise-inventory.md
@@ -6,13 +6,13 @@
To maintain batches against an Item you need to mention 'Has Batch No' as yes in the Item Master.
-<img alt="Batch Item" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/batchwise-stock-1.png">
+<img alt="Batch Item" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/batchwise-stock-1.png">
You can create a new Batch from:
`Stock > Documents > Batch > New`
-To learn more about batch, click [here.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/batch.html)
+To learn more about batch, click [here.](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/batch.html)
For the Batch item, updating Batch No. in the stock transactions (Purchase Receipt & Delivery Note) is mandatory.
@@ -20,13 +20,13 @@
When creating Purchase Receipt, you should create new Batch, or select one of the existing Batch master. One Batch can be associated with one Batch Item.
-<img alt="Batch in Purchase Receipt" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/batchwise-stock-2.png">
+<img alt="Batch in Purchase Receipt" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/batchwise-stock-2.png">
#### Delivery Note
Define Batch in Delivery Note Item table. If Batch item is added under Product Bundle, you can update it's Batch No. in the Packing List table sa well.
-<img alt="Batch in Delivery Note" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/batchwise-stock-3.png">
+<img alt="Batch in Delivery Note" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/batchwise-stock-3.png">
#### Batch-wise Stock Balance Report
@@ -34,4 +34,4 @@
Stock > Standard Reports > Batch-wise Balance History
-<img alt="Batchwise Stock Balance" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/batchwise-stock-4.png">
+<img alt="Batchwise Stock Balance" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/batchwise-stock-4.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-fractions-in-uom.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-fractions-in-uom.md
index a18f44c..904abd9 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-fractions-in-uom.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-fractions-in-uom.md
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
In the UoM master, you will find a field called "Must be whole number". Check this field to restrict user from enter value in decimal places in quantity field, for item having this UoM.
-<img alt="UoM Must be Whole No" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/uom-fraction-1.png">
+<img alt="UoM Must be Whole No" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/uom-fraction-1.png">
####Validation
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
`Quantity cannot be a fraction at row #`
-<img alt="UoM Validation Message" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/uom-fraction-2.png">
+<img alt="UoM Validation Message" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/uom-fraction-2.png">
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/opening-stock-balance-entry-for-the-serialized-and-batch-item.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/opening-stock-balance-entry-for-the-serialized-and-batch-item.md
index 72e889b..169fe9f 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/opening-stock-balance-entry-for-the-serialized-and-batch-item.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/opening-stock-balance-entry-for-the-serialized-and-batch-item.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
#Opening Stock Balance Entry for the Serialized and Batch Item
-Items for which Serial No. and Batch No. is maintained, opening stock balance entry for them is update via Stock Entry. [Click here to learn how serialized inventory is managed in ERPNext]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/serial-no.html).
+Items for which Serial No. and Batch No. is maintained, opening stock balance entry for them is update via Stock Entry. [Click here to learn how serialized inventory is managed in ERPNext](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/serial-no.html).
**Question:** Why Opening Balance entry for the Serialized and Batch Item cannot be updated via Stock Reconciliation?
@@ -36,13 +36,13 @@
For the serialized item, update quantity as many Serial Nos are their.
-For the serialized item, mention Serial Nos. equivalent to it's Qty. Or if Serial Nos. are configured to be created based on Prefix, then no need to mention Serial Nos. manually. Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/articles/serial-no-naming.html) to learn more about Serial No. naming.
+For the serialized item, mention Serial Nos. equivalent to it's Qty. Or if Serial Nos. are configured to be created based on Prefix, then no need to mention Serial Nos. manually. Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/serial-no-naming.html) to learn more about Serial No. naming.
For a batch item, provide Batch ID in which opening balance will be updated. Keep batch master ready, and updated it for the Batch Item. To create new Batch, go to:
`Stock > Setup > Batch > New`
-[Click here to learn how Batchwise inventory is managed in ERPNext.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-batch-wise-inventory.html)
+[Click here to learn how Batchwise inventory is managed in ERPNext.](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-batch-wise-inventory.html)
#### Step 7: Update Valuation Rate an Item
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@
As per perpetual inventory valuation system, accounting entry is created for every stock transaction. Double entry accounting system requires Total Debit matching with Total Credit in an entry. On the submission of Stock Entry, system debits Warehouse account by total value of items. To balance the same, we use Temporary Opening account as a Difference Account.
-<img alt="Difference Account" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/difference-account-1.png">
+<img alt="Difference Account" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/difference-account-1.png">
#### Step 9: Save and Submit Stock Entry
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/repack-entry.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/repack-entry.md
index a708e35..3011bad 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/repack-entry.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/repack-entry.md
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
For repacked/output items, only Target Warehouse will be provided. You will have to provide valuation for the repack items.
-<img alt="Repack Entry" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/repack-1.png">
+<img alt="Repack Entry" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/repack-1.png">
Update Qty for all the items selected.
@@ -32,6 +32,6 @@
On submitting Stock Entry, stock of input item will be reduced from Source Warehouse, and stock of repack/output item will be added in the Target Warehouse.
-<img alt="Repack Stock Entry" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/repack-2.png">
+<img alt="Repack Stock Entry" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/repack-2.png">
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/serial-no-naming.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/serial-no-naming.md
index 2b5014f..3ed608e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/serial-no-naming.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/serial-no-naming.md
@@ -16,11 +16,11 @@
On submission of Purchase Receipt or Stock entry for the serialized item, Serial Nos. will be auto-generated.
-<img alt="Serial Nos Entry" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/serial-naming-1.png">
+<img alt="Serial Nos Entry" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/serial-naming-1.png">
Generated Serial numbers will be updated for each item.
-<img alt="Serial Nos Created" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/serial-naming-2.png">
+<img alt="Serial Nos Created" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/serial-naming-2.png">
###2. Serializing Manufacturing Item
@@ -30,12 +30,12 @@
When Item is set as serialized, it will allow you to mentioned Series for it.
-<img alt="Serial Nos Created" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/serial-naming-3.png">
+<img alt="Serial Nos Created" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/serial-naming-3.png">
####2.2 Production Entry for Serialized Item
On submission of production entry for manufacturing item, system will automatically generate Serial Nos. following Series as specified in the Item master.
-<img alt="Serial Nos Created" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/serial-naming-4.png">
+<img alt="Serial Nos Created" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/serial-naming-4.png">
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/stock-entry-purpose.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/stock-entry-purpose.md
index 8194da5..be5a962 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/stock-entry-purpose.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/stock-entry-purpose.md
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
Material Issue is generally made for the low value consumable items like office stationary, product consumables etc. Also you can create Material Issue to reconcile serialized and batched item's stock.
-<img alt="Material Issue" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/stock-entry-issue.png">
+<img alt="Material Issue" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/stock-entry-issue.png">
#### 2.Purpose: Material Receipt
@@ -18,34 +18,34 @@
For the stock valuation purpose, provided Item Valuation becomes a mandatory field in the Material Receipt entry.
-<img alt="Material Receipt" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/stock-entry-receipt.png">
+<img alt="Material Receipt" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/stock-entry-receipt.png">
#### 3.Purpose: Material Transfer
Material Transfer entry is created for the inter-warehouse Material Transfer.
-<img alt="Material Transfer" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/stock-entry-transfer.png">
+<img alt="Material Transfer" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/stock-entry-transfer.png">
#### 4.Purpose: Material Transfer for Manufacture
In the manufacturing process, raw-materials are issued from the stores to the production department (generally WIP warehouse). This Material Transfer entry is created from Production Order. Items in this entry are fetched from the BOM of production Item, as selected in Production Order.
-<img alt="Transfer for Manufacture" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/stock-entry-manufacture-transfer.gif">
+<img alt="Transfer for Manufacture" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/stock-entry-manufacture-transfer.gif">
#### 4.Purpose: Manufacture
Manufacture is created from Production Order. In this entry, both raw-material item as well as production item are fetched from the BOM, selected in the Production Order. For the raw-material items, only Source Warehouse (generally WIP warehouse) is mentioned. For the production item, only target warehouse as mentioned in the Production Order is updated. On submission, stock of raw-material items are deducted from Source Warehouse, which indicates that raw-material items were consumed in the manufacturing process. Production Item is added to the Target Warehouse marking the completion of production cycle.
-<img alt="Manufacture" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/stock-entry-manufacture.gif">
+<img alt="Manufacture" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/stock-entry-manufacture.gif">
#### 5.Purpose: Repack
-Repack Entry is created when items purchases in bulk is repacked under smaller packs. 
+Repack Entry is created when items purchases in bulk is repacked under smaller packs. 
#### 6.Purpose: Subcontract
-Subcontracting transaction involves company transfer raw-material items to the sub-contractors warehouse. This requires adding a warehouse for the sub-contractor as well. Sub-contract entry transfers stock from the companies warehouse to the sub-contractors warehouse..
+Subcontracting transaction involves company transfer raw-material items to the sub-contractors warehouse. This requires adding a warehouse for the sub-contractor as well. Sub-contract entry transfers stock from the companies warehouse to the sub-contractors warehouse..
-<img alt="Subcontract" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/stock-entry-subcontract.gif">
+<img alt="Subcontract" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/stock-entry-subcontract.gif">
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/track-items-using-barcode.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/track-items-using-barcode.md
index 26872b1..bafa035 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/track-items-using-barcode.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/track-items-using-barcode.md
@@ -8,10 +8,10 @@
To set the barcode of a particular item, you will have to open the Item record. You can also enter barcode while creating a new item.
-<img alt="Material Transfer" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/barcode-item-master.png">
+<img alt="Material Transfer" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/barcode-item-master.png">
Once barcode field is updated in item master, items can be fetched using barcode. This feature will be availble in Delivery Note, Sales Invoice and Purchase Receipt transactions only.
-<img alt="Material Transfer" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/barcode-item-selection.gif">
+<img alt="Material Transfer" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/barcode-item-selection.gif">
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/batch.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/batch.md
index 8283af3..a97be92 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/batch.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/batch.md
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
If you want automatic batch creation at the time of Purchase Receipt, you must check "Create New Batches Automatically"
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Item Setup for Batches" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item_setup_for_batch.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Item Setup for Batches" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item_setup_for_batch.png">
### Creating Batches
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
When you open a batch, you will see all the quantities relating this that batch on the page.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Batch View" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/batch_view.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Batch View" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/batch_view.png">
To move the batch from one warehouse to another, you can click on the move button.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/delivery-note.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/delivery-note.md
index f9cdfb7..a59ac35 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/delivery-note.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/delivery-note.md
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
or from a “Submitted” Sales Order (that is not already shipped) by clicking on
“Make Delivery Note”.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Delivery Note" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/delivery-note.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Delivery Note" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/delivery-note.png">
You can also “fetch” the details from an unshipped Sales Order.
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
### Shipping Packets or Items with Product Bundle
-If you are shipping Items that have a [Product Bundle]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/selling/setup/product-bundle.html), ERPNext will automatically
+If you are shipping Items that have a [Product Bundle](/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/product-bundle.html), ERPNext will automatically
create a “Packing List” table for you based on the sub-Items in that Item.
If your Items are serialized, then for Product Bundle type of Items, you will have
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/installation-note.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/installation-note.md
index 2a85a4f..a75e15f 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/installation-note.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/installation-note.md
@@ -2,6 +2,6 @@
You can use installation note to record the instalation of a product having a serial number.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Installation Note" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/installation-note.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Installation Note" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/installation-note.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/index.md
index f8c2a9c..3e2bdd3 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/index.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/index.md
@@ -7,11 +7,11 @@
## Item Properties
* **Item Name:** Item name is the actual name of your product or service.
- * **Item Code:** Item Code is a short-form to denote your Item. If you have very few Items, it is advisable to keep the Item Name and the Item Code same. This helps new users to recognise and update Item details in all transactions. In case you have lot of Items with long names and the list runs in hundreds, it is advisable to code. To understand naming Item codes see [Item Codification]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-codification.html)
- * **Item Group:** Item Group is used to categorize an Item under various criterias like products, raw materials, services, sub-assemblies, consumables or all Item groups. Create your default Item Group list under Setup> Item Group and pre-select the option while filling your New Item details under [Item Group]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-group.html)
+ * **Item Code:** Item Code is a short-form to denote your Item. If you have very few Items, it is advisable to keep the Item Name and the Item Code same. This helps new users to recognise and update Item details in all transactions. In case you have lot of Items with long names and the list runs in hundreds, it is advisable to code. To understand naming Item codes see [Item Codification](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-codification.html)
+ * **Item Group:** Item Group is used to categorize an Item under various criterias like products, raw materials, services, sub-assemblies, consumables or all Item groups. Create your default Item Group list under Setup> Item Group and pre-select the option while filling your New Item details under [Item Group](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-group.html)
* **Default Unit of Measure:** This is the default measuring unit that you will use for your product. It could be in nos, kgs, meters, etc. You can store all the UOM’s that your product will require under Set Up> Master Data > UOM. These can be preselected while filling New Item by using % sign to get a pop up of the UOM list.
* **Brand:** If you have more than one brand save them under Set Up> Master Data> Brand and pre-select them while filling a New Item.
- * **Variant:** A Item Variant is a different version of a Item.To learn more about managing variants see [Item Variants]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-variants.html)
+ * **Variant:** A Item Variant is a different version of a Item.To learn more about managing variants see [Item Variants](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-variants.html)
### Upload an Image
@@ -31,11 +31,11 @@
These numbers help to track individual units or batches of Items which you sell. It also tracks warranty and returns. In case any individual Item is recalled by the supplier the number system helps to track individual Item. The numbering system also manages expiry dates. Please note that if you sell your items in thousands, and if the items are very small like pens or erasers, you need not serialize them. In ERPNext, you will have to mention the serial number in some accounting entries. To create serial numbers you will have to manually create all the numbers in your entries. If your product is not a big consumer durable Item, if it has no warranty and has no chances of being recalled, avoid giving serial numbers.
> Tip: While entering an item code in an items table, if the table requires inventory details, then depending on whether the entered item is batched or serialized, you can enter serial or batch numbers right away in a pop-up dialog.
-<img alt="Serial No modal" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/serial_no_modal.gif"><img alt="Batch No modal" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/batch_no_modal.png">
+<img alt="Serial No modal" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/serial_no_modal.gif"><img alt="Batch No modal" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/batch_no_modal.png">
> Important: Once you mark an item as serialized or batched or neither, you cannot change it after you have made any stock entry.
- * [Discussion on Serialized Inventory]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.html)
+ * [Discussion on Serialized Inventory](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.html)
### Re Ordering
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
These settings are required only if a particular Item has a different tax rate than the rate defined in the standard tax Account. For example, If you have a tax Account, “VAT 10%” and this particular Item is exempted from tax, then you select “VAT 10%” in the first column, and set “0” as the tax rate in the second column.
-Go to [Setting Up Taxes]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html) to understand this topic in detail.
+Go to [Setting Up Taxes](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html) to understand this topic in detail.
### Inspection
@@ -57,9 +57,9 @@
### Purchase Details
-<img alt="Item Purchase Details" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-purchase.png">
+<img alt="Item Purchase Details" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-purchase.png">
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase details" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-purchase.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase details" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-purchase.png">
* **Lead time days:** Lead time days are the number of days required for the Item to reach the warehouse.
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@
###Supplier Details
-<img alt="Item Supplier Details" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-supplier.png">
+<img alt="Item Supplier Details" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-supplier.png">
* **Default Supplier:** Supplier from whom you generally purchase this item.
@@ -79,25 +79,25 @@
### Sales Details
-<img alt="Item Sales Details" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-sales.png">
+<img alt="Item Sales Details" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-sales.png">
* **Default Income Account:** Income account selected here will be fetched automatically in sales invoice for this item.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales details" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-sales.png)">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales details" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-sales.png)">
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales details" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-sales.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales details" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-sales.png">
***Cost Centre:** Cost center selected here will be fetched automatically in sales invoice for this item.
***Customer Codes:** Track Item Code assigned by the Customers for this Item. This will help you in searching item while creating Sales Order based on the Item Code in the Customer's Purchase Order.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales details" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-sales.png)">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Sales details" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-sales.png)">
### Manufacturing And Website
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Manufaturing details" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-manufacturing-website.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Manufaturing details" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-manufacturing-website.png">
-Visit [Manufacturing]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/manufacturing.html) and [Website ]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/website.html)to understand these topics in detail.
+Visit [Manufacturing](/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing.html) and [Website ](/docs/user/manual/en/website.html)to understand these topics in detail.
### Learn more about Item
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-price.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-price.md
index eec5a99..52850c2 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-price.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-price.md
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
You can create multiple Price List in ERPNext to track Selling and Buying Price List of an item separtely. Also if item's selling prices id changing based on territory, or due to other criteria, you can create multiple selling Price List for it.
-
+
On selection of Price List, its currency and for selling or buying property will be fetched as well.
@@ -26,13 +26,13 @@
Select item for which Item Price record is to be created. On selection of Item Code, Item Name and Description will be fetched as well.
-
+
Step 3: Enter Rate
Enter selling/buying rate of an item in Price List currency.
-
+
Step 4: Save Item Price
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-valuation-fifo-and-moving-average.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-valuation-fifo-and-moving-average.md
index 8784f68..cc59618 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-valuation-fifo-and-moving-average.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-valuation-fifo-and-moving-average.md
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
* **FIFO (First In First Out):** In this system, ERPNext assumes that you will consume / sell those Items first which you bought first. For example, if you buy an Item at price X and then after a few days at price Y, whenever you sell your Item, ERPNext will reduce the quantity of the Item priced at X first and then Y.
-<img alt="FIFO" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/fifo.png">
+<img alt="FIFO" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/fifo.png">
* **Moving Average:** In this method, ERPNext assumes that the value of the item at any point is the average price of the units of that Item in stock. For example, if the value of an Item is X in a Warehouse with quantity Y and another quantity Y1 is added to the Warehouse at cost X1, the new value X2 would be:
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-variants.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-variants.md
index 7514404..8b6da16 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-variants.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-variants.md
@@ -19,33 +19,33 @@
* The Item shall then be referred to as a so called 'Template'. Such a Template is not identical to a regular 'Item' any longer. For example it (the Template) can not be used directly in any Transactions (Sales Order, Delivery Note, Purchase Invoice) itself. Only the Variants of an Item (_blue_ t-shirt in size _small)_ can be practically used in such. Therefore it would be ideal to decide whether an item 'Has Variants' or not directly when creating it.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Has Variants" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-has-variants.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Has Variants" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-has-variants.png">
On selecting 'Has Variants' a table shall appear. Specify the variant attributes for the Item in the table.
In case the attribute has Numeric Values, you can specify the range and increment values here.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Valid Attributes" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-attributes.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Valid Attributes" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-attributes.png">
> Note: You cannot make Transactions against a 'Template'
To create 'Item Variants' against a 'Template' select 'Make Variants'
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Make Variants" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/make-variant.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Make Variants" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/make-variant.png">
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Make Variants" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/make-variant-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Make Variants" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/make-variant-1.png">
-To learn more about setting Attributes Master check [Item Attributes]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-attribute.html)
+To learn more about setting Attributes Master check [Item Attributes](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-attribute.html)
### Variants Based on Manufacturers
To setup variants based on Manufactueres, in your Item template, set "Variants Based On" as "Manufacturers"
<img class='screenshot' alt='Setup Item Variant by Manufacturer'
- src='{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/select-mfg-for-variant.png'>
+ src='/docs/assets/img/stock/select-mfg-for-variant.png'>
When you make a new Variant, the system will prompt you to select a Manufacturer. You can also optionally put in a Manufacturer Part Number
<img class='screenshot' alt='Setup Item Variant by Manufacturer'
- src='{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/set-variant-by-mfg.png'>
+ src='/docs/assets/img/stock/set-variant-by-mfg.png'>
The naming of the variant will be the name (ID) of the template Item with a number suffix. e.g. "ITEM000" will have variant "ITEM000-1"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/purchase-details.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/purchase-details.md
index 134d551..3de1724 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/purchase-details.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/purchase-details.md
@@ -4,4 +4,4 @@
A warranty means a guarantee or a promise which provides assurance by one party to the other party which allows for a legal remedy if that promise is not true or followed. A warranty period is a time period in which a purchased product may be returned or exchanged.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Item Warranty" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-warranty.png">
\ No newline at end of file
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Item Warranty" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-warranty.png">
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/reorder.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/reorder.md
index 548a8a9..06caa2c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/reorder.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/reorder.md
@@ -10,4 +10,4 @@
For example, If reorder level is 100 items, your reorder quantity may not necessarily be 100 items. The Reorder quantity can be greater than or equal to reorder level. It may depend upon lead time, discount, transportation and average daily consumption.
-<img alt="Item Reorder" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-reorder.png">
\ No newline at end of file
+<img alt="Item Reorder" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-reorder.png">
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/material-request.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/material-request.md
index ca2fe77..c3ba13c 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/material-request.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/material-request.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
A Material Request is a simple document identifying a requirement of a set of
Items (products or services) for a particular reason.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Material Request" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/material-request-flowchart.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Material Request" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/material-request-flowchart.png">
To generate a Material Request manually go to:
@@ -11,14 +11,14 @@
#### Creating Material Request
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Material Request" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/buying/material-request.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Material Request" src="/docs/assets/img/buying/material-request.png">
A Material Request can be generated:
* Automatically from a Sales Order.
* Automatically when the Projected Quantity of an Item in stores reaches a particular level.
* Automatically from your Bill of Materials if you use Production Plan to plan your manufacturing activities.
- * If your Items are inventory items, you must also mention the Warehouse where you expect these Items to be delivered. This helps to keep track of the [Projected Quantity]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/projected-quantity.html) for this Item.
+ * If your Items are inventory items, you must also mention the Warehouse where you expect these Items to be delivered. This helps to keep track of the [Projected Quantity](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/projected-quantity.html) for this Item.
A Material Request can be of type:
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
* Material Issue - If the requested material is to be Issued.
* Manufacture - If the requested material is to be Produced.
-The User can also raise a [Request For Quotation]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/buying/request-for-quotation.html) against a Material Request. To create a Request For Quotation the user can click on 'Make'.
+The User can also raise a [Request For Quotation](/docs/user/manual/en/buying/request-for-quotation.html) against a Material Request. To create a Request For Quotation the user can click on 'Make'.
> Info: Material Request is not mandatory. It is ideal if you have centralized
buying so that you can collect this information from various departments.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/opening-stock.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/opening-stock.md
index e59fb42..ea77999 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/opening-stock.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/opening-stock.md
@@ -10,6 +10,6 @@
If you are not making opening Stock Entry, you can select "Stock Adjustment" account in Difference/Expense Account field which is an expense account.
-To understand Opening Stock for serialized Items visit [Stock Reconciliation]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.html)
+To understand Opening Stock for serialized Items visit [Stock Reconciliation](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.html)
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/projected-quantity.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/projected-quantity.md
index 2f432fc..e02b2c3 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/projected-quantity.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/projected-quantity.md
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
Having a tight control of the projected inventory is crucial to determine
shortages and to calculate the right order quantity.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Projected Quantity" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/projected_quantity.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Projected Quantity" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/projected_quantity.png">
> Projected Qty = Actual Qty + Planned Qty + Requested Qty + Ordered Qty -
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/purchase-receipt.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/purchase-receipt.md
index 7241d31..523b0fa 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/purchase-receipt.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/purchase-receipt.md
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
or from a “Submitted” Purchase Order, by clicking on “Make Purchase Receipt”.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Receipt" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/purchase-receipt.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Purchase Receipt" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/purchase-receipt.png">
### Rejections
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/purchase-return.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/purchase-return.md
index 4096452..2b63034 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/purchase-return.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/purchase-return.md
@@ -8,16 +8,16 @@
First open the original Purchase Receipt, against which supplier delivered the items.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Original Purchase Receipt" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/purchase-return-original-purchase-receipt.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Original Purchase Receipt" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/purchase-return-original-purchase-receipt.png">
Then click on "Make Purchase Return", it will open a new Purchase Receipt with "Is Return" checked, items and taxes with negative amount.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Return Against Purchase Receipt" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/purchase-return-against-purchase-receipt.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Return Against Purchase Receipt" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/purchase-return-against-purchase-receipt.png">
On submission of Return Purchase Return, system will decrease item qty from the mentioned warehouse. To maintain correct stock valuation, stock balance will also go up according to the original purchase rate of the returned items.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Return Stock Ledger" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/purchase-return-stock-ledger.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Return Stock Ledger" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/purchase-return-stock-ledger.png">
If Perpetual Inventory enabled, system will also post accounting entry against warehouse account to sync warehouse account balance with stock balance as per Stock Ledger.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Return Stock Ledger" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/purchase-return-general-ledger.png">
\ No newline at end of file
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Return Stock Ledger" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/purchase-return-general-ledger.png">
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/sales-return.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/sales-return.md
index 6b2ee1c..1ba17c2 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/sales-return.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/sales-return.md
@@ -8,22 +8,22 @@
First open the original Delivery Note / Sales Invoice, against which customer returned the items.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Original Delivery Note" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/sales-return-original-delivery-note.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Original Delivery Note" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/sales-return-original-delivery-note.png">
Then click on "Make Sales Return", it will open a new Delivery Note with "Is Return" checked, items and taxes with negative amount.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Return Against Delivery Note" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/sales-return-against-delivery-note.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Return Against Delivery Note" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/sales-return-against-delivery-note.png">
You can also create the return entry against original Sales Invoice, to return stock along with credit note, check "Update Stock" option in Return Sales Invoice.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Return Against Sales Invoice" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/sales-return-against-sales-invoice.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Return Against Sales Invoice" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/sales-return-against-sales-invoice.png">
On submission of Return Delivery Note / Sales Invoice, system will increase stock balance in the mentioned warehouse. To maintain correct stock valuation, stock balance will go up according to the original purchase rate of the returned items.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Return Stock Ledger" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/sales-return-stock-ledger.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Return Stock Ledger" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/sales-return-stock-ledger.png">
In case of Return Sales Invoice, Customer account will be credited and associated income and tax account will be debited.
If Perpetual Inventory enabled, system will also post accounting entry against warehouse account to sync warehouse account balance with stock balance as per Stock Ledger.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Return Stock Ledger" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/sales-return-general-ledger.png">
\ No newline at end of file
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Return Stock Ledger" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/sales-return-general-ledger.png">
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/serial-no.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/serial-no.md
index 0158124..cb766ba 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/serial-no.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/serial-no.md
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
Invoice). When a new Serial No is created directly, its warehouse cannot be
set.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Serial Number" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/serial-no.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Serial Number" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/serial-no.png">
* The Status is set based on Stock Entry.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-attribute.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-attribute.md
index 8d37afc..a6e0eec 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-attribute.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-attribute.md
@@ -2,17 +2,17 @@
You can define Attributes and attribute values for your Item Variants here.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Attribute Master" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-attribute.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Attribute Master" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-attribute.png">
#### Non Numeric Attributes
* For Non Numeric Attributes, specify attributes values along with its abbreviation in the Attribute Value Table.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Attribute Master" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-attribute-non-numeric.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Attribute Master" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-attribute-non-numeric.png">
#### Numeric Attributes
* If your attribute is Numeric, select Numeric Values
* Specify the Range and the Increment Value
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Attribute Master" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-attribute-numeric.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Attribute Master" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-attribute-numeric.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-group.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-group.md
index 667f29f..a280090 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-group.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-group.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
category. In case, your product is used only in trading, you can categorise it
under Trading.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Item Group Tree" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-group-tree.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Item Group Tree" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-group-tree.png">
### Create a Item Group
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
* Select 'Add Child'
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Add Item Group" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-group-new.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Add Item Group" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-group-new.gif">
### Delete an Item Group
@@ -23,6 +23,6 @@
* Select 'delete'
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Add Item Group" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/item-group-del.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Add Item Group" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/item-group-del.gif">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/stock-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/stock-settings.md
index c2aeae9..32562c6 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/stock-settings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/stock-settings.md
@@ -2,6 +2,6 @@
You can set default settings for your stock related transactions here.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Settings" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/stock-settings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Settings" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/stock-settings.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/stock-entry.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/stock-entry.md
index e931b88..e2ac6a1 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/stock-entry.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/stock-entry.md
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
> Stock > Stock Entry > New
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Entry" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/stock-entry.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Entry" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/stock-entry.png">
Stock Entries can be made for the following purposes:
@@ -29,15 +29,15 @@
To add additional costs, enter the description and amount of the cost in the Additional Costs table.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Entry Additional Costs" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/additional-costs-table.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Entry Additional Costs" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/additional-costs-table.png">
The added additional costs will be distributed among the receiving items (where the target warehouse mentioned) proportionately based on Basic Amount of the items. And the distributed additional cost will be added to the basic rate of the item, to calculate valuation rate.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Entry Item Valuation Rate" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/stock-entry-item-valuation-rate.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Stock Entry Item Valuation Rate" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/stock-entry-item-valuation-rate.png">
If perpetual inventory system is enabled, additional costs will be booked in "Expense Included In Valuation" account.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Additional Costs General Ledger" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/additional-costs-general-ledger.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Additional Costs General Ledger" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/additional-costs-general-ledger.png">
> **Note:** To update Stock from a spreadsheet, see [Stock Reconciliation]({{doc_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.html).
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md
index 979b155..a11759d 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
In the document, you can select multiple Purchase Receipts and fetch all items from those Purchase Receipts. Then you should add applicable charges in “Taxes and Charges” table. You can easily delete an item if the added charges is not applicable to that item. The added charges are proportionately distributed among all the items based their amount.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Landed Cost Vouher" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/landed-cost.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Landed Cost Vouher" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/landed-cost.png">
### What happend on submission?
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/packing-slip.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/packing-slip.md
index 11543ee..60cfb5d 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/packing-slip.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/packing-slip.md
@@ -4,6 +4,6 @@
While Shipping a product 'Draft' for Delivery Notes are created.
You can make a Packing Slip from these Delivery Notes (Draft)
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Packing Slip" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/packing-slip.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Packing Slip" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/packing-slip.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md
index 3d0331a..254da8a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md
@@ -5,6 +5,6 @@
> Stock > Quality Inspection > New
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Quality Inspection" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/quality-inspection.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Quality Inspection" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/quality-inspection.png">
{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/warehouse.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/warehouse.md
index 7c49463..d90e3f9 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/warehouse.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/stock/warehouse.md
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
To go to Warehouse, click on Stock and go to Warehouse under Setup. You
could also switch to 'Tree' View or simply type warehouse tree in the awsone bar.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Warehouse" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/stock/warehouse.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Warehouse" src="/docs/assets/img/stock/warehouse.png">
In ERPNext, every Warehouse must belong to a specific company, to maintain
company wise stock balance. In order to do so each Warehouse is linked with an
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/support/issue.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/support/issue.md
index 6aaef68..8c94c90 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/support/issue.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/support/issue.md
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
> Support > Issue > New Issue
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Issue" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/support/issue.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Issue" src="/docs/assets/img/support/issue.png">
#### Discussion Thread
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/support/maintenance-schedule.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/support/maintenance-schedule.md
index fa62489..a9be3b9 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/support/maintenance-schedule.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/support/maintenance-schedule.md
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
> Support > Maintenance Schedule > New Maintenance Schedule
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Maintenance Schedule" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/support/maintenance-schedule.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Maintenance Schedule" src="/docs/assets/img/support/maintenance-schedule.png">
In the Maintenance Schedule, there are two sections:
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/support/maintenance-visit.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/support/maintenance-visit.md
index 87afd4a..5bda36a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/support/maintenance-visit.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/support/maintenance-visit.md
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
> Support > Maintenance Visit > New Maintenance Visit
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Maintenance Visit" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/support/maintenance-visit.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Maintenance Visit" src="/docs/assets/img/support/maintenance-visit.png">
The Maintenance Visit contains information about the:
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/support/support_reports.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/support/support_reports.md
index e136694..7ef6cea 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/support/support_reports.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/support/support_reports.md
@@ -7,4 +7,4 @@
> Support > Reports > Support Hours
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Maintenance Visit" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/support/support_hours.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Maintenance Visit" src="/docs/assets/img/support/support_hours.png">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/support/warranty-claim.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/support/warranty-claim.md
index abe2c35..8080e65 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/support/warranty-claim.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/support/warranty-claim.md
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
> Support > Warranty Claim > New Warranty Claim
-
+
If a Customer visit is required to address the issue, you can create a new
Maintenance Visit record from this.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/Global-search.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/Global-search.md
index a556dde..482f12f 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/Global-search.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/Global-search.md
@@ -10,9 +10,9 @@
### Using Awesome bar for Global Search.
-<img alt="Global Search" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/Global Search .gif">
+<img alt="Global Search" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/Global Search .gif">
### Enable Global Search for fields in a Doctype.
-<img alt="Global Search" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/Enable Global Search .gif">
+<img alt="Global Search" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/Enable Global Search .gif">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/adding-attachments-to-outgoing-messages.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/adding-attachments-to-outgoing-messages.md
index bad7224..4ab4df4 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/adding-attachments-to-outgoing-messages.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/adding-attachments-to-outgoing-messages.md
@@ -2,10 +2,10 @@
#Adding Attachments to Outgoing Messages
-ERPNext has in-built file manager. Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/file-manager.html) to learn more on how attachments are managed in ERPNext.
+ERPNext has in-built file manager. Click [here](/docs/user/videos/learn/file-manager.html) to learn more on how attachments are managed in ERPNext.
If you have file attached to the document (say Purchase Order), and same file needs to be emailed as attachment, following is how you can achieve it.
-<img alt="Emailing Attachments" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/email-file-attachment.gif">
+<img alt="Emailing Attachments" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/email-file-attachment.gif">
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/adding-file-as-a-attachment.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/adding-file-as-a-attachment.md
index 095a10e..fad7319 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/adding-file-as-a-attachment.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/adding-file-as-a-attachment.md
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
####From Browser
-<img alt="Sales Order File Attachment" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/attach-file-1.gif">
+<img alt="Sales Order File Attachment" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/attach-file-1.gif">
####By drag and drop
-<img alt="Sales Order File Attachment" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/attach-file-2.gif">
+<img alt="Sales Order File Attachment" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/attach-file-2.gif">
Click on Attach to browse and select the file.
@@ -22,11 +22,11 @@
If you use separate server for files, or use online service like Dropbox, you can attach file by providing link of a particular file.
-<img alt="Sales Order Select File" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/attach-file-3.gif">
+<img alt="Sales Order Select File" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/attach-file-3.gif">
`For hosted users, limit of 5 MB is applied on file size.`
-To ensure there are not many files attached to a document, which can affect your accounts performance, you can set limit as how many files can be attached to a particular document. Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/increase-max-attachments.html) to learn more about it.
+To ensure there are not many files attached to a document, which can affect your accounts performance, you can set limit as how many files can be attached to a particular document. Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/increase-max-attachments.html) to learn more about it.
####File Manager
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/bulk-rename.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/bulk-rename.md
index 1297492..17e81c9 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/bulk-rename.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/bulk-rename.md
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
In a spreadsheet file, enter old Item IDs in the first column, and new Item Ids in the second column. Save spreadsheet file in a CSV format.
-<img alt="Data File" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/rename-docs-1.png">
+<img alt="Data File" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/rename-docs-1.png">
#### Step 2: Upload Data File
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
Select DocType which you want to rename. Here DocType will be Item. Then Browse and Upload data file.
-
+
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/check-link-between-documents.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/check-link-between-documents.md
index 50477e4..03ab427 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/check-link-between-documents.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/check-link-between-documents.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
Links option shows one document is linked to which other documents. Check Menu for the Links options.
-<img alt="Cancel Doc" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/links-1.gif">
+<img alt="Cancel Doc" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/links-1.gif">
####Scenario
@@ -20,6 +20,6 @@
Links only shows forward linkages. For the backward links, you should check current document itself. In the Purchase Receipt Item table table, you can check which Purchase Order it is linked to.
-<img alt="Cancel Doc" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/links-2.gif">
+<img alt="Cancel Doc" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/links-2.gif">
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/delete-submitted-document.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/delete-submitted-document.md
index 0f02850..f18a355 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/delete-submitted-document.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/delete-submitted-document.md
@@ -14,18 +14,18 @@
You will find option to Cancel in the submitted document. If document is at draft stage, it can delete directly. Also if document is not submittable, but only save, it can be deleted directly.
-<img alt="Cancel Doc" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/delete-submitted-doc-1.png">
+<img alt="Cancel Doc" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/delete-submitted-doc-1.png">
####Step 2: Delete Document
After cancellation, go to Menu and click on Delete.
-<img alt="Delete Doc" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/delete-submitted-doc-2.png">
+<img alt="Delete Doc" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/delete-submitted-doc-2.png">
####Step 3: Deleting from List
For bulk deletion, you can select multiple Cancelled records and delete at once from the List View.
-<img alt="Delete Doc from List" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/delete-submitted-doc-3.gif">
+<img alt="Delete Doc from List" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/delete-submitted-doc-3.gif">
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/duplicate-record.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/duplicate-record.md
index 1434bc8..f57e76f 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/duplicate-record.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/duplicate-record.md
@@ -12,6 +12,6 @@
`Menu > Copy`
-<img alt="Duplicate" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/duplicate.gif">
+<img alt="Duplicate" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/duplicate.gif">
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/merging-documents.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/merging-documents.md
index 035cdc2..683a474 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/merging-documents.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/merging-documents.md
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
For an Account to be merged, click on the "Rename" option.
-<img alt="Sales Order File Attachment" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/merge-docs-1.png">
+<img alt="Sales Order File Attachment" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/merge-docs-1.png">
#### Step 3: Merge Account
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
Following is how the merged account will appear in the Chart of Accounts master.
-<img alt="Sales Order File Attachment" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/merge-docs-2.gif">
+<img alt="Sales Order File Attachment" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/merge-docs-2.gif">
###Effect of Merging
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/pos-view.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/pos-view.md
index e29602c..75f057e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/pos-view.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/pos-view.md
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
Using POS View, you can only create Sales Invoice, without switching to standard form view. For other transactions, like Sales Order, Delivery Note, Purchase Order, Purchase Receipt etc., POS View is only used for Item selection. For entering other values in the transaction, you should switch to form view.
-<img alt="POS View" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/pos-view.gif">
+<img alt="POS View" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/pos-view.gif">
For creating POS Invoice, check following help video.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/renaming-documents.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/renaming-documents.md
index 73fba6a..f6072d3 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/renaming-documents.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/renaming-documents.md
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
#### 2. Rename
-<img alt="Renamed Item" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/rename-a-doc.gif">
+<img alt="Renamed Item" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/rename-a-doc.gif">
###Effect of Renaming
@@ -18,8 +18,8 @@
###See Also
-1. [Bulk Renaming]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/bulk-rename.html)
-2. [Document Merging]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/merging-documents.html)
+1. [Bulk Renaming](/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/bulk-rename.html)
+2. [Document Merging](/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/merging-documents.html)
**List of Renamable Documents**
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/search-filter.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/search-filter.md
index c239d86..307c996 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/search-filter.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/search-filter.md
@@ -10,20 +10,20 @@
Select field of the document based on which you wish to filter records.
-<img alt="Search Filter Field" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/search-filter-field.gif">
+<img alt="Search Filter Field" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/search-filter-field.gif">
#### Based On
With Field, you will provide a value. In the based on field, you can define a criterion that when filter should be applied in record. It will be when value define for the field if filter is:
-<img alt="Search Filter Based On" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/search-filter-based-on.gif">
+<img alt="Search Filter Based On" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/search-filter-based-on.gif">
#### Value
A value should be entered in this field based on while records will be filtered. After filter is applied, records will be filtered based on it. And filter will shrunk under one field/button.
-<img alt="Search Filter Based On" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/search-filter-result.png">
+<img alt="Search Filter Based On" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/search-filter-result.png">
You can apply multiple filters at a time. To remove specific filter, just click on cancelled (X) sign ahead of it.
@@ -32,6 +32,6 @@
From the list views, you can also apply filters by clicking on the Status field.
-<img alt="Renamed Item" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/search-filter-auto.gif">
+<img alt="Renamed Item" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/search-filter-auto.gif">
<!-- markdown -->
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/tree-master-renaming.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/tree-master-renaming.md
index cdb9928..935e32b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/tree-master-renaming.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/tree-master-renaming.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
#Tree Master Renaming
-There are various master which are maintained in tree structure. Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters.html) to learn more about tree structured masters in ERPNext.
+There are various master which are maintained in tree structure. Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters.html) to learn more about tree structured masters in ERPNext.
Following are the steps to be followed for renaming ID of a master which is maintained in tree structure. Let's rename an Account for the instance.
@@ -14,12 +14,12 @@
When click on the Account, you will find Rename option.
-<img alt="Account" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/rename-account.png">
+<img alt="Account" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/rename-account.png">
#### Step 2: Rename Account
On clicking Rename, you will get field to enter New Name. After entering new name for the Account, click on the "Rename" button.
-<img alt="Renamed Account" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/rename-account-2.gif">
+<img alt="Renamed Account" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/articles/rename-account-2.gif">
<!-- markdown -->
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/assignment.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/assignment.md
index 6fcc34e..ffd0abd 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/assignment.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/assignment.md
@@ -12,13 +12,13 @@
Assign to option is located at the footer of document. Clicking on Assignment Icon on the tool bar will fast-forward you to footer of same document.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/assign-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/assign-1.png">
#### Step 2: Assign to User
In the Assign To section, you will find option to select User to whom this document will be assigned to. You can assign one document to multiple people at a time.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/assign-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/assign-2.png">
With assignment, you can also leave a comment for the review of assignee.
@@ -26,13 +26,13 @@
This transaction will appear in the To-do list of the user in “Todo” section.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/assign-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/assign-3.png">
####Removing Assignment
User will be able to remove assignment by clicking on "Assignment Completed" button in the document.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/assign-4.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/assign-4.png">
Once assignment is set as completed, the Status of its ToDo record will be set as Closed.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/calendar.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/calendar.md
index 9003c8e..bf0412b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/calendar.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/calendar.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
You can switch calendar view based on Month, Week and Day.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Calendar" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calendar-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Calendar" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calendar-1.png">
### Creating Events in Calendar
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
This view will 24 hours of a day broken in various slots. You should click on slot for Event Start Time, and drag it down till you reach event end time.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Calendar" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calendar-2.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Calendar" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calendar-2.gif">
Based on the selection of time slot, Start Time and End Time will be updated in the Event master. Then you can set subject for an event, and save it.
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
In the Lead form, you will find a field called Next Contact By and Next Contact Date. Event will be auto created for date and person specified in this field.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Lead Event" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calendar-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Lead Event" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calendar-3.png">
#### Birthday Event
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
You can set events as recurring in specific interval by Checking the "Repeat This
Event".
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Calendar Recurring Event" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calendar-4.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Calendar Recurring Event" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calendar-4.png">
### Event Reminders
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
In the Event master, checking "Send an email reminder in the morning" will trigger notification email to all the participants for this event.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Calendar Recurring Event" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calendar-6.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Calendar Recurring Event" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calendar-6.png">
#### Create Email Digest
@@ -53,6 +53,6 @@
`Setup > Email > Email Digest`
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Calendar Recurring Event" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calender-email-digest.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Calendar Recurring Event" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/calender-email-digest.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/chat.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/chat.md
index 4c92a20..867c4b4 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/chat.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/chat.md
@@ -7,10 +7,10 @@
If you send a message to a user, and the user is logged in, it will appear as a popup message and the unread messages counter in the top toolbar will be
updated.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/chat-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/chat-1.png">
You can choose to send message to all the users, or to specific user.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/chat-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/chat-2.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/collaborating-around-forms.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/collaborating-around-forms.md
index c502f44..b0cf945 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/collaborating-around-forms.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/collaborating-around-forms.md
@@ -4,23 +4,23 @@
### Assigned to
-If some document requires an action from User, you can Assign that document to that User. On assignment, User to whom document is assigned is intimated via email. To learn about Assign To feature, [click here.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/assignment.html)
+If some document requires an action from User, you can Assign that document to that User. On assignment, User to whom document is assigned is intimated via email. To learn about Assign To feature, [click here.](/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/assignment.html)
### Comments
Comments are a great way to add information about a transaction that is not a
part of the transactions. Like some background information etc.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/comments-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/comments-1.png">
###Share
You can share document with the specific User. If Document is shared with the specific User, he/she will be able to access it, even if that User doesn't have permission to access that document or Document Type.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/share-1.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/share-1.gif">
### Tags
-[Read more about Tags]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/tags.html)
+[Read more about Tags](/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/tags.html)
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/document-versioning.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/document-versioning.md
index 86f4183e..126f761 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/document-versioning.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/document-versioning.md
@@ -8,16 +8,16 @@
Document Versioning can be enabled for one Document Type as a time. Let's assume that we need to enable it from Purchase Order. Then, we will check Customize Form tool for Purchase Order and check field `Track Changes`. With this, document versioning will be enabled for all the Purchase Orders create and edited hence forth.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Enable Versioning" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/enable-versioning.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Enable Versioning" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/enable-versioning.png">
####Version Log
Following is link of version in a Purchase Order form. Each time a document is edited, a version's link will be added in that document. To check more details on specific version, click on it's link.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Version Links" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/version-links.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Version Links" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/version-links.png">
####Version Details
In the Version document, you will find log of all the fields and values changes in it.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Version Details" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/version-details.png">
\ No newline at end of file
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Version Details" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/version-details.png">
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/notes.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/notes.md
index 1a18b9b..91c1689 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/notes.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/notes.md
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@
Enter Title and Context.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Note New" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/note-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Note New" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/note-1.png">
####Set Permissions to select Users
To make Note accessible for all, check "Public" under links section. Else you can share it with the specific User by using Share feature.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Note New" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/share-1.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Note New" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/share-1.gif">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/restore-deleted-docs.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/restore-deleted-docs.md
index 000b2c4..d43fc67 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/restore-deleted-docs.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/restore-deleted-docs.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
In ERPNext, you can delete a records if not needed. They can be masters like Items, Customer or transactions like Sales Order, Payment Entries etc.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Delete a Docuemnt" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/delete-a-doc.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Delete a Docuemnt" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/delete-a-doc.png">
If you have deleted an entry by mistake and wish to restore it back into your ERPNext account.
@@ -16,18 +16,18 @@
For the list of deleted document, just type Deleted Document in the Search Bar and go to list.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Deleted Docs List" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/deleted-docs-list.gif">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Deleted Docs List" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/deleted-docs-list.gif">
####Step 2: Open Doc and Restore
Open the document to be restored from the list. Click on Restore button.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Restored Doc" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/restore-a-doc.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Restored Doc" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/restore-a-doc.png">
####Step 3: Restored
Once a document is restored, you will be able to use it for creating entries in your ERPNext account.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Restored Doc" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/restored-doc.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Restored Doc" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/restored-doc.png">
> If canceled document is deleted, then it will not be restored.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/tags.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/tags.md
index 547ef7d..99a6aac 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/tags.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/tags.md
@@ -2,10 +2,10 @@
Like Assignments and Comments, you can also add your own tags to each type of transactions. These tags can help you search a document and also classify it.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/tags-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/tags-1.png">
ERPNext will also show you all the important tags in the document list.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/tags-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/tags-2.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/to-do.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/to-do.md
index 55e5886..c6cd280 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/to-do.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/to-do.md
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
# To Do
-To Do is a simple tool where all the activities [assigned]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/assignments.html) to you and assigned by you are listed. You can also add your own to-do items in the list.
+To Do is a simple tool where all the activities [assigned](/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/assignments.html) to you and assigned by you are listed. You can also add your own to-do items in the list.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/assign-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/assign-3.png">
When task is completed, you should simply remove assignment from the assigned document. With this, task will be removed from your Todo list as well. For Todo which are not assigned via document, you can set their status as Closed from the Todo master itself.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/collaboration-tools/assign-4.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Assign" src="/docs/assets/img/collaboration-tools/assign-4.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/add-products-to-website.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/add-products-to-website.md
index bb5106f..e148919 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/add-products-to-website.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/add-products-to-website.md
@@ -13,14 +13,14 @@
For this example, click on the **New** button to create a new item. Fill in the form and then click **Save**.
-
+
#### Step 2: Save Image
1. Click the new item from the list to edit it.
1. In the upper left, click the image block to give the product a picture. Be sure to uncheck the **Private** box so the image will be publicly viewable.
-
+
#### Step 3: Check the 'Show in Website' box
@@ -28,17 +28,17 @@
* Give the page a route on the website.
-
+
#### Step 4: Enter Website Details
Once the `Show in Website` checkbox is checked, a new section called **Website Specifications** appears. Expand this section to add more details about the rocking chair to the website.
-
+
Click **Save** in the upper right and then click `See on Website` on the left under the product image to see the item on your website.
-
+
### Item Groups
@@ -49,17 +49,17 @@
* Fill in a description for your products page.
* Click **Save**.
-
+
* Go back to the rocking chair item, expand the **website** section.
* Click **Add new row** button under the `Item Group` table.
* Select `Products` from the list.
* Click **Save**.
-
+
To see on the website, go back to the `Item Group` and then click **See on website**.
-
+
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/managing-user-sign-up-via-website.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/managing-user-sign-up-via-website.md
index 04fd128..e48b87a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/managing-user-sign-up-via-website.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/managing-user-sign-up-via-website.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
Your Customer and Suppliers can signup to your ERPNext account by following Signup option on the Login Page.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Website User Signup" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/website-login.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Website User Signup" src="/docs/assets/img/website/website-login.png">
As seen above the login / sign-up button appears on the homepage of the website generated using ERPNext.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-home-page.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-home-page.md
index d44a31a..92bcc77 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-home-page.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-home-page.md
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
Enter the same value you entered for the `route` field in the previous section to the `Home Page` field. ERPNext will set this route to be the same as /index for your page.
-
+
#### **Step 4: Save Website Settings Form.**
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-security.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-security.md
index 82d1d4f..5c0e2de 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-security.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-security.md
@@ -6,8 +6,8 @@
Well at the moment this feature is not available. You cannot limit the access of the website generated by ERPNext to certain people. If you publish the website it will be publicly visible. However while you cannot control who can view the website, you can always choose which items to display on the website. To show or not show an Item on your website go to `Selling > Items and Pricing > Item` and in the Item form check the `show in website` checkbox.
-<img src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/item-show-on-website-checkbox.png">
+<img src="/docs/assets/img/articles/item-show-on-website-checkbox.png">
Once the check box has been checked, then more details will appear that you can fill in for the details of the product as to be shown on the website.
-<img src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/articles/item-show-on-website-checkbox-checked.png">
\ No newline at end of file
+<img src="/docs/assets/img/articles/item-show-on-website-checkbox-checked.png">
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/blog-post.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/blog-post.md
index 2b270e2..e6f7960 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/blog-post.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/blog-post.md
@@ -10,13 +10,13 @@
> Website > Blog > New Blog
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Blog Post" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/blog-post.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Blog Post" src="/docs/assets/img/website/blog-post.png">
You can format a blog using the Markdown format.You can also access your blog
by going to the page “blog.html”.
#### A sample blog-page.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Blog Sample" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/blog-sample.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Blog Sample" src="/docs/assets/img/website/blog-sample.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/blogger.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/blogger.md
index 469ada1..a47bdee 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/blogger.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/blogger.md
@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@
Blogger is a user who can post blogs.
You can mention a short bio about the blogger and also set a avatar here.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Blogger" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/blogger.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Blogger" src="/docs/assets/img/website/blogger.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/website-settings.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/website-settings.md
index c3e17c0..6d5ad23 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/website-settings.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/website-settings.md
@@ -2,11 +2,11 @@
Most of the website related settings can be defined here.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Website Settings" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/website-settings.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Website Settings" src="/docs/assets/img/website/website-settings.png">
####Landing Page
-* Home Page: You can specify which [Web Page]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/website/web-page.html) must be the homepage of the website
+* Home Page: You can specify which [Web Page](/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-page.html) must be the homepage of the website
* Home Page is Products: if Checked, the Home page will be the default Item Group for the website.
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
Select the theme for the website. You can create new Theme for you website also.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Website Theme" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/website-theme.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Website Theme" src="/docs/assets/img/website/website-theme.png">
* Select 'create new website theme' if you wish to customize the default website theme.
@@ -25,13 +25,13 @@
You can add a banner/ logo to your website here. Attach the image and click on set banner from Image.
An HTML code will be generated by the system under Banner HTML.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Banner" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/banner.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Banner" src="/docs/assets/img/website/banner.png">
####Top Bar
You can set the menus items in the Top Bar here.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Top Bar" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/top-bar.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Top Bar" src="/docs/assets/img/website/top-bar.png">
* Similarlly you can also set sidebar and footer links.
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
You can integrate the website using Google Analytics and enable social media sharing for post shared on the website.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Integrations" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/integrations.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Integrations" src="/docs/assets/img/website/integrations.png">
* You can disable public signup to your ERPNext account by checking 'disable signup'
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/shopping-cart.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/shopping-cart.md
index 26284f5..8fe5244 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/shopping-cart.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/shopping-cart.md
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
#### Enter Company Details and Checkout Details.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Shopping Cart Settings" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/item-website-specs.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Shopping Cart Settings" src="/docs/assets/img/website/item-website-specs.png">
To make item available on website go to Item master.
@@ -24,11 +24,11 @@
#### Enable Item for website.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Item" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/item-in-webiste.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Item" src="/docs/assets/img/website/item-in-webiste.png">
#### Enter Website Specifications for Item.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Website Specifications" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/item-website-specs.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Website Specifications" src="/docs/assets/img/website/item-website-specs.png">
### Shop using Shopping Cart
@@ -37,20 +37,20 @@
Click on "Add to Cart" to add item to shopping cart.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Website Specifications" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/item-website-view.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Website Specifications" src="/docs/assets/img/website/item-website-view.png">
#### Goto Checkout
Click on "Go to Cart" to checkout or on "Cart" which is on upper right side
of the screen.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Website Specifications" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/checkout.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Website Specifications" src="/docs/assets/img/website/checkout.png">
#### Checkout
Change quantity, select Shipping and Billing Address and click
on "Place Order" to place the order.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Website Specifications" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/place-order.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Website Specifications" src="/docs/assets/img/website/place-order.png">
{next}
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-form.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-form.md
index 1668ac0..b75ef0b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-form.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-form.md
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
1. Select if you require the user to login, edit records, manage multiple records etc.
1. Add the fields you want in the record.
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Web Form" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/web-form.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Web Form" src="/docs/assets/img/website/web-form.png">
---
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
Once you create the web form, you can view it on the url and test it out!
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Web form" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/web-form-view.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Web form" src="/docs/assets/img/website/web-form-view.png">
---
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-page.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-page.md
index 5b4d46b..f931f02 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-page.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-page.md
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
> Website > Web Page > New
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Web Page" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/website/web-page.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Web Page" src="/docs/assets/img/website/web-page.png">
#### Title
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/accounting-entries.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/accounting-entries.md
index e270751..9ad5abd 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/accounting-entries.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/accounting-entries.md
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
* Mama (El propietario de Tea-stall) invierte $25000 para iniciar el negocio.
-
+
__Análisis:__ Mama invierte 25000 en la compañía, con la esperanza de obtener alguna
ganancia. En otras palabras, la compañía es responsable del pago de $25000 a mama en
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@
que pertenece a un amigo y le concede cierto crédito. Los equipos cuestan 2800 y las
materias primas valen 2200. La compañía paga 2000 de un total de 5000.
-
+
__Análisis:__ Los equipos son "Activos Fijos" (porque tienen una larga vida útil) de la
compañía y las materias primas son "Activos corrientes" (porque son usados en la
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
día, Tea Stall vende 325 tazas de té, lo cual da una venta neta de RS. 1575. El propietario
registra feliz su primer día de ventas.
-
+
__Análisis:__ Los ingresos han sido anotados en la cuenta "Ventas de Té", la cual se
debita para incrementar el valor y la misma cantidad se acredita de la cuenta
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
Al finalizar el mes, la compañía paga el arriendo del local (5000) y el salario de
un empleado (8000), el cual trabajó desde el primer día.
-
+
### Registro de ganancias
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@
débito no es igual al crédito, la ganacia aún no ha sido anotada. Se debe realziar
la siguiente entrada:
-
+
Explicación: Las ventas y gastos netos son 40000 y 20000 respectivamente.
Entonces, la compañía tuvo una ganancia de 20000. Para registrar esa entrada,
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/accounting-reports.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/accounting-reports.md
index 7827e1a..a887f9a 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/accounting-reports.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/accounting-reports.md
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
periodo determinado.
<img alt="Libro Mayor" class="screenshot"
- src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/general-ledger.png">
+ src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/general-ledger.png">
### Balance Contable
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* Creditos
* Cierre
-<img alt="Balance Contable" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/trial-balance.png">
+<img alt="Balance Contable" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/trial-balance.png">
La suma de todos los balances de cierre en el Balance Contable debe ser igual a cero.
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
Este reporte permite hacer seguimiento a las facturas enviadas a los clientes y proveedores. En este
reporte, se resaltan diferentes periodos de tiempo. p.e. entre 0-30 días, 30-60 días y así por el estilo.
-<img alt="Accounts Receivable" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/accounts-receivable.png">
+<img alt="Accounts Receivable" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/accounts-receivable.png">
### Registro de Ventas y Compras
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
se puede obtener la cantidad de impuestos individuales que debe ser pagados, de acuerdo a la
tabla de Impuestos y Contribuciones,
-<img alt="Sales Register" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/sales-register.png">
+<img alt="Sales Register" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/sales-register.png">
**Trabajo en progreso.**
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
index 2778f29..e373c7b 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
#### Figure 1 : Journal Entry -Advance Entry
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Advace Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/advance-payment-1.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Advace Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/advance-payment-1.png">
### Double Entry Accounting
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
#### Figure 2: Transaction and Difference Entry
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Advace Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/advance-payment-2.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Advace Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/advance-payment-2.png">
Save and submit the JV. If this document is not saved it will not be pulled in
other accounting documents.
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@
#### Figure 3: Receive Advance
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Advace Payment" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/accounts/advance-payment-3.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Advace Payment" src="/docs/assets/img/accounts/advance-payment-3.png">
Save and submit the Sales Invoice.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/index.md
index 60b0d4d..c701b42 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/index.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/index.md
@@ -6,4 +6,4 @@
**Trabajo en progreso.**
-[La traducción al Español del manual de ERPNext está en progreso. Click aquí para ver el manual en ingles]({{ docs_base_url }}/user/manual/en)
+[La traducción al Español del manual de ERPNext está en progreso. Click aquí para ver el manual en ingles](/docs/user/manual/en)
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/key-workflows.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/key-workflows.md
index 6a29abf..6877fb3 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/key-workflows.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/key-workflows.md
@@ -3,10 +3,10 @@
Este diagrama cubre como ERPNext hace el seguimiento de la información de su compañia a través de funciones claves.
Este diagrama no cubre toda la funcionalidad o características de ERPNext.
-
+
-<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/overview.png">
+<img class="screenshot" alt="Workflow" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/overview.png">
_Nota: No todos los pasos son obligatorios. ERPNext te permite pasar algunos pasos si deseas simplificar el proceso._
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/the-champion.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/the-champion.md
index 5978078..0d2106e 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/the-champion.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/the-champion.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
<h1 class="white">El campeón</h1>
-<img alt="Champion" class="screenshot" src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/setup/implementation-image.png">
+<img alt="Champion" class="screenshot" src="/docs/assets/img/setup/implementation-image.png">
Hemos visto docenas de implementaciones de sistemas ERP en los últimos años
y nos hemos dado cuenta que una implementación exitosa es más sobre cosas intangibles y actitudes.
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/index.md
index e3061d0..cc37ba4 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/manual/index.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/manual/index.md
@@ -2,6 +2,6 @@
Select your language
-1. [English]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en)
-1. [Deutsch]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de)
-1. [Español]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/es)
\ No newline at end of file
+1. [English](/docs/user/manual/en)
+1. [Deutsch](/docs/user/manual/de)
+1. [Español](/docs/user/manual/es)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/videos/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/videos/index.md
index 9a82db5..8d3b701 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/videos/index.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/videos/index.md
@@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
# ERPNext Videos
<h3>
- <a class="no-decoration" href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn">Learn ERPNext</a>
+ <a class="no-decoration" href="/docs/user/videos/learn">Learn ERPNext</a>
</h3>
<div class="row">
<div class="col-sm-4">
- <a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn">
- <img src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/videos/learn.jpg" class="img-responsive" style="margin-top: 0px;">
+ <a href="/docs/user/videos/learn">
+ <img src="/docs/assets/img/videos/learn.jpg" class="img-responsive" style="margin-top: 0px;">
</a>
</div>
<div class="col-sm-8">
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
<div class="row">
<div class="col-sm-4">
<a href="https://conf.erpnext.com/2014/videos">
- <img src="{{docs_base_url}}/assets/img/videos/conf-2014.jpg" class="img-responsive" style="margin-top: 0px;">
+ <img src="/docs/assets/img/videos/conf-2014.jpg" class="img-responsive" style="margin-top: 0px;">
</a>
</div>
<div class="col-sm-8">
diff --git a/erpnext/docs/user/videos/learn/index.md b/erpnext/docs/user/videos/learn/index.md
index faaf49c..dad5cc0 100644
--- a/erpnext/docs/user/videos/learn/index.md
+++ b/erpnext/docs/user/videos/learn/index.md
@@ -11,23 +11,23 @@
<br>
<h3>ERPNext Demonstrations</h3>
<ul class="list-unstyled video-list">
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/services.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/services.html">
ERPNext for Services Business</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">52:50</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/distributors.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/distributors.html">
ERPNext for Distributors</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">51:47</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/manufacturing-make-to-order.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/manufacturing-make-to-order.html">
ERPNext for Manufacturers</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">14:26</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/retailers.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/retailers.html">
ERPNext for Retailers</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">39:21</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/schools.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/schools.html">
ERPNext for Schools</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">39:21</span>
</li>
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
<br>
<h3>Using ERPNext</h3>
<ul class="list-unstyled video-list">
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/navigation.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/navigation.html">
User Interface and Navigation</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">2:17</span>
</li>
@@ -43,47 +43,47 @@
<br>
<h3>Setting Up</h3>
<ul class="list-unstyled video-list">
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/setup-wizard.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/setup-wizard.html">
The Setup Wizard</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">2:28</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/user-and-permission.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/user-and-permission.html">
User and Permissions</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">6:16</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/data-import-tool.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/data-import-tool.html">
Data Import Tool</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">6:31</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/printing-and-branding.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/printing-and-branding.html">
Printing and Branding</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">4:00</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/customer-and-supplier.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/customer-and-supplier.html">
Customer and Supplier</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">4:35</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/item.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/item.html">
Item and Pricing</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">3:55</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/opening-stock.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/opening-stock.html">
Opening Stock</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">4:27</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/chart-of-accounts.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/chart-of-accounts.html">
Chart of Accounts</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">3:10</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/opening-account-balances.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/opening-account-balances.html">
Opening Account Balances</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">4:40</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/email-account.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/email-account.html">
Email Account</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">2:27</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/file-manager.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/file-manager.html">
File Manager</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">2:24</span>
</li>
@@ -91,31 +91,31 @@
<br>
<h3>CRM and Sales</h3>
<ul class="list-unstyled video-list">
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/lead-to-quotation.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/lead-to-quotation.html">
Customer Relationship Management</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">3:29</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/customer-and-supplier.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/customer-and-supplier.html">
Customer</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">4:35</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/sales-cycle.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/sales-cycle.html">
Sales Order to Payment</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">4:28</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/product-bundle.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/product-bundle.html">
Product Bundle</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">2:31</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/newsletter.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/newsletter.html">
Newsletter</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">2:04</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/taxes.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/taxes.html">
Taxes</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">3:00</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/drop-ship.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/drop-ship.html">
Drop Ship</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">2:26</span>
</li>
@@ -123,23 +123,23 @@
<br>
<h3>Buying</h3>
<ul class="list-unstyled video-list">
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/customer-and-supplier.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/customer-and-supplier.html">
Supplier</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">4:35</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/material-request-to-purchase-order.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/material-request-to-purchase-order.html">
Material Request to Purchase Order</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">2:25</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/request-for-quotation.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/request-for-quotation.html">
Request for Quotation</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">3:17</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/purchase-cycle.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/purchase-cycle.html">
Purchase Order to Payment</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">3:16</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/taxes.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/taxes.html">
Taxes</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">5:13</span>
</li>
@@ -147,39 +147,39 @@
<br>
<h3>Stock</h3>
<ul class="list-unstyled video-list">
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/item.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/item.html">
Item and Pricing</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">3:17</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/item-variant.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/item-variant.html">
Item Variant</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">2:38</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/opening-stock.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/opening-stock.html">
Stock Opening Balance</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">4:27</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/stock-entries.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/stock-entries.html">
Stock Entries</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">3:46</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/serialized-inventory.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/serialized-inventory.html">
Serialized Inventory</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">4:12</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/batch-inventory.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/batch-inventory.html">
Batched Inventory</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">3:46</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/subcontracting.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/subcontracting.html">
Managing Subcontracting</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">4:37</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/quality-inspection.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/quality-inspection.html">
Quality Inspection</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">2:36</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/fixed-assets.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/fixed-assets.html">
Fixed Assets Management</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">6:35</span>
</li>
@@ -187,23 +187,23 @@
<br>
<h3>Accounts</h3>
<ul class="list-unstyled video-list">
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/chart-of-accounts.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/chart-of-accounts.html">
Chart of Accounts</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">3:10</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/opening-account-balances.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/opening-account-balances.html">
Accounts Opening Balances</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">4:40</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/taxes.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/taxes.html">
Taxes</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">5:13</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/advance-payments.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/advance-payments.html">
Advance Payments</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">2:52</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/budgeting.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/budgeting.html">
Budgeting</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">3:26</span>
</li>
@@ -211,25 +211,25 @@
<br>
<h3>Manufacturing</h3>
<ul class="list-unstyled video-list">
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/bill-of-materials.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/bill-of-materials.html">
Bill of Materials</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">3:27</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/production-planning.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/production-planning.html">
Production Planning Tool</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">1:41</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/production-order.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/production-order.html">
Production Order</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">2:24</span>
</li>
<li>
- <a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/manufacturing-make-to-order.html">
+ <a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/manufacturing-make-to-order.html">
ERPNext for Manufacturers (Make to Order)</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">14:26</span>
</li>
<li>
- <a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/manufacturing-enigneer-to-order.html">
+ <a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/manufacturing-enigneer-to-order.html">
ERPNext for Manufacturers (Engineer to Order)</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">44:40</span>
</li>
@@ -237,19 +237,19 @@
<br>
<h3>Human Resource</h3>
<ul class="list-unstyled video-list">
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/employee.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/employee.html">
Employees</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">1:59</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/processing-payroll.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/processing-payroll.html">
Processing Payroll</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">4:00</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/leave-management.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/leave-management.html">
Leave Management</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">2:50</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/expense-claim.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/expense-claim.html">
Expense Claims</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">2:52</span>
</li>
@@ -257,11 +257,11 @@
<br>
<h3>Retail</h3>
<ul class="list-unstyled video-list">
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/point-of-sale.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/point-of-sale.html">
Point of Sale</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">2:34</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/retailers.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/retailers.html">
ERPNext for Retailers (Demo)</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">39:21</span>
</li>
@@ -269,7 +269,7 @@
<br>
<h3>Project</h3>
<ul class="list-unstyled video-list">
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/project-and-task.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/project-and-task.html">
Project and Task</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">3:52</span>
</li>
@@ -277,10 +277,10 @@
<br>
<h3>Website</h3>
<ul class="list-unstyled video-list">
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/publish-items-on-website.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/publish-items-on-website.html">
Publish Items on Website</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">5:14</span>
- </li><li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/shopping-cart.html">
+ </li><li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/shopping-cart.html">
Shopping Cart</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">6:32</span>
</li>
@@ -288,19 +288,19 @@
<br>
<h3>Customization</h3>
<ul class="list-unstyled video-list">
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/field-customization.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/field-customization.html">
Field Customization</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">3:10</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/bulk-update.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/bulk-update.html">
Bulk Update Data</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">1:38</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/workflow.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/workflow.html">
Workflow</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">3:38</span>
</li>
- <li><a href="{{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/report-builder.html">
+ <li><a href="/docs/user/videos/learn/report-builder.html">
Report Builder</a>
<span class="text-muted pull-right">4:27</span>
</li>